Instruction manual | Blackberry 8330 Cell Phone User Manual

MELSERVO
Servo Amplifiers and Motors
Instruction Manual
MR-J2S-쏔A
Art. no.: 138918
2001 02 15
Version C
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Safety Instructions
(Always read these instructions before using the equipment.)
Do not attempt to install, operate, maintain or inspect the servo amplifier and servo motor until you have read
through this Instruction Manual, Installation guide, Servo motor Instruction Manual and appended documents
carefully and can use the equipment correctly. Do not use the servo amplifier and servo motor until you have a
full knowledge of the equipment, safety information and instructions.
In this Instruction Manual, the safety instruction levels are classified into "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
WARNING
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in death or severe injury.
CAUTION
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,
resulting in medium or slight injury to personnel or may cause physical
damage.
Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to conditions. Please follow the
instructions of both levels because they are important to personnel safety.
What must not be done and what must be done are indicated by the following diagrammatic symbols:
: Indicates what must not be done. For example, "No Fire" is indicated by
: Indicates what must be done. For example, grounding is indicated by
.
.
In this Instruction Manual, instructions at a lower level than the above, instructions for other functions, and so
on are classified into "POINT".
After reading this installation guide, always keep it accessible to the operator.
A- 1
1. To prevent electric shock, note the following:
WARNING
Before wiring or inspection, switch power off and wait for more than 10 minutes. Then, confirm the voltage
is safe with voltage tester. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
Connect the servo amplifier and servo motor to ground.
Any person who is involved in wiring and inspection should be fully competent to do the work.
Do not attempt to wire the servo amplifier and servo motor until they have been installed. Otherwise, you
may get an electric shock.
Operate the switches with dry hand to prevent an electric shock.
The cables should not be damaged, stressed, loaded, or pinched. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
2. To prevent fire, note the following:
CAUTION
Do not install the servo amplifier, servo motor and regenerative brake resistor on or near combustibles.
Otherwise a fire may cause.
When the servo amplifier has become faulty, switch off the main servo amplifier power side. Continuous
flow of a large current may cause a fire.
When a regenerative brake resistor is used, use an alarm signal to switch main power off. Otherwise, a
regenerative brake transistor fault or the like may overheat the regenerative brake resistor, causing a fire.
3. To prevent injury, note the follow
CAUTION
Only the voltage specified in the Instruction Manual should be applied to each terminal, Otherwise, a
burst, damage, etc. may occur.
Connect the terminals correctly to prevent a burst, damage, etc.
Ensure that polarity ( ,
) is correct. Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur.
During power-on or for some time after power-off, do not touch or close a parts (cable etc.) to the servo
amplifier heat sink, regenerative brake resistor, servo motor, etc. Their temperatures may be high and you
may get burnt or a parts may damaged.
A- 2
4. Additional instructions
The following instructions should also be fully noted. Incorrect handling may cause a fault, injury, electric
shock, etc.
(1) Transportation and installation
CAUTION
Transport the products correctly according to their weights.
Stacking in excess of the specified number of products is not allowed.
Do not carry the motor by the cables, shaft or encoder.
Do not hold the front cover to transport the controller. The controller may drop.
Install the servo amplifier in a load-bearing place in accordance with the Instruction Manual.
Do not climb or stand on servo equipment. Do not put heavy objects on equipment.
The controller and servo motor must be installed in the specified direction.
Leave specified clearances between the servo amplifier and control enclosure walls or other equipment.
Do not install or operate the servo amplifier and servo motor which has been damaged or has any parts
missing.
Provide adequate protection to prevent screws and other conductive matter, oil and other combustible
matter from entering the servo amplifier.
Do not drop or strike servo amplifier or servo motor. Isolate from all impact loads.
Use the servo amplifier and servo motor under the following environmental conditions:
Environment
Ambient
temperature
Ambient humidity
Storage
temperature
Storage humidity
Ambience
Altitude
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[m/s2]
Vibration
[ft/s2]
Conditions
Servo amplifier
Servo motor
0 to 55 (non-freezing)
0 to 40 (non-freezing)
32 to 131 (non-freezing)
32 to 104 (non-freezing)
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
80%RH or less (non-condensing)
20 to 65 (non-freezing)
15 to 70 (non-freezing)
4 to 149 (non-freezing)
5 to 158 (non-freezing)
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Indoors (no direct sunlight) Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt
Max. 1000m (3280 ft) above sea level
HC-KFS Series
X Y : 49
HC-MFS Series
HC-UFS13 to 73
HC-SFS81
HC-SFS52 to 152
HC-SFS53 to 153
X Y : 24.5
HC-RFS Series
5.9 or less
HC-UFS 72 152
HC-SFS121 201
X : 24.5
HC-SFS202 352
HC-SFS203 353
Y : 49
HC-UFS202 to 502
X : 24.5
HC-SFS301
Y : 29.4
HC-SFS502 702
HC-KFS Series
HC-MFS Series
X Y : 161
HC-UFS 13 to 73
HC-SFS81
HC-SFS52 to 152
HC-SFS53 to 153
X Y : 80
HC-RFS Series
19.4 or less
HC-UFS 72 152
HC-SFS121 201
HC-SFS202 352
X : 80
Y : 161
HC-SFS203 353
HC-UFS202 to 502
X : 80
HC-SFS301
Y : 96
HC-SFS502 702
A- 3
CAUTION
Securely attach the servo motor to the machine. If attach insecurely, the servo motor may come off during
operation.
The servo motor with reduction gear must be installed in the specified direction to prevent oil leakage.
For safety of personnel, always cover rotating and moving parts.
Never hit the servo motor or shaft, especially when coupling the servo motor to the machine. The encoder
may become faulty.
Do not subject the servo motor shaft to more than the permissible load. Otherwise, the shaft may break.
When the equipment has been stored for an extended period of time, consult Mitsubishi.
(2) Wiring
CAUTION
Wire the equipment correctly and securely. Otherwise, the servo motor may misoperate.
Do not install a power capacitor, surge absorber or radio noise filter (FR-BIF option) between the servo
motor and servo amplifier.
Connect the output terminals (U, V, W) correctly. Otherwise, the servo motor will operate improperly.
Do not connect AC power directly to the servo motor. Otherwise, a fault may occur.
The surge absorbing diode installed on the DC output signal relay must be wired in the specified direction.
Otherwise, the emergency stop and other protective circuits may not operate.
Servo
Amplifier
Servo
Amplifier
COM
(24VDC)
COM
(24VDC)
Control
output
signal
Control
output
signal
RA
RA
(3) Test run adjustment
CAUTION
Before operation, check the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause some machines to perform
unexpected operation.
The parameter settings must not be changed excessively. Operation will be insatiable.
A- 4
(4) Usage
CAUTION
Provide an external emergency stop circuit to ensure that operation can be stopped and power switched
off immediately.
Any person who is involved in disassembly and repair should be fully competent to do the work.
Before resetting an alarm, make sure that the run signal is off to prevent an accident. A sudden restart is
made if an alarm is reset with the run signal on.
Do not modify the equipment.
Use a noise filter, etc. to minimize the influence of electromagnetic interference, which may be caused by
electronic equipment used near the servo amplifier.
Use the servo amplifier with the specified servo motor.
The electromagnetic brake on the servo motor is designed to hold the motor shaft and should not be used
for ordinary braking.
For such reasons as service life and mechanical structure (e.g. where a ballscrew and the servo motor
are coupled via a timing belt), the electromagnetic brake may not hold the motor shaft. To ensure safety,
install a stopper on the machine side.
(5) Corrective actions
CAUTION
When it is assumed that a hazardous condition may take place at the occur due to a power failure or a
product fault, use a servo motor with electromagnetic brake or an external brake mechanism for the
purpose of prevention.
Configure the electromagnetic brake circuit so that it is activated not only by the servo amplifier signals
but also by an external emergency stop signal.
Contacts must be open when
servo-on signal is off, when an
alarm (trouble) is present and when
an electromagnetic brake signal.
Circuit must be
opened during
emergency stop signal.
Servo motor
RA EMG
24VDC
Electromagnetic brake
When any alarm has occurred, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, and deactivate the alarm before
restarting operation.
When power is restored after an instantaneous power failure, keep away from the machine because the
machine may be restarted suddenly (design the machine so that it is secured against hazard if restarted).
A- 5
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
CAUTION
With age, the electrolytic capacitor will deteriorate. To prevent a secondary accident due to a fault, it is
recommended to replace the electrolytic capacitor every 10 years when used in general environment.
Please consult our sales representative.
(7) Disposal
CAUTION
Dispose of the product as general industrial waste.
(8) General instruction
To illustrate details, the equipment in the diagrams of this Instruction Manual may have been drawn
without covers and safety guards. When the equipment is operated, the covers and safety guards must be
installed as specified. Operation must be performed in accordance with this Instruction Manual.
A- 6
COMPLIANCE WITH EC DIRECTIVES
1. WHAT ARE EC DIRECTIVES?
The EC directives were issued to standardize the regulations of the EU countries and ensure smooth
distribution of safety-guaranteed products. In the EU countries, the machinery directive (effective in
January, 1995), EMC directive (effective in January, 1996) and low voltage directive (effective in January,
1997) of the EC directives require that products to be sold should meet their fundamental safety
requirements and carry the CE marks (CE marking). CE marking applies to machines and equipment
into which servo amplifiers have been installed.
(1) EMC directive
The EMC directive applies not to the servo units alone but to servo-incorporated machines and
equipment. This requires the EMC filters to be used with the servo-incorporated machines and
equipment to comply with the EMC directive. For specific EMC directive conforming methods, refer to
the EMC Installation Guidelines (IB(NA)67310).
This servo is certified by TUV, third-party assessment organization, to comply with the EMC directive
in the conforming methods of the EMC Installation Guidelines.
(2) Low voltage directive
The low voltage directive applies also to servo units alone. Hence, they are designed to comply with
the low voltage directive.
This servo is certified by TUV, third-party assessment organization, to comply with the low voltage
directive.
(3) Machine directive
Not being machines, the servo amplifiers need not comply with this directive.
2. PRECAUTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE
(1) Servo amplifiers and servo motors used
Use the servo amplifiers and servo motors which comply with the standard model.
Servo amplifier
Servo motor
:MR-J2S-10A to MR-J2S-700A
MR-J2S-10A1 to MR-J2S-40A1
:HC-KFS
HC-MFS
HC-SFS
HC-RFS
HC-UFS
(2) Configuration
Control box
Reinforced
insulating type
Reinforced
insulating
transformer
No-fuse
breaker
Magnetic
contactor
NFB
MC
24VDC
power
supply
Servo
amplifier
Servo
motor
SM
(3) Environment
Operate the servo amplifier at or above the contamination level 2 set forth in IEC664. For this
purpose, install the servo amplifier in a control box which is protected against water, oil, carbon, dust,
dirt, etc. (IP54).
A- 7
(4) Power supply
(a) Operate the servo amplifier to meet the requirements of the overvoltage category II set forth in
IEC664. For this purpose, a reinforced insulating transformer conforming to the IEC or EN
Standard should be used in the power input section.
(b) When supplying interface power from external, use a 24VDC power supply which has been
insulation-reinforced in I/O.
(5) Grounding
(a) To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminals (marked
servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box.
) of the
(b) Do not connect two ground cables to the same protective earth (PE) terminal. Always connect the
cables to the terminals one-to-one.
PE terminals
PE terminals
(c) If a leakage current breaker is used to prevent an electric shock, the protective earth (PE) terminals
of the servo amplifier must be connected to the corresponding earth terminals.
(6) Wiring
(a) The cables to be connected to the terminal block of the servo amplifier must have crimping
terminals provided with insulating tubes to prevent contact with adjacent terminals.
Crimping terminal
Insulating tube
Cable
(b) When the servo motor has a power supply lead, use a fixed terminal block to connect it with the
servo amplifier. Do not connect cables directly.
Terminal block
A- 8
(7) Auxiliary equipment and options
(a) The no-fuse breaker and magnetic contactor used should be the EN or IEC standard-compliant
products of the models described in Section 13.2.2.
(b) The sizes of the cables described in Section 13.2.1 meet the following requirements. To meet the
other requirements, follow Table 5 and Appendix C in EN60204-1.
Ambient temperature: 40 (104) [ ( )]
Sheath: PVC (polyvinyl chloride)
Installed on wall surface or open table tray
(c) Use the EMC filter for noise reduction. The radio noise filter (FR-BIF) is not required.
(8) Performing EMC tests
When EMC tests are run on a machine/device into which the servo amplifier has been installed, it
must conform to the electromagnetic compatibility (immunity/emission) standards after it has
satisfied the operating environment/electrical equipment specifications.
For the other EMC directive guidelines on the servo amplifier, refer to the EMC Installation
Guidelines(IB(NA)67310).
A- 9
CONFORMANCE WITH UL/C-UL STANDARD
(1) Servo amplifiers and servo motors used
Use the servo amplifiers and servo motors which comply with the standard model.
Servo amplifier
Servo motor
:MR-J2S-10A to MR-J2S-700A
MR-J2S-10A1 to MR-J2S-40A1
:HC-KFS
HC-MFS
HC-SFS
HC-RFS
HC-UFS
(2) Installation
Install a fan of 100CFM air flow 10.16 cm (4 in) above the servo amplifier or provide cooling of at least
equivalent capability.
(3) Short circuit rating
This servo amplifier conforms to the circuit whose peak current is limited to 5000A or less. Having
been subjected to the short-circuit tests of the UL in the alternating-current circuit, the servo
amplifier conforms to the above circuit.
(4) Capacitor discharge time
The capacitor discharge time is as listed below. To ensure safety, do not touch the charging section for
10 minutes after power-off.
Servo amplifier
Discharge time
[min]
MR-J2S-10A(1) 20A(1)
MR-J2S-40A(1) 60A
MR-J2S-70A to 350A
MR-J2S-500A 700A
1
2
3
5
(5) Options and auxiliary equipment
Use UL/C-UL standard-compliant products.
<<About the manuals>>
This Instruction Manual and the MELSERVO Servo Motor Instruction Manual are required if you use
the General-Purpose AC servo MR-J2S-A for the first time. Always purchase them and use the MRJ2S-A safely.
Relevant manuals
Manual name
Manual No.
MELSERVO-J2-Super Series To Use the AC Servo Safely
IB(NA)0300010
MELSERVO Servo Motor Instruction Manual
SH(NA)3181
EMC Installation Guidelines
IB(NA)67310
A - 10
CONTENTS
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
1- 1 to 1-18
1.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 1- 1
1.2 Function block diagram .......................................................................................................................... 1- 2
1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications ................................................................................................ 1- 3
1.4 Function list ............................................................................................................................................. 1- 4
1.5 Model code definition .............................................................................................................................. 1- 5
1.6 Combination with servo motor............................................................................................................... 1- 6
1.7 Structure................................................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.7.1 Parts identification ........................................................................................................................... 1- 7
1.7.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover .............................................................................. 1-11
1.8 Servo system with auxiliary equipment............................................................................................... 1-13
2. INSTALLATION
2- 1 to 2- 4
2.1 Environmental conditions....................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.2 Installation direction and clearances .................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.3 Keep out foreign materials ..................................................................................................................... 2- 3
2.4 Cable stress .............................................................................................................................................. 2- 4
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3- 1 to 3- 58
3.1 Standard connection example ................................................................................................................ 3- 2
3.1.1 Position control mode ....................................................................................................................... 3- 2
3.1.2 Speed control mode........................................................................................................................... 3- 6
3.1.3 Torque control mode ......................................................................................................................... 3- 8
3.2 Internal connection diagram of servo amplifier .................................................................................. 3-10
3.3 I/O signals................................................................................................................................................ 3-11
3.3.1 Connectors and signal arrangements............................................................................................ 3-11
3.3.2 Signal explanations ......................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.4 Detailed description of the signals........................................................................................................ 3-23
3.4.1 Position control mode ...................................................................................................................... 3-23
3.4.2 Speed control mode.......................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.4.3 Torque control mode ........................................................................................................................ 3-30
3.4.4 Position/speed control change mode .............................................................................................. 3-33
3.4.5 Speed/torque control change mode................................................................................................. 3-35
3.4.6 Torque/position control change mode ............................................................................................ 3-37
3.5 Alarm occurrence timing chart ............................................................................................................. 3-38
3.6 Interfaces................................................................................................................................................. 3-39
3.6.1 Common line .................................................................................................................................... 3-39
3.6.2 Detailed description of the interfaces ............................................................................................ 3-40
3.7 Input power supply circuit..................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.7.1 Connection example......................................................................................................................... 3-45
3.7.2 Terminals.......................................................................................................................................... 3-47
3.7.3 Power-on sequence........................................................................................................................... 3-48
3.8 Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor ................................................................................... 3-49
3.8.1 Connection instructions .................................................................................................................. 3-49
1
3.8.2 Connection diagram......................................................................................................................... 3-49
3.8.3 I/O terminals .................................................................................................................................... 3-51
3.9 Servo motor with electromagnetic brake ............................................................................................. 3-53
3.10 Grounding ............................................................................................................................................. 3-56
3.11 Servo amplifier terminal block (TE2) wiring method ....................................................................... 3-57
3.12 Instructions for the 3M connector....................................................................................................... 3-58
4. OPERATION
4- 1 to 4- 6
4.1 When switching power on for the first time.......................................................................................... 4- 1
4.2 Startup...................................................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2.1 Selection of control mode.................................................................................................................. 4- 2
4.2.2 Position control mode ....................................................................................................................... 4- 2
4.2.3 Speed control mode........................................................................................................................... 4- 4
4.2.4 Torque control mode ......................................................................................................................... 4- 5
4.3 Multidrop communication ...................................................................................................................... 4- 6
5. PARAMETERS
5- 1 to 5- 34
5.1 Parameter list .......................................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.1 Parameter write inhibit ................................................................................................................... 5- 1
5.1.2 Lists.................................................................................................................................................... 5- 2
5.2 Detailed description ............................................................................................................................... 5 25
5.2.1 Electronic gear ................................................................................................................................. 5-25
5.2.2 Analog output................................................................................................................................... 5-29
5.2.3 Using forward/reverse rotation stroke end to change the stopping pattern.............................. 5-32
5.2.4 Alarm history clear.......................................................................................................................... 5-32
5.2.5 Position smoothing .......................................................................................................................... 5-33
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6- 1 to 6-16
6.1 Display flowchart..................................................................................................................................... 6- 1
6.2 Status display .......................................................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.2.1 Display examples .............................................................................................................................. 6- 2
6.2.2 Status display list ............................................................................................................................. 6- 3
6.2.3 Changing the status display screen................................................................................................ 6- 4
6.3 Diagnostic mode....................................................................................................................................... 6- 5
6.4 Alarm mode .............................................................................................................................................. 6- 7
6.5 Parameter mode ...................................................................................................................................... 6- 8
6.6 External I/O signal display..................................................................................................................... 6- 9
6.7 Output signal (DO) forced output ......................................................................................................... 6-12
6.8 Test operation mode ............................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.8.1 Mode change..................................................................................................................................... 6-13
6.8.2 Jog operation .................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.8.3 Positioning operation....................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.8.4 Motor-less operation ........................................................................................................................ 6-16
2
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
7- 1 to 7-12
7.1 Different adjustment methods ............................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.1 Adjustment on a single servo amplifier.......................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.2 Adjustment using servo configuration software............................................................................ 7- 2
7.2 Auto tuning .............................................................................................................................................. 7- 3
7.2.1 Auto tuning mode ............................................................................................................................. 7- 3
7.2.2 Auto tuning mode operation ............................................................................................................ 7- 4
7.2.3 Adjustment procedure by auto tuning............................................................................................ 7- 5
7.2.4 Response level setting in auto tuning mode................................................................................... 7- 6
7.3 Manual mode 1 (simple manual adjustment)....................................................................................... 7- 7
7.3.1 Operation of manual mode 1 ........................................................................................................... 7- 7
7.3.2 Adjustment by manual mode 1 ....................................................................................................... 7- 7
7.4 Interpolation mode ................................................................................................................................. 7-10
7.5 Differences in auto tuning between MELSERVO-J2 and MELSERVO-J2-Super .......................... 7-11
7.5.1 Response level setting ..................................................................................................................... 7-11
7.5.2 Auto tuning selection....................................................................................................................... 7-11
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
8- 1 to 8-10
8.1 Function block diagram .......................................................................................................................... 8- 1
8.2 Machine resonance suppression filter ................................................................................................... 8- 1
8.3 Adaptive vibration suppression control................................................................................................. 8- 3
8.4 Low-pass filter ......................................................................................................................................... 8- 4
8.5 Gain changing function........................................................................................................................... 8- 5
8.5.1 Applications....................................................................................................................................... 8- 5
8.5.2 Function block diagram.................................................................................................................... 8- 5
8.5.3 Parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 8- 6
8.5.4 Gain changing operation.................................................................................................................. 8- 8
9. INSPECTION
9- 1 to 9- 2
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10- 1 to 10-12
10.1 Trouble at start-up .............................................................................................................................. 10- 1
10.1.1 Position control mode ................................................................................................................... 10- 1
10.1.2 Speed control mode....................................................................................................................... 10- 4
10.1.3 Torque control mode ..................................................................................................................... 10- 5
10.2 When alarm or warning has occurred ............................................................................................... 10- 6
10.2.1 Alarms and warning list .............................................................................................................. 10- 6
10.2.2 Remedies for alarms..................................................................................................................... 10- 7
10.2.3 Remedies for warnings................................................................................................................ 10-12
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
11- 1 to 11- 8
11.1 Servo amplifiers................................................................................................................................... 11- 1
11.2 Connectors............................................................................................................................................ 11- 6
3
12. CHARACTERISTICS
12- 1 to 12- 8
12.1 Overload protection characteristics ................................................................................................... 12- 1
12.2 Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss .................................................................... 12- 3
12.3 Dynamic brake characteristics........................................................................................................... 12- 5
12.4 Encoder cable flexing life .................................................................................................................... 12- 7
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13- 1 to 13-38
13.1 Options.................................................................................................................................................. 13- 1
13.1.1 Regenerative brake options ......................................................................................................... 13- 1
13.1.2 Brake unit...................................................................................................................................... 13- 7
13.1.3 Power return converter ................................................................................................................ 13- 9
13.1.4 Cables and connectors................................................................................................................. 13-12
13.1.5 Junction terminal block (MR-TB20) .......................................................................................... 13-20
13.1.6 Maintenance junction card (MR-J2CN3TM) ............................................................................ 13-22
13.1.7 Battery (MR-BAT, A6BAT)......................................................................................................... 13-23
13.1.8 Servo configurations software .................................................................................................... 13-24
13.2 Auxiliary equipment .......................................................................................................................... 13-26
13.2.1 Recommended wires .................................................................................................................... 13-26
13.2.2 No-fuse breakers, fuses, magnetic contactors........................................................................... 13-28
13.2.3 Power factor improving reactors ................................................................................................ 13-28
13.2.4 Relays............................................................................................................................................ 13-29
13.2.5 Surge absorbers ........................................................................................................................... 13-29
13.2.6 Noise reduction techniques......................................................................................................... 13-29
13.2.7 Leakage current breaker............................................................................................................. 13-35
13.2.8 EMC filter..................................................................................................................................... 13-37
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14- 1 to 14- 28
14.1 Configuration ....................................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.1 RS-422 configuration.................................................................................................................... 14- 1
14.1.2 RS-232C configuration ................................................................................................................. 14- 2
14.2 Communication specifications............................................................................................................ 14- 3
14.2.1 Communication overview............................................................................................................. 14- 3
14.2.2 Parameter setting ......................................................................................................................... 14- 4
14.3 Protocol ................................................................................................................................................. 14- 5
14.4 Character codes ................................................................................................................................... 14- 7
14.5 Error codes ........................................................................................................................................... 14- 8
14.6 Checksum ............................................................................................................................................. 14- 8
14.7 Time-out operation .............................................................................................................................. 14- 9
14.8 Retry operation .................................................................................................................................... 14- 9
14.9 Initialization........................................................................................................................................ 14-10
14.10 Communication procedure example ............................................................................................... 14-10
14.11 Command and data No. list............................................................................................................. 14-11
14.11.1 Read commands ......................................................................................................................... 14-11
14.11.2 Write commands ........................................................................................................................ 14-12
4
14.12 Detailed explanations of commands............................................................................................... 14-14
14.12.1 Data processing.......................................................................................................................... 14-14
14.12.2 Status display ............................................................................................................................ 14-16
14.12.3 Parameter................................................................................................................................... 14-17
14.12.4 External I/O pin statuses (DIO diagnosis).............................................................................. 14-19
14.12.5 Disable/enable of external I/O signals (DIO) .......................................................................... 14-20
14.12.6 External input signal ON/OFF (test operation) ..................................................................... 14-21
14.12.7 Test operation mode .................................................................................................................. 14-22
14.12.8 Output signal pin ON/OFF output signal (DO) forced output.............................................. 14-24
14.12.9 Alarm history ............................................................................................................................. 14-25
14.12.10 Current alarm .......................................................................................................................... 14-26
14.12.11 Other commands...................................................................................................................... 14-27
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15- 1 to 15- 66
15.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................. 15- 1
15.1.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 15- 1
15.1.2 Restrictions.................................................................................................................................... 15- 1
15.2 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 15- 2
15.3 Battery installation procedure ........................................................................................................... 15- 3
15.4 Standard connection diagram ............................................................................................................ 15- 4
15.5 Signal explanation............................................................................................................................... 15- 5
15.6 Startup procedure................................................................................................................................ 15- 6
15.7 Absolute position data transfer protocol ........................................................................................... 15- 7
15.7.1 Data transfer procedure............................................................................................................... 15- 7
15.7.2 Transfer method ........................................................................................................................... 15- 8
15.7.3 Home position setting.................................................................................................................. 15-17
15.7.4 Use of servo motor with electromagnetic brake ....................................................................... 15-19
15.7.5 How to process the absolute position data at detection of stroke end.................................... 15-20
15.8 Examples of use .................................................................................................................................. 15-21
15.8.1 MELSEC-A1S (A1SD71)............................................................................................................. 15-21
15.8.2 MELSEC FX(2N)-32MT (FX(2N)-1PG)..................................................................................... 15-35
15.8.3 MELSEC A1SD75(AD75) ........................................................................................................... 15-47
15.9 Confirmation of absolute position detection data............................................................................ 15-62
15.10 Absolute position data transfer errors ........................................................................................... 15-63
15.10.1 Corrective actions ...................................................................................................................... 15-63
15.10.2 Error resetting conditions......................................................................................................... 15-65
Appendix
App- 1 to App- 2
App 1. Signal arrangement recording sheets......................................................................................... App- 1
App 2. Status display block diagram ...................................................................................................... App- 2
5
Optional Servo Motor Instruction Manual CONTENTS
The rough table of contents of the optional MELSERVO Servo Motor Instruction Manual is introduced
here for your reference. Note that the contents of the Servo Motor Instruction Manual are not included
in the Servo Amplifier Instruction Manual.
1. INTRODUCTION
2. INSTALLATION
3. CONNECTORS USED FOR SERVO MOTOR WIRING
4. INSPECTION
5. SPECIFICATIONS
6. CHARACTERISTICS
7. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
8. CALCULATION METHODS FOR DESIGNING
6
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
1.1 Introduction
The Mitsubishi MELSERVO-J2-Super series general-purpose AC servo is based on the MELSERVO-J2
series and has further higher performance and higher functions.
It has position control, speed control and torque control modes. Further, it can perform operation with the
control modes changed, e.g. position/speed control, speed/torque control and torque/position control.
Hence, it is applicable to a wide range of fields, not only precision positioning and smooth speed control of
machine tools and general industrial machines but also line control and tension control.
As this new series has the RS-232C or RS-422 serial communication function, a servo configuration
software-installed personal computer or the like can be used to perform parameter setting, test operation,
status display monitoring, gain adjustment, etc.
With real-time auto tuning, you can automatically adjust the servo gains according to the machine.
The MELSERVO-J2-Super series servo motor is equipped with an absolute position encoder which has
the resolution of 131072 pulses/rev to ensure more accurate control as compared to the MELSERVO-J2
series. Simply adding a battery to the servo amplifier makes up an absolute position detection system.
This makes home position return unnecessary at power-on or alarm occurrence by setting a home position
once.
(1) Position control mode
An up to 500kpps high-speed pulse train is used to control the speed and direction of a motor and
execute precision positioning of 131072 pulses/rev resolution.
The position smoothing function provides a choice of two different modes appropriate for a machine, so
a smoother start/stop can be made in response to a sudden position command.
A torque limit is imposed on the servo amplifier by the clamp circuit to protect the power transistor in
the main circuit from overcurrent due to sudden acceleration/deceleration or overload. This torque
limit value can be changed to any value with an external analog input or the parameter.
(2) Speed control mode
An external analog speed command (0 to 10VDC) or parameter-driven internal speed command
(max. 7 speeds) is used to control the speed and direction of a servo motor smoothly.
There are also the acceleration/deceleration time constant setting in response to speed command, the
servo lock function at a stop time, and automatic offset adjustment function in response to external
analog speed command.
(3) Torque control mode
An external analog torque command (0 to 8VDC) or parameter-driven internal torque command is
used to control the torque output by the servo motor.
To protect misoperation under no load, the speed limit function (external or internal setting) is also
available for application to tension control, etc.
1- 1
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
1.2 Function block diagram
The function block diagram of this servo is shown below.
Regenerative brake option
(Note 3)
Servo amplifier
DS
(Note1)
RA
L1
Regenerative
brake
transistor
L2
L3
Current
detector
CHARGE
lamp
U
V
V
W
W
(MR-J2S-200A or more)
E1
Control
power
supply
L21
Regenerative
brake
SM
Dynamic
brake
Fan
L11
U
E2
Base amplifier
Voltage Overcurrent Current
detection protection detection
Electromagnetic
brake
CN2
MC
Servo motor
D
C
Encoder
Pulse
input
Virtual
encoder
Model position
control
Model speed
control
Virtual
motor
Actual position
control
Model torque
Model
speed
Model
position
Current
control
Actual speed
control
MR-BAT
RS-232C
RS-422
A/D
CON1
(Note2)
Power
NFB
supply
3-phase
200 to
230VAC,
1-phase
230VACor
1-phase
100to120VAC
P
D/A
I/F
CN1A CN1B
CN3
Analog monitor
(2 channels)
Analog
(2 channels)
D I/O control
Servo on
Start
Failure, etc.
Controller
RS-422/RS-232C
To other servo
amplifier
Note:1. The built-in regenerative brake resistor is not provided for the MR-J2S-10A(1).
2. For 1-phase 230VAC, connect the power supply to L1,L2 and leave L3 open.
L3 is not provided for a 1-phase 100 to120VAC power supply.
3. For MR-J2S-350 or less.
1- 2
Optional battery
(for absolute position)
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
1.3 Servo amplifier standard specifications
Servo Amplifier
MR-J2S10A
20A
40A
60A
70A
100A 200A 350A 500A 700A 10A1 20A1 40A1
Power supply
Item
Voltage/frequency
1-phase 100 to
3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz
3-phase 200 to 230VAC, 50/60Hz
120VAC 50/60Hz
or 1-phase 230VAC, 50/60Hz
Permissible voltage fluctuation
3-phase 200 to 230VAC:
170 to 253VAC
3-phase 170 to 253VAC
1-phase 230VAC: 207 to 253VAC
Permissible frequency fluctuation
Within 5%
Power supply capacity
Refer to Section12.2
System
Sine-wave PWM control, current control system
Dynamic brake
Built-in
Overcurrent shut-off, regenerative overvoltage shut-off, overload shut-off (electronic
thermal relay), servo motor overheat protection, encoder error protection, regenerative
brake error protection, undervoltage, instantaneous power failure protection, overspeed
protection, excessive error protection
Position control mode
Max. input pulse frequency
Speed control mode
Protective functions
Speed control range
500kpps (for differential receiver), 200kpps (for open collector)
Command pulse multiplying factor
Electronic gear A:1 to 65535 131072 B:1 to 65535, 1/50
In-position range setting
Set by parameter setting or external analog input (0 to 10VDC/maximum torque)
Analog speed command 1: 2000, internal speed command 1: 5000
Analog speed command input
0 to 10VDC / Rated speed
0.01% or less (load fluctuation 0 to 100%)
0% or less (power fluctuation 10%)
0.2% max.(ambient temperature 25 10 ) for external speed setting only
Speed fluctuation ratio
Torque limit
Set by parameter setting or external analog input (0 to 10VDC/maximum torque)
Torque Analog torque command input
control
mode Speed limit
0 to 8VDC / Maximum torque (input impedance 10 to 12k )
Set by parameter setting or external analog input (0 to 10VDC/Rated speed)
Structure
Environment
Self-cooled, open (IP00)
Operation
Storage
Force-cooling, open (IP00)
Self-cooled,
open(IP00)
[ ] 0 to 55 (non-freezing)
[ ] 32 to 131 (non-freezing)
[ ]
20 to 65 (non-freezing)
[ ]
4 to 149 (non-freezing)
Operation
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Storage
Ambient
Indoors (no direct sunlight)
Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt
Altitude
Max. 1000m (3280ft) above sea level
5.9 [m/s2] or less
Vibration
Weight
500
10 revolutions
Torque limit
Ambient
humidity
A/B
0 to 10000 pulse (command pulse unit)
Error excessive
Ambient
temperature
1-phase
85 to 127VAC
19.4 [ft/s2] or less
[kg]
0.7
0.7
1.1
1.1
1.7
1.7
2.0
2.0
4.9
[lb]
1.5
1.5
2.4
2.4
3.75
3.75
4.4
4.4
10.8 15.87
1- 3
7.2
0.7
0.7
1.1
1.5
1.5
2.4
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
1.4 Function list
The following table lists the functions of this servo. For details of the functions, refer to the corresponding
chapters and sections.
Function
(Note)
Control mode
Description
Refer to
Position control mode
This servo is used as position control servo.
P
Section 3.1.1
Section 3.4.1
Section 4.2.2
Speed control mode
This servo is used as speed control servo.
S
Section 3.1.2
Section 3.4.2
Section 4.2.3
Torque control mode
This servo is used as torque control servo.
T
Section 3.1.3
Section 3.4.3
Section 4.2.4
Position/speed control change Using external input signal, control can be switched
mode
between position control and speed control.
P/S
Section 3.4.4
Speed/torque control change
mode
Using external input signal, control can be switched
between speed control and torque control.
S/T
Section 3.4.5
Torque/position control
change mode
Using external input signal, control can be switched
between torque control and position control.
T/P
Section 3.4.6
High-resolution encoder
High-resolution encoder of 131072 pulses/rev is used as a
servo motor encoder.
P, S, T
Absolute position detection
system
Merely setting a home position once makes home position
return unnecessary at every power-on.
P
Chapter 15
Gain changing function
You can switch between gains during rotation and gains
during stop or use an external signal to change gains
during operation.
P, S
Section 8.5
Adaptive vibration
suppression control
Servo amplifier detects mechanical resonance and sets filter
characteristics automatically to suppress mechanical
vibration.
P, S, T
Section 8.3
Low-pass filter
Suppresses high-frequency resonance which occurs as servo
system response is increased.
P, S, T
Section 8.4
Machine analyzer function
Analyzes the frequency characteristic of the mechanical
system by simply connecting a servo configuration softwareinstalled personal computer and servo amplifier.
P
Machine simulation
Can simulate machine motions on a personal computer
screen on the basis of the machine analyzer results.
P
Gain search function
Personal computer changes gains automatically
searches for overshoot-free gains in a short time.
P
Slight vibration suppression
control
Suppresses vibration of 1 pulse produced at a servo motor
stop.
P
Section 7.5
Electronic gear
Input pulses can be multiplied by 1/50 to 50.
P
Parameters No. 3, 4
Auto tuning
Automatically adjusts the gain to optimum value if load
applied to the servo motor shaft varies. Higher in
performance than MR-J2 series servo amplifier.
P, S
Position smoothing
Speed can be increased smoothly in response to input pulse.
P
Parameter No. 7
S-pattern acceleration/
deceleration time constant
Speed can be increased and decreased smoothly.
S, T
Parameter No. 13
Regenerative brake option
Used when the built-in regenerative brake resistor of the
servo amplifier does not have sufficient regenerative
capability for the regenerative power generated.
P, S, T
Section 13.1.1
Brake unit
Used when the regenerative brake option cannot provide
enough regenerative power.
Can be used with the MR-J2S-500A MR-J2S-700A.
P, S, T
Section 13.1.2
1- 4
and
Chapter 7
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
Description
(Note)
Control mode
Return converter
Used when the regenerative brake option cannot provide
enough regenerative power.
Can be used with the MR-J2S-500A MR-J2S-700A.
P, S, T
Section 13.1.3
Alarm history clear
Alarm history is cleared.
Function
Refer to
P, S, T
Parameter No. 16
If the input power supply voltage had reduced to cause an
Restart after instantaneous
alarm but has returned to normal, the servo motor can be
power failure
restarted by merely switching on the start signal.
S
Parameter No. 20
Command pulse selection
Command pulse train form can be selected from among four
different types.
P
Parameter No. 21
Input signal selection
Forward rotation start, reverse rotation start, servo-on and
other input signals can be assigned to any pins.
P, S, T
Torque limit
Servo motor-generated torque can be limited to any value.
Speed limit
Servo motor speed can be limited to any value.
Status display
Servo status is shown on the 5-digit, 7-segment LED
display
P, S, T
Section 6.2
External I/O signal display
ON/OFF statuses of external I/O signals are shown on the
display.
P, S, T
Section 6.6
Output signal (DO)
forced output
Output signal can be forced on/off independently of the
servo status.
Use this function for output signal wiring check, etc.
P, S, T
Section 6.7
Automatic VC offset
Voltage is automatically offset to stop the servo motor if it
does not come to a stop at the analog speed command (VC)
or analog speed limit (VLA) of 0V.
S, T
Section 6.3
Test operation mode
Servo motor can be run from the operation section of the
servo amplifier without the start signal entered.
P, S, T
Section 6.8
Analog monitor output
Servo status is output in terms of voltage in real time.
P, S, T
Parameter No. 17
Servo configuration software
Using a personal computer, parameter setting, test
operation, status display, etc. can be performed.
P, S, T
Section 13.1.8
Alarm code output
If an alarm has occurred, the corresponding alarm number
is output in 3-bit code.
P, S, T
Section 10.2.1
P, S
T
Parameters
No. 43 to 48
Section 3.4.1 (5)
Parameter No. 28
Section 3.4.3 (3)
Parameter No. 8
to 10,72 to 75
Note:P: Position control mode, S: Speed control mode, T: Torque control mode
P/S: Position/speed control change mode, S/T: Speed/torque control change mode, T/P: Torque/position control change mode
1.5 Model code definition
(1) Rating plate
MITSUBISHI
MODEL
AC
SERVO
AC SERVO
MR-J2S-60A
POWER : 600W
POWER
INPUT : 3.2A 3PH 1PH200-230V 50Hz
3PH 1PH200-230V 60Hz
5.5A 1PH 230V 50/60Hz
OUTPUT : 170V 0-360Hz 3.6A
SERIAL : TC3XXAAAAG52
PASSED
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
MADE IN JAPAN
1- 5
Model
Capacity
Applicable power supply
Rated output current
Serial number
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
(2) Model
MR–J2S–
A
MR–J2S–100A or less
Series
MR–J2S–200A 350A
Power Supply
Symbol
Power supply
None
3-phase 200 to 230VAC
(Note2) 1-phase 230VAC
(Note1)
1-phase 100V to 120VAC
1
Rating plate
Note:1. Not supplied to the servo amplifier of
MR-J2S-60A or more.
2. Not supplied to the servo amplifier of
MR-J2S-100A or more.
Rating plate
MR-J2S-500A
MR-J2S-700A
General-purpose interface
Rated output
Rated
output [W]
100
200
400
600
700
Symbol
10
20
40
60
70
Symbol
100
200
350
500
700
Rated
output [W]
1000
2000
3500
5000
7000
Rating plate
Rating plate
1.6 Combination with servo motor
The following table lists combinations of servo amplifiers and servo motors. The same combinations apply
to the models with electromagnetic brakes and the models with reduction gears.
Servo motors
Servo amplifier
MR-J2S-10A(1)
HC-KFS
053
13
HC-MFS
053
MR-J2S-20A(1)
23
23
MR-J2S-40A(1)
43
43
HC-SFS
1000r/min
2000r/min
MR-J2S-100A
MR-J2S-200A
MR-J2S-350A
HC-UFS
2000r/min
3000r/min
13
23
43
52
(Note) 73
HC-RFS
13
MR-J2S-60A
MR-J2S-70A
3000r/min
53
73
72
81
121
102
201
301
152
202
352
MR-J2S-500A
502
MR-J2S-700A
702
103
153
203
353
103
153
203
353
503
152
202
352
502
Note: The HC-KFS73 may not be connected depending on the production time of the servo amplifier. Please consult us.
1- 6
73
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
1.7 Structure
1.7.1 Parts identification
(1) MR-J2S-100A or less
Name/Application
Refer to
Battery holder
Section15.3
Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.
Battery connector (CON1)
Used to connect the battery for absolute position data
backup.
Display
The 5-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo
status and alarm number.
Section15.3
Chapter6
Operation section
Used to perform status display, diagnostic, alarm and
parameter setting operations.
MODE
UP
DOWN
SET
Used to set data.
Chapter6
Used to change the
display or data in each
mode.
Used to change the
mode.
I/O signal connector (CN1A)
Used to connect digital I/O signals.
Section3.3
I/O signal connector (CN1B)
Used to connect digital I/O signals.
Section3.3
Communication connector (CN3)
Chapter14
Used to connect a command device (RS-422/RS-232C)
Section13.1.2
and output analog monitor data.
Section1.5
Name plate
Charge lamp
Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While
this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables.
Encoder connector (CN2)
Connector for connection of the servo motor encoder.
Main circuit terminal block (TE1)
Used to connect the input power supply and servo
motor.
Control circuit terminal block (TE2)
Used to connect the control circuit power supply and
regenerative brake option.
Protective earth (PE) terminal (
Ground terminal.
1- 7
)
Section3.3
Section13.1.4
Section3.7
Section11.1
Section3.7
Section11.1
Section13.1.1
Section3.10
Section11.1
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
(2) MR-J2S-200A MR-J2S-350A
POINT
The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the
front cover, refer to Section 1.7.2.
Name/Application
Refer to
Battery holder
Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.
Section15.3
Battery connector (CON1)
Used to connect the battery for absolute position data
backup.
Section15.3
Display
The 5-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo
status and alarm number.
Chapter6
Operation section
Used to perform status display, diagnostic, alarm and
parameter setting operations.
MODE
UP
DOWN
SET
Used to set data.
Chapter6
Used to change the
display or data in each
mode.
Used to change the
mode.
I/O signal connector (CN1A)
Used to connect digital I/O signals.
Section3.3
I/O signal connector (CN1B)
Used to connect digital I/O signals.
Section3.3
Section3.3
Communication connector (CN3)
Used to connect a command device (RS-422/RS232C) Section13.1.2
and output analog monitor data.
Chapter14
Name plate
Section1.5
Charge lamp
Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged. While
this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables.
Encoder connector (CN2)
Connector for connection of the servo motor encoder.
Main circuit terminal block (TE1)
Used to connect the input power supply and servo
motor.
Cooling fan
Control circuit terminal block (TE2)
Used to connect the control circuit power supply and
regenerative brake option.
Installation notch
(4 places)
Protective earth (PE) terminal (
Ground terminal.
1- 8
)
Section3.3
Section13.1.4
Section3.7
Section11.1
Section3.7
Section11.1
Section13.1.1
Section3.10
Section11.1
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
(3) MR-J2S-500A
POINT
The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the
front cover, refer to Section 1.7.2.
Name/Application
Refer to
Battery connector (CON1)
Used to connect the battery for absolute position data
Section15.3
backup.
Battery holder
Section15.3
Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.
Display
The 5-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo
status and alarm number.
MODE
UP
DOWN
Chapter6
Operation section
Used to perform status display, diagnostic, alarm and
parameter setting operations.
SET
MODE
UP
DOWN SET
Used to set data.
Chapter6
Used to change the
display or data in each
mode.
Installation notch
(4 places)
Used to change the
mode.
I/O signal connector (CN1A)
Used to connect digital I/O signals.
Section3.3
I/O signal connector (CN1B)
Used to connect digital I/O signals.
Section3.3
Communication connector (CN3)
Used to connect a command device (RS-422/RS232C)
and output analog monitor data.
Section3.3
Section13.1.2
Chapter14
Encoder connector (CN2)
Connector for connection of the servo motor encoder.
Section3.3
Section13.1.4
Charge lamp
Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged.
While this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables.
Control circuit terminal block (TE2)
Used to connect the control circuit power supply and
regenerative brake option.
Section3.7
Section11.1.1
Main circuit terminal block (TE1)
Used to connect the input power supply and servo
motor.
Section3.7
Section11.1
Section13.1.1
Name plate
Cooling fan
Protective earth (PE) terminal (
Ground terminal.
1- 9
Section1.5
)
Section3.10
Section11.1
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
(4) MR-J2S-700A
POINT
The servo amplifier is shown without the front cover. For removal of the
front cover, refer to next page.
Name/Application
Battery connector (CON1)
Used to connect the battery for absolute position data
backup.
Section15.3
Battery holder
Contains the battery for absolute position data backup.
Section15.3
Display
The 5-digit, seven-segment LED shows the servo
status and alarm number.
MODE
UP
DOWN
SET
Refer to
Chapter6
Operation section
Used to perform status display, diagnostic, alarm and
parameter setting operations.
MODE
UP
DOWN
SET
Used to set data.
Chapter6
Used to change the
display or data in each
mode.
Used to change the
mode.
I/O signal connector (CN1A)
Used to connect digital I/O signals.
Section3.3
I/O signal connector (CN1B)
Used to connect digital I/O signals.
Section3.3
Communication connector (CN3)
Used to connect a command device (RS-422/RS232C)
and output analog monitor data.
Section3.3
Section13.1.4
Chapter14
Charge lamp
Lit to indicate that the main circuit is charged.
While this lamp is lit, do not reconnect the cables.
Control circuit terminal block (TE2)
Used to connect the control circuit power supply.
Section3.7
Section11.1.1
Encoder connector (CN2)
Connector for connection of the servo motor encoder.
Section3.3
Section13.1.4
Section1.5
Name plate
Main circuit terminal block (TE1)
Used to connect the input power supply, regenerative
brake option and servo motor.
Cooling fan
Installation notch
(4 places)
Protective earth (PE) terminal (
Ground terminal.
1 - 10
)
Section3.7
Section11.1
Section13.1.1
Section3.10
Section11.1
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
1.7.2 Removal and reinstallation of the front cover
To avoid the risk of an electric shock, do not open the front cover while power is
on.
CAUTION
(1) For MR-J2S-200A or more
Reinstallation of the front cover
Removal of the front cover
1)
Front cover hook
(2 places)
2)
2)
Front cover
1)
Front cover socket
(2 places)
1) Hold down the removing knob.
2) Pull the front cover toward you.
1) Insert the front cover hooks into the front cover sockets of
the servo amplifier.
2) Press the front cover against the servo amplifier until the
removing knob clicks.
(2) For MR-J2S-500A
Reinstallation of the front cover
Removal of the front cover
1)
Front cover hook
(2 places)
2)
2)
1)
Front cover
Front cover socket
(2 places)
1) Hold down the removing knob.
2) Pull the front cover toward you.
1) Insert the front cover hooks into the front cover sockets of
the servo amplifier.
2) Press the front cover against the servo amplifier until the
removing knob clicks.
1 - 11
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
(3) For MR-J2S-700A
Reinstallation of the front cover
Removal of the front cover
Front cover
hook
(2 places)
A)
B)
2)
2)
1)
A)
1)
Front cover socket
(2 places)
1) Push the removing knob A) or B), and put you
finger into the front hole of the front cover.
2) Pull the front cover toward you.
1) Insert the two front cover hooks at the bottom into the
sockets of the servo amplifier.
2) Press the front cover against the servo amplifier until the
removing knob clicks.
1 - 12
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
1.8 Servo system with auxiliary equipment
WARNING
To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal
(terminal marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control
box.
(1) MR-J2S-100A or less
(a) For 3-phase 200V to 230VAC or 1-phase 230VAC
(Note2)
3-phase 200V
to 230VAC power
supply or
1-phase 230VAC
power supply
Options and auxiliary equipment
Refer to
Options and auxiliary equipment
Refer to
No-fuse breaker
Section 13.2.2
Regenerative brake option
Section 13.1.1
Magnetic contactor
Section 13.2.2
Cables
Section 13.2.1
Servo configuration software
Section 13.1.8
Power factor improving reactor Section 13.2.3
No-fuse breaker
(NFB) or fuse
Servo amplifier
Command device
To CN1A
Junction terminal block
Magnetic
contactor
(MC)
To CN1B
Power
factor
improving
reactor
(FR-BAL)
To CN3
CHARGE
Personal
computer
To CN2
L1
L2
L3
U
V
Servo configuration
software
MRZJW3-SETUP121E
W
Protective earth(PE) terminal
(Note1)
Encoder cable
(Note1)
Power supply lead
Control circuit terminal block
D
L21
L11
P
Regenerative brake
option
Servo motor
C
Note: 1. The HC-SFS, HC-RFS series have cannon connectors.
2. A 1-phase 230VAC power supply may be used with the servo amplifier of MR-J2S-70A or less. Connect the power supply to
L1 and L2 terminals and leave L3 open.
1 - 13
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
(b) For 1-phase 100V to 120VAC
1-phase 100V
to 120VAC
power supply
Options and auxiliary equipment
Refer to
Options and auxiliary equipment
Refer to
No-fuse breaker
Section 13.2.2
Regenerative brake option
Section 13.1.1
Magnetic contactor
Section 13.2.2
Cables
Section 13.2.1
Servo configuration software
Section 13.1.8
Power factor improving reactor Section 13.2.3
No-fuse breaker
(NFB) or fuse
Servo amplifier
Command device
To CN1A
Junction terminal block
Magnetic
contactor
(MC)
To CN1B
CHARGE
Power
factor
improving
reactor
(FR-BAL)
To CN3
Personal
computer
To CN2
L1
L2
U
V
Servo configuration
software
MRZJW3-SETUP121E
W
Protective earth(PE) terminal
(Note)
Encoder cable
(Note)
Power supply lead
Control circuit terminal block
D
L21
L11
P
Regenerative brake
option
Servo motor
C
Note: The HC-SFS, HC-RFS series have cannon connectors.
1 - 14
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
(2) MR-J2S-200A MR-J2S-350A or more
3-phase 200V
to 230VAC
power supply
Options and auxiliary equipment
Options and auxiliary equipment
Refer to
Refer to
No-fuse breaker
Section 13.2.2
Regenerative brake option
Magnetic contactor
Section 13.2.2
Cables
Servo configuration software
Section 13.1.8
Power factor improving reactor Section 13.2.3
No-fuse
breaker
(NFB) or
fuse
Section 13.1.1
Section 13.2.1
Servo amplifier
Command device
To CN1A
Junction terminal
block
Magnetic
contactor
(MC)
To CN1B
Power
factor
improving
reactor
(FR-BAL)
To CN2
To CN3
Personal
computer
L11
L21
L1
L2
L3
U V W
P
C
Regenerative brake option
1 - 15
Servo
configuration
software
MRZJW3SETUP121E
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
(3) MR-J2S-500A
3-phase 200V
to 230VAC
power supply
Options and auxiliary equipment
Refer to
Options and auxiliary equipment
Refer to
No-fuse breaker
Section 13.2.2
Regenerative brake option
Section 13.1.1
Magnetic contactor
Section 13.2.2
Cables
Section 13.2.1
Servo configuration software
Section 13.1.8
Power factor improving reactor Section 13.2.3
No-fuse
breaker
(NFB) or
fuse
Magnetic
contactor
(MC)
Servo amplifier
Power
factor
improving
reactor
(FA-BAL)
C
P
Regenerative brake
option
Command device
To CN1A
Junction terminal
block
L1
L2
L3
To CN1B
U
V
W
To CN3
To CN2
L11
L21
1 - 16
Personal
computer
Servo
configuration
software
MRZJW3SETUP121E
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
(4) MR-J2S-700A
Options and auxiliary equipment
3-phase 200V
to 230VAC
power supply
Refer to
Refer to
No-fuse breaker
Regenerative brake option
Section 13.1.1
Magnetic contactor
Section 13.2.2
Cables
Section 13.2.1
Servo configuration software
Section 13.1.8
Power factor improving reactor Section 13.2.3
No-fuse
breaker
(NFB) or
fuse
Command device
Servo amplifier
L11
To CN1A
L21
Junction terminal
block
Magnetic
contactor
(MC)
To CN1B
To CN3
Power
factor
improving
reactor
(FA-BAL)
Options and auxiliary equipment
Section 13.2.2
To CN2
L3
L2
L1
U
V
W
C
P
Regenerative brake
option
1 - 17
Personal
computer
Servo
configuration
software
MRZJW3SETUP121E
1. FUNCTIONS AND CONFIGURATION
MEMO
1 - 18
2. INSTALLATION
2. INSTALLATION
CAUTION
Stacking in excess of the limited number of products is not allowed.
Install the equipment to incombustibles. Installing them directly or close to
combustibles will led to a fire.
Install the equipment in a load-bearing place in accordance with this Instruction
Manual.
Do not get on or put heavy load on the equipment to prevent injury.
Use the equipment within the specified environmental condition range.
Provide an adequate protection to prevent screws, metallic detritus and other
conductive matter or oil and other combustible matter from entering the servo
amplifier.
Do not block the intake/exhaust ports of the servo amplifier. Otherwise, a fault may
occur.
Do not subject the servo amplifier to drop impact or shock loads as they are
precision equipment.
Do not install or operate a faulty servo amplifier.
When the product has been stored for an extended period of time, consult
Mitsubishi.
2.1 Environmental conditions
Environment
Ambient
temperature
Operation
Storage
Ambient
Operation
humidity
Storage
Ambience
Altitude
Vibration
Conditions
[ ] 0 to 55 (non-freezing)
[ ] 32 to 131 (non-freezing)
[ ]
20 to 65 (non-freezing)
[ ]
4 to 149 (non-freezing)
90%RH or less (non-condensing)
Indoors (no direct sunlight)
Free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt
Max. 1000m (3280 ft) above sea level
[m/s2] 5.9 [m/s2] or less
[ft/s2] 19.4 [ft/s2] or less
2- 1
2. INSTALLATION
2.2 Installation direction and clearances
CAUTION
The equipment must be installed in the specified direction. Otherwise, a fault may
occur.
Leave specified clearances between the servo amplifier and control box inside
walls or other equipment.
(1) Installation of one servo amplifier
Control box
Control box
40mm
(1.6 in.)
or more
Servo amplifier
Wiring clearance
70mm
(2.8 in.)
Top
10mm
(0.4 in.)
or more
10mm
(0.4 in.)
or more
Bottom
40mm
(1.6 in.)
or more
2- 2
2. INSTALLATION
(2) Installation of two or more servo amplifiers
Leave a large clearance between the top of the servo amplifier and the internal surface of the control
box, and install a fan to prevent the internal temperature of the control box from exceeding the
environmental conditions.
Control box
100mm
(4.0 in.)
or more
10mm
(0.4 in.)
or more
Servo
amplifier
30mm
(1.2 in.)
or more
30mm
(1.2 in.)
or more
40mm
(1.6 in.)
or more
(3) Others
When using heat generating equipment such as the regenerative brake option, install them with full
consideration of heat generation so that the servo amplifier is not affected.
Install the servo amplifier on a perpendicular wall in the correct vertical direction.
2.3 Keep out foreign materials
(1) When installing the unit in a control box, prevent drill chips and wire fragments from entering the
servo amplifier.
(2) Prevent oil, water, metallic dust, etc. from entering the servo amplifier through openings in the control
box or a fan installed on the ceiling.
(3) When installing the control box in a place where there are toxic gas, dirt and dust, provide positive
pressure in the control box by forcing in clean air to prevent such materials from entering the control
box.
2- 3
2. INSTALLATION
2.4 Cable stress
(1) The way of clamping the cable must be fully examined so that flexing stress and cable's own weight
stress are not applied to the cable connection.
(2) In any application where the servo motor moves, the cables should be free from excessive stress. For
use in any application where the servo motor moves run the cables so that their flexing portions fall
within the optional encoder cable range. Fix the encoder cable and power cable of the servo motor.
(3) Avoid any probability that the cable sheath might be cut by sharp chips, rubbed by a machine corner
or stamped by workers or vehicles.
(4) For installation on a machine where the servo motor will move, the flexing radius should be made as
large as possible. Refer to section 12.4 for the flexing life.
2- 4
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
WARNING
Any person who is involved in wiring should be fully competent to do the work.
Before starting wiring, switch power off, then wait for more than 10 minutes, and
after the charge lamp has gone off, make sure that the voltage is safe in the tester
or like. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
Ground the servo amplifier and the servo motor securely.
Do not attempt to wire the servo amplifier and servo motor until they have been
installed. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
The cables should not be damaged, stressed excessively, loaded heavily, or
pinched. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
Wire the equipment correctly and securely. Otherwise, the servo motor may
misoperate, resulting in injury.
Connect cables to correct terminals to prevent a burst, fault, etc.
Ensure that polarity ( , ) is correct. Otherwise, a burst, damage, etc. may occur.
The surge absorbing diode installed to the DC relay designed for control output
should be fitted in the specified direction. Otherwise, the signal is not output due to
a fault, disabling the emergency stop and other protective circuits.
Servo
Amplifier
Servo amplifier
COM
(DC24V)
COM
(24VDC)
CAUTION
Control
output
signal
RA
Control output
signal
RA
Use a noise filter, etc. to minimize the influence of electromagnetic interference,
which may be given to electronic equipment used near the servo amplifier.
Do not install a power capacitor, surge suppressor or radio noise filter (FR-BIF
option) with the power line of the servo motor.
When using the regenerative brake resistor, switch power off with the alarm signal.
Otherwise, a transistor fault or the like may overheat the regenerative brake
resistor, causing a fire.
Do not modify the equipment.
POINT
CN1A, CN1B, CN2 and CN3 have the same shape. Wrong connection of
the connectors will lead to a failure. Connect them correctly.
3- 1
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.1 Standard connection example
POINT
Refer to Section 3.7.1 for the connection of the power supply system and to
Section 3.8 for connection with the servo motor.
3.1.1 Position control mode
(1) FX-10GM
Positioning module
FX-10GM
Servo amplifier
(Note 4, 9) (Note 4)
CN1A
CN1B
SVRDY
COM2
COM2
SVEND
COM4
PG0
RD
COM
INP
1
2
12
11
14
13
19
9
18
P15R 4
OP
14
LG
1
OPC 11
COM 9
7,17
24
8,18
VC
5
FPO
6
FP
COM5 9,19
16
RP
15
RP0
3
CLR
COM3 4
PP
SG
NP
CR
SG
SD
(Note 10) 2m(6.5ft) max.
3
VDD
13
COM
(Note 12)
(Note 7)
(Note 2, 5)
18
ALM
RA1
19
ZSP
RA2
6
TLC
RA3
Trouble
Zero speed
Limiting torque
3
10
2
8
20 (Note 13)
Plate
(Note 4, 9)
CN1A
1
STO
2
ZRN
3
FWD
4
RVS
5
DOG
6
LSF
7
LSR
8
COM1 9,19
START
6
LA
16
LAR
7
LB
17
LBR
5
LZ
15
LZR
Plate
SD
Encoder A-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
Encoder B-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
Encoder Z-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
10m(32ft) max.
(Note 4, 9)(Note 4, 9)
CN1B
CN3
4
MO1
EMG
15
(Note 3, 6) Emergency stop
Servo-on
SON
5
3
LG
Reset
RES
14
14
MO2
PC
8
13
LG
Plate
SD
Proportion control
Torque limit selection
(Note 6) Forward rotation stroke end
Reverse rotation stroke end
LSN
17
SG
10
11
TLA
12
Analog torque limit
10V/max. torque
Personal
computer
9
16
P15R
Upper limit setting
(Note 11)
Servo configuration
software
TL
LSP
LG
1
SD
Plate
A
10k
A
10k
2m (6.5ft) max.
2m(6.5ft) max.
(Note 8)
Communication cable
3- 2
(Note 4, 9)
CN3
(Note 1)
(Note 8)
Monitor output
Max. 1mA
Reading in both
directions
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal
marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box.
2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will
be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective
circuits.
3. The emergency stop switch (normally closed contact) must be installed.
4. CN1A, CN1B, CN2 and CN3 have the same shape. Wrong connection of the connectors will
lead to a fault.
5. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA,
supply interface power from external. (Refer to Section 3.6.2)
6. When starting operation, always connect the emergency stop signal (EMG) and forward/
reverse rotation stroke end signal (LSN/LSP) with SG. (Normally closed contacts)
7. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition. When this signal is
switched off (at occurrence of an alarm), the output of the controller should be stopped by the
sequence program.
8. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the
maintenance junction card (MR-J2CN3TM). (Refer to Section 13.1.4)
9. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier.
10. This length applies to the command pulse train input in the opencollector system. It is 10m
(32ft) or less in the differential line driver system.
11. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 121E.
12. When using the internal power supply (VDD), always connect VDD-COM. Do not connect them
when supplying external power. Refer to Section 3.6.2.
13. Connect to CN1A-10 when using the junction terminal block (MR-TB20).
3- 3
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(2) AD75P
(A1SD75P
)
Positioning module
AD75P
(A1SD75P )
Servo amplifier
(Note 10) 10m(32ft) max.
(Note 4,9)
CN1A
Ready
COM
INPS
PGO(24V)
PGO(5V)
PGO COM
CLEAR
CLEAR COM
PULSE F
PULSE F
PULSE R
PULSE R
6
24
25
5
23
21
3
22
4
PULSE COM
1
19
2
20
DOG
FLS
RLS
STOP
CHG
START
COM
COM
11
12
13
14
15
16
35
36
PULSE F
PULSE COM
PULSE R
RD
COM
INP
7
26
8
(Note 4)
CN1B
19
9
18
LZ
5
LZR 15
8
CR
SG
10
13
PG
PP
3
NG 12
NP
2
1
LG
SD Plate
3
VDD
13
COM
18
ALM
RA1
19
ZSP
RA2
6
TLC
RA3
(Note 12)
(Note 7)
Trouble
(Note 2,5)
Zero speed
Limiting torque
(Note 13)
(Note 4,9)
CN1A
(Note 4,9)
CN1B
DC24V
(Note 3, 6) Emergency stop
6
LA
16
LAR
Encoder A-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
EMG
15
7
LB
Servo-on
SON
5
17
LBR
Reset
RES
14
1
LG
Control common
PC
8
14
OP
Encoder Z-phase pulse
(open collector)
Proportion control
Torque limit selection
(Note 6) Forward rotation stroke end
Reverse rotation stroke end
TL
9
4
P15R
LSP
16
Plate
SD
LSN
17
SG
10
P15R
11
TLA
12
4
MO1
LG
1
3
LG
SD
Plate
14
MO2
13
LG
Plate
SD
Upper limit setting
Analog torque limit
10V/max. torque
2m(6.5ft) max.
(Note 11)
Servo configuration
software
Personal
computer
(Note 8)
Communication cable
Encoder B-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
(Note 4,9)
CN3
(Note 4,9)
CN3
A
10k
A
10k
2m(6.5ft) max.
(Note 1)
3- 4
(Note 8)
Monitor output
Max. 1mA
Reading in both
directions
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal
marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box.
2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will
be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective
circuits.
3. The emergency stop switch (normally closed contact) must be installed.
4. CN1A, CN1B, CN2 and CN3 have the same shape. Wrong connection of the connectors will
lead to a fault.
5. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA,
supply interface power from external.(Refer to Section 3.6.2)
6. When starting operation, always connect the emergency stop signal (EMG) and forward/
reverse rotation stroke end signal (LSN/LSP) with SG. (Normally closed contacts)
7. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition. When this signal is
switched off (at occurrence of an alarm), the output of the controller should be stopped by the
sequence program.
8. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the
maintenance junction card (MR-J2CN3TM). (Refer to Section 13.1.4)
9. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier.
10. This length applies to the command pulse train input in the differential line driver system.
It is 2m (6.5ft) or less in the opencollector system.
11. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 121E.
12. When using the internal power supply (VDD), always connect VDD-COM. Do not connect
them when supplying external power. Refer to Section 3.6.2.
13. Connect LG and pulse output COM to increase noise immunity.
3- 5
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.1.2 Speed control mode
Servo amplifier
(Note 4)
CN1B
(Note 4,9)
CN1A
Speed selection 1
SP1
8
SG
10
3
VDD
13
COM
(Note 12)
(Note 7)
(Note 2,5)
18
ALM
RA1
19
ZSP
RA2
6
TLC
RA3
Trouble
Zero speed
Limiting torque
10m(32ft) max.
(Note 4,9) (Note 4,9)
CN1B
CN1A
(Note 3, 6) Emergency stop
Servo-on
EMG
15
SON
5
9
COM
Reset
RES
14
18
SA
RA5
Speed reached
Speed selection 2
Forward rotation start
SP2
7
19
RD
RA4
Ready
ST1
8
Reverse rotation start
ST2
9
5
LZ
(Note 6) Forward rotation stroke end
Reverse rotation stroke end
LSP
16
15
LZR
LSN
17
SG
10
Upper limit setting
P15R 11
Analog speed command
(Note 13) 10V/rated speed
Upper limit setting
(Note 10) Analog torque limit
10V/max. torque
VC
2
LG
1
TLA
12
2m(6.5ft) max.
Personal
computer
LA
LAR
7
LB
17
LBR
1
LG
14
OP
4
P15R
Encoder A-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
Encoder B-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
Control common
Encoder Z-phase pulse
(open collector)
Plate SD
SD
(Note 11)
Servo configuration
software
6
16
Encoder Z-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
(Note 8)
Communication cable
Plate
(Note 4,9)
CN3
4
MO1
3
LG
14
MO2
13
LG
A
10k
A
10k
(Note 4,9)
Plate SD
CN3
2m(6.5ft) max.
(Note 1)
3- 6
(Note 8)
Monitor output
Max. 1mA
Reading in
both directions
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal (terminal
marked ) of the servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box.
2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will
be faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective
circuits.
3. The emergency stop switch (normally closed contact) must be installed.
4. CN1A, CN1B, CN2 and CN3 have the same shape. Wrong connection of the connectors will
lead to a fault.
5. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA,
supply interface power from external.(Refer to Section 3.6.2)
6. When starting operation, always connect the emergency stop signal (EMG) and forward/
reverse rotation stroke end signal (LSN/LSP) with SG. (Normally closed contacts)
7. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition.
8. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the
maintenance junction card (MR-J2CN3TM). (Refer to Section 13.1.4)
9. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier.
10. By setting parameters No.43 to 48 to make TL available, TLA can be used.
11. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 121E.
12. When using the internal power supply (VDD), always connect VDD-COM. Do not connect
them when supplying external power. Refer to Section 3.6.2.
13. Use an external power supply when inputting a negative voltage.
3- 7
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.1.3 Torque control mode
Servo amplifier
(Note 4)
CN1B
(Note 4,8)
CN1A
Speed selection 1
SP1
8
SG
10
3
VDD
13
COM
(Note 10)
(Note 6)
(Note 2,5)
18
ALM
RA1
19
ZSP
RA2
6
VLC
RA3
Trouble
Zero speed
Limiting torque
10m(32ft) max.
(Note 4,8) (Note 4,8)
CN1B
CN1A
(Note 3) Emergency stop
EMG
15
Servo-on
SON
5
Reset
RES
14
Speed selection 2
SP2
Forward rotation start
RS1
Reverse rotation start
RS2
SG
Upper limit setting
Analog torque command
(Note 11) 8V/max. torque
Upper limit setting
RD
7
5
LZ
9
15
LZR
8
6
LA
10
16
LAR
11
7
LB
12
17
LBR
LG
1
2
1
LG
14
OP
4
P15R
Ready
RA4
Encoder Z-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
Encoder A-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
Encoder B-phase pulse
(differential line driver)
Control common
Encoder Z-phase pulse
(open collector)
Plate SD
Plate
(Note 4,8)
CN3
2m(6.5ft) max.
(Note 9)
Servo configuration
software
19
P15R
SD
Personal
computer
COM
TC
VLA
Analog speed limit
0 to 10V/rated speed
9
(Note 7)
Communication cable
(Note 4,8)
CN3
4
MO1
3
LG
14
MO2
13
LG
A
10k
A
10k
Plate SD
2m(6.5ft) max.
(Note 1)
3- 8
(Note 7)
Monitor output
Max. 1mA
Reading in both
directions
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Note: 1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal of the (terminal
marked ) servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box.
2. Connect the diode in the correct direction. If it is connected reversely, the servo amplifier will be
faulty and will not output signals, disabling the emergency stop and other protective circuits.
3. The emergency stop switch(normally closed contact) must be installed.
4. CN1A, CN1B, CN2 and CN3 have the same shape. Wrong connection of the connectors will lead
to a fault.
5. The sum of currents that flow in the external relays should be 80mA max. If it exceeds 80mA,
supply interface power from external. (Refer to Section 3.6.2)
6. Trouble (ALM) is connected with COM in normal alarm-free condition.
7. When connecting the personal computer together with monitor outputs 1, 2, use the maintenance
junction card (MR-J2CN3TM). (Refer to Section 13.1.4)
8. The pins with the same signal name are connected in the servo amplifier.
9. Use MRZJW3-SETUP 121E.
10. When using the internal power supply (VDD), always connect VDD-COM. Do not connect them
when supplying external power. Refer to Section 3.6.2.
11. Use an external power supply when inputting a negative voltage.
3- 9
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.2 Internal connection diagram of servo amplifier
The following is the internal connection diagram where the signal assignment has been made in the
initial status in each control mode.
Servo amplifier
CN1B
VDD
3
COM
13
DC24V
(Note)
(Note)
P
S
T
COM COM COM
CN1A
CN1A
P
S
9
18
INP
SA
RD
RD
RD
S
T
T
Approx. 4.7k
CR
SP1
SP1
8
SG
SG
SG
10,20
19
(Note)
CN1B
(Note)
P
S
T
CN1B
SON
SON
SON
5
SP2
SP2
7
PC
ST1
RS2
8
TL
ST2
RS1
9
RES
RES
RES
14
EMG EMG EMG
15
LSP
LSP
16
LSN
LSN
17
SG
SG
P
6
TLC
TLC
VLC
18
ALM
ALM
ALM
Approx. 4.7k
Approx. 4.7k
19
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
4
DO1
DO1
DO1
Approx. 4.7k
Approx. 4.7k
Approx. 4.7k
Approx. 4.7k
Approx. 4.7k
Approx. 4.7k
SG
10,20
T
CN1A
6
LA
OPC
11
16
LAR
PG
13
PP
3
NG
12
5
LZ
NP
2
15
LZR
Case
14
OP
1
LG
CN1A
(Note)
P
S
Approx. 100k
Approx. 100k
SD
SD
SD
TLA
LB
LBR
Approx. 1.2k
CN3
(Note)
P
7
17
Approx. 1.2k
S
T
CN1B
VC
VLA
2
TLA
TC
12
DC 15V
P15R P15R P15R
11
LG
LG
LG
1
SD
SD
SD
Case
MO1
14
MO2
2
TXD
12
RXD
9
SDP
19
SDN
5
RDP
15
RDN
PE
CN1A
P15R
4
4
Note. P: Position control mode, S: Speed control mode, T: Torque control mode
3 - 10
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.3 I/O signals
3.3.1 Connectors and signal arrangements
POINT
The connector pin-outs shown above are viewed from the cable connector
wiring section side.
Refer to the next page for CN1A and CN1B signal assignment.
(1) Signal arrangement
CN1A
CN1B
11
1
2
2
13
3
4
5
15
5
MITSUBISHI
MELSERVO-J2
18
18
LG
3
4
20
10
CN3
LG
2
LG
RXD
13
4
14
5
MD
MDR
7
MR
9
BAT
MO1
15
16
10
1
11
12
6
8
19
9
20
1
LG
17
7
CN2
2
15
16
8
19
9
10
14
6
17
8
13
4
16
7
12
3
14
6
11
1
12
18
P5
20
6
17
MRR
19
The connector frames are
connected with the PE (earth)
terminal inside the servo amplifier.
P5
LG
5
RDP
TXD
14
MO2
16
7
LG
13
LG
15
RDN
17
18
9
TRE
3 - 11
3
8
10
P5
LG
11
12
SDP
19
20
P5
SDN
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(2) CN1A and CN1B signal assignment
The signal assignment of connector changes with the control mode as indicated below;
For the pins which are given parameter No.s in the related parameter column, their signals can be
changed using those parameters.
(Note2)
Connector
(Note1)
Pin No.
I/O
1
LG
S
S/T
T
LG
LG
LG
LG
T/P
I
NP
NP/
LG
/NP
3
I
PP
PP/
/PP
P15R
P15R/P15R
P15R
P15R
P15R
5
O
LZ
LZ
LZ
LZ
LZ
LZ
6
O
LA
LA
LA
LA
LA
LA
7
O
LB
LB
LB
LB
LB
LB
8
I
CR
CR/SP1
SP1
SP1/SP1
SP1
SP1/CR
COM
Related
parameter
P15R
9
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
10
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
11
OPC
OPC/
/OPC
No.43 to 48
SG
12
I
NG
NG/
/NG
13
I
PG
PG/
/PG
14
O
OP
OP
OP
OP
OP
OP
15
O
LZR
LZR
LZR
LZR
LZR
LZR
16
O
LAR
LAR
LAR
LAR
LAR
LAR
17
O
LBR
LBR
LBR
LBR
LBR
LBR
18
O
INP
INP/SA
SA
/INP
No.49
19
O
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
No.49
SA/
RD
20
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
1
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
VC
VC/VLA
VLA
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
O
DO1
DO1
DO1
DO1
DO1
DO1
5
I
SON
SON
SON
SON
SON
SON
6
O
TLC
TLC
TLC
TLC/VLC
VLC
VLC/TLC
No.49
7
I
LOP
SP2
LOP
SP2
LOP
No.43 to 48
8
I
PC
PC/ST1
ST1
ST1/RS2
RS2
RS2/PC
No.43 to 48
9
I
TL
TL/ST2
ST2
ST2/RS1
RS1
RS1/TL
No.43 to 48
2
I
3
(Note 4)4
CN1B
I/O Signals in control modes
P/S
2
4
CN1A
P
/VC
VLA/
10
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
11
P15R
P15R
P15R
P15R
P15R
P15R
TC
TC/TLA
COM
12
I
13
TLA
(Note3)
TLA/TLA
(Note3) TLA
(Note3)
TLA/TC
No.43 to 48
COM
COM
COM
COM
COM
14
I
RES
RES
RES
RES
RES
RES
15
I
EMG
EMG
EMG
EMG
EMG
EMG
16
I
LSP
LSP
LSP
LSP/
/LSP
17
I
LSN
LSN
LSN
LSN/
/LSN
18
O
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
No.49
19
O
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
No.1, 49
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
20
For note, refer to the next page.
3 - 12
No.43 to 48
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Note: 1. I : Input signal, O: Output signal
2. P : Position control mode, S: Speed control mode, T: Torque control mode, P/S: Position/speed
control change mode, S/T: Speed/torque control change mode, T/P: Torque/position control
change mode
3. By setting parameters No. 43 to 48 to make TL available, TLA can be used.
4. The signal of CN1A-18 is always output.
(3) Symbols and signal names
Symbol
Signal name
Symbol
SON
Servo-on
LSP
Forward rotation stroke end
RD
Ready
LSN
Reverse rotation stroke end
ZSP
Zero speed
CR
Clear
INP
In position
SP1
Speed selection 1
SA
Speed reached
SP2
Speed selection 2
ALM
Trouble
PC
Proportion control
WNG
Warning
ST1
Forward rotation start
BWNG
Battery warning
ST2
Reverse rotation start
OP
Encoder Z-phase pulse (open collector)
TL
Torque limit selection
MBR
Electromagnetic brake interlock
RES
Reset
LZ
Encoder Z-phase pulse
EMG
Forced stop
LZR
(differential line driver)
LOP
Control change
LA
Encoder A-phase pulse
VC
Analog speed command
LAR
(differential line driver)
VLA
Analog speed limit
LB
Encoder B-phase pulse
TLA
Analog torque limit
LBR
(differential line driver)
TC
Analog torque command
VDD
I/F internal power supply
RS1
Forward rotation selection
COM
Digital I/F power supply input
RS2
Reverse rotation selection
OPC
Open collector power input
SG
Digital I/F common
PP
NP
PG
Forward/reverse rotation pulse train
NG
TLC
VLC
Signal name
Limiting speed
P15R
15VDC power supply
LG
Control common
SD
Shield
Limiting torque
3 - 13
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.3.2 Signal explanations
For the I/O interfaces (symbols in I/O column in the table), refer to Section 3.6.2.
In the control mode field of the table
P : Position control mode, S: Speed control mode, T: Torque control mode
: Denotes that the signal may be used in the initial setting status.
: Denotes that the signal may be used by setting the corresponding parameter among parameters 43 to
49.
The pin No.s in the connector pin No. column are those in the initial status.
(1) Input signals
Signal
ConnecSymbol tor pin
No.
Functions/Applications
I/O
division
Servo-on
SON
CN1B
5
Connect SON-SG to switch on the base circuit and make the servo
amplifier ready to operate (servo-on).
Disconnect SON-SG to shut off the base circuit and coast the
servo motor (servo off) .
Set "
1" in parameter No. 41 to switch this signal on
(keep terminals connected) automatically in the servo
amplifier.
DI-1
Reset
RES
CN1B
14
Disconnect RES-SG for more than 50ms to reset the alarm.
Some alarms cannot be deactivated by the reset signal. Refer to
Section 10.2.
Shorting RES-SG in an alarm-free status shuts off the base
circuit. The base circuit is not shut off when " 1
" is set in
parameter No. 51.
DI-1
Forward rotation
stroke end
LSP
CN1B
16
To start operation, short LSP-SG and/or LSN-SG. Open them to
bring the motor to a sudden stop and make it servo-locked.
Set "
1" in parameter No. 22 to make a slow stop.
(Refer to Section 5.2.3.)
DI-1
(Note) Input signals
LSP
Reverse rotation
stroke end
LSN
CN1B
17
LSN
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Operation
CCW
CW
direction direction
Note. 0: LSP/LSN-SG off (open)
1: SP/LSN-SG on (short)
Set parameter No. 41 as indicated below to switch on the signals
(keep terminals connected) automatically in the servo amplifier:
Parameter No.41
Automatic ON
1
LSP
1
LSN
3 - 14
Control
mode
P
S
T
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Signal
ConnecSymbol tor pin
No.
Outside torque
limit selection
TL
Internal
torque limit
selection
TL1
Forward rotation
start
ST1
Reverse rotation
start
ST2
CN1B
9
CN1B
8
CN1B
9
Functions/Applications
I/O
division
Torque limit selection disconnecting TL-SG makes internal torque
limit 1 (parameter No. 28) valid and connecting them makes
analog torque limit (TLA) valid.
For details, refer to (5), Section 3.4.1.
DI-1
When using this signal, make it usable by making the setting of
parameter No. 43 to 48.
For details, refer to (5), Section 3.4.1.
DI-1
Used to start the servo motor in any of the following directions:
DI-1
(Note) Input signals
Servo motor starting direction
ST2
ST1
0
0
Stop (servo lock)
0
1
CCW
1
0
CW
1
1
Stop (servo lock)
Note. 0: ST1/ST2-SG off (open)
1: ST1/ST2-SG on (short)
If both ST1 and ST2 are switched on or off during operation, the
servo motor will be decelerated to a stop according to the
parameter No. 12 setting and servo-locked.
Forward rotation
selection
RS1
CN1B
9
Used to select any of the following servo motor torque generation
directions:
(Note) Input signals
Reverse rotation
selection
RS2
CN1B
8
Torque generation direction
RS2
RS1
0
0
Torque is not generated.
0
1
Forward rotation in driving mode /
reverse rotation in regenerative mode
1
0
Reverse rotation in driving mode /
forward rotation in regenerative mode
1
1
Torque is not generated.
Note. 0: RS1/RS2-SG off (open)
1: RS1/RS2-SG on (short)
3 - 15
DI-1
Control
mode
P
S
T
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Signal
Symbol
Speed selection 1
SP1
Speed selection 2
SP2
Speed selection 3
SP3
ConnecI/O
tor pin
Functions/Applications
division
No.
CN1A <Speed control mode>
DI-1
8
Used to select the command speed for operation.
When using SP3, make it usable by making the setting of
parameter No. 43 to 48.
DI-1
CN1B
(Note) Input
Setting of
7
signals
parameter
Speed command
No. 43 to 48 SP3 SP2 SP1
0
0 Analog speed command (VC)
DI-1
Internal speed command 1
When speed
0
1
(parameter No. 8)
selection
(SP3) is not
Internal speed command 2
1
0
used
(parameter No. 9)
(initial status)
Internal speed command 3
1
1
(parameter No. 10)
0
0
0 Analog speed command (VC)
Internal speed command 1
0
0
1
(parameter No. 8)
Internal speed command 2
0
1
0
(parameter No. 9)
Internal speed command 3
0
1
1
When speed
(parameter No.10)
selection
Internal speed command 4
(SP3) is made
1
0
0
(parameter No. 72)
valid
Internal speed command 5
1
0
1
(parameter No. 73)
Internal speed command 6
1
1
0
(parameter No. 74)
Internal speed command 7
1
1
1
(parameter No. 75)
Note 0: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG off (open)
1: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG on (short)
<Torque control mode>
Used to select the limit speed for operation.
When using SP3, make it usable by making the setting of
parameter No. 43 to 48.
Setting of
parameter
No. 43 to 48
(Note) Input
signals
SP3 SP2 SP1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
When speed
selection
(SP3) is not
used
(initial status)
When speed
selection
(SP3) is made
valid
Speed limit
Analog speed limit (VLA)
Internal speed command 1
(parameter No. 8)
Internal speed command 2
(parameter No. 9)
Internal speed command 3
(parameter No. 10)
Analog speed limit (VLA)
Internal speed command 1
(parameter No. 8)
Internal speed command 2
(parameter No. 9)
Internal speed command 3
(parameter No.10)
Internal speed command 4
(parameter No. 72)
Internal speed command 5
(parameter No. 73)
Internal speed command 6
(parameter No. 74)
Internal speed command 7
(parameter No. 75)
Note. 0: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG off (open)
1: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG on (short)
3 - 16
Control
mode
P S T
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Signal
Proportion
control
Emergency stop
Clear
Symbol
Connector pin
No.
Functions/Applications
I/O
division
PC
CN1B
8
Connect PC-SG to switch the speed amplifier from the
proportional integral type to the proportional type.
If the servo motor at a stop is rotated even one pulse due to any
external factor, it generates torque to compensate for a position
shift. When the servo motor shaft is to be locked mechanically
after positioning completion (stop), switching on the proportion
control signal (PC) upon positioning completion will suppress the
unnecessary torque generated to compensate for a position shift.
When the shaft is to be locked for a long time, switch on the
proportion control signal and torque control signal (TL) at the
same time to make the torque less than the rated by the analog
torque limit.
DI-1
EMG
CN1B
15
Disconnect EMG-SG to bring the servo motor to emergency stop
state, in which the servo is switched off and the dynamic brake is
operated.
Connect EMG-SG in the emergency stop state to reset that state.
DI-1
CR
CN1A
8
Connect CR-SG to clear the position control counter droop pulses
on its leading edge. The pulse width should be 10ms or more.
When the parameter No.42 setting is "
1 ", the pulses are
always cleared while CR-SG are connected.
DI-1
When using CM1 and CM2, make them usable by the setting of
parameters No. 43 to 48.
The combination of CM1-SG and CM2-SG gives you a choice of
four different electronic gear numerators set in the parameters.
CM1 and CM2 cannot be used in the absolute position detection
system.
DI-1
Electronic gear
selection 1
CM1
Electronic gear
selection 2
CM2
(Note) Input signals
Electronic gear denominator
CM2
CM1
0
0
Parameter No. 3 (CMX)
0
1
Parameter No. 69 (CM2)
1
0
Parameter No. 70 (CM3)
1
1
Parameter No. 71 (CM4)
DI-1
Note. 0: CM1/CM2-SG off (open)
1: CM1/CM2-SG on (short)
Gain changing
CDP
When using this signal, make it usable by the setting of
parameter No. 43 to 48.
Connect CDP-SG to change the load inertia moment ratio into the
parameter No. 61 setting and the gain values into the values
multiplied by the parameter No. 62 to 64 settings.
3 - 17
DI-1
Control
mode
P
S
T
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Signal
Control change
Symbol
LOP
Connector pin
No.
CN1B
7
Functions/Applications
<Position/speed control change mode>
Used to select the control mode in the position/speed control
change mode.
I/O
division
DI-1
Control
mode
P S T
Refer to
Functions/
Applications.
(Note) LOP
Control mode
0
1
Position
Speed
Note.0: LOP-SG off (open)
1: LOP-SG on (short)
<Speed/torque control change mode>
Used to select the control mode in the speed/torque control change
mode.
(Note) LOP
Control mode
0
1
Speed
Torque
Note.0: LOP-SG off (open)
1: LOP-SG on (short)
<Torque/position control mode>
Used to select the control mode in the torque/position control
change mode.
Analog torque
limit
TLA
Analog torque
command
TC
Analog speed
command
VC
Analog speed
limit
Forward rotation
pulse train
Reverse rotation
pulse train
CN1B
12
CN1B
2
VLA
PP
NP
PG
NG
CN1A
3
CN1A
2
CN1A
13
CN1A
12
(Note) LOP
Control mode
0
1
Torque
Position
Note.0: LOP-SG off (open)
1: LOP-SG on (short)
To use this signal in the speed control mode, set any of
parameters No. 43 to 48 to make TL available.
When the analog torque limit (TLA) is valid, torque is limited in
the full servo motor output torque range. Apply 0 to 10VDC
across TLA-LG. Connect the positive terminal of the power supply
to TLA. Maximum torque is generated at 10V. (Refer to (5) in
Section 3.4.1.) Resolution:10bit
Used to control torque in the full servo motor output torque
range.
Apply 0 to 8VDC across TC-LG. Maximum torque is generated
at 8V. (Refer to (1) in Section 3.4.3.)
The torque generated at 8V input can be changed using
parameter No. 26.
Apply 0 to 10VDC across VC-LG. Speed set in parameter No. 25
is provided at 10V. (Refer to (1) in Section 3.4.2.)
Resolution:14bit or equivalent
Apply 0 to 10VDC across VLA-LG. Speed set in parameter No.
25 is provided at 10V (Refer to (3) in Section 3.4.3.).
Used to enter a command pulse train.
In the open collector system (max. input frequency 200kpps):
Forward rotation pulse train across PP-SG
Reverse rotation pulse train across NP-SG
In the differential receiver system (max. input frequency
500kpps):
Forward rotation pulse train across PG-PP
Reverse rotation pulse train across NG-NP
The command pulse train form can be changed using
parameter No. 21.
3 - 18
Analog
input
Analog
input
Analog
input
Analog
input
DI-2
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(2) Output signals
Signal
ConnecSymbol tor pin
No.
Functions/Applications
I/O
division
ALM
CN1B
18
ALM-SG are disconnected when power is switched off or the
protective circuit is activated to shut off the base circuit. Without
alarm, ALM-SG are connected within 1 after power on.
DO-1
Ready
RD
CN1A
19
RD-SG are connected when the servo is switched on and the servo
amplifier is ready to operate.
DO-1
In position
INP
CN1A
18
INP-SG are connected when the number of droop pulses is in the
preset in-position range. The in-position range can be changed
using parameter No. 5.
When the in-position range is increased, INP-SG may be kept
connected during low-speed rotation.
DO-1
Speed reached
SA
SA-SG are connected when the servo motor speed has nearly
reached the preset speed. When the preset speed is 50r/min or
less, SA-SG are kept connected.
DO-1
Limiting speed
VLC
VLC-SG are connected when speed reaches the value set to any of
the internal speed limits 1 to 7 (parameters No. 8 to 10, 72 to 75)
or the analog speed limit (VLA) in the torque control mode. They
are disconnected when the servo-on signal (SON) switches off.
DO-1
Limiting torque
TLC
TLC-SG are connected when the torque generated reaches the
value set to the internal torque limit 1 (parameter No. 28) or
analog torque limit (TLA). They are disconnected when the servoon signal (SON) switches off.
DO-1
Zero speed
ZSP
CN1B
19
ZSP-SG are connected when the servo motor speed is zero speed
(50r/min) or less. Zero speed can be changed using parameter No.
24.
DO-1
Electromagnetic
brake interlock
MBR
CN1B
Set "
1 " in parameter No. 1 to use this parameter. Note that
ZSP will be unusable.
In the servo-off or alarm status, MBR-SG are disconnected.
When an alarm occurs, they are disconnected independently of
the base circuit status.
DO-1
Warning
WNG
To use this signal, assign the connector pin for output using
parameter No.49. The old signal before assignment will be
unusable.
When warning has occurred, WNG-SG are connected.
When there is no warning, WNG-SG are disconnected within 1
second after power-on.
DO-1
BWNG
To use this signal, assign the connector pin for output using
parameter No.49. The old signal before assignment will be
unusable.
BWNG-SG are connected when battery cable breakage warning
(AL.92) or battery warning (AL.9F) has occurred.
When there is no battery warning, BWNG-SG are disconnected
within 1 second after power-on.
DO-1
Trouble
Battery warning
CN1B
6
19
3 - 19
Control
mode
P
S
T
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Signal
Alarm code
ConnecSymbol tor pin
No.
ACD 0
ACD 1
ACD 2
CN1A
19
CN1A
18
CN1B
19
I/O
division
Functions/Applications
To use this signal, set "
1 " in parameter No.49.
This signal is output when an alarm occurs. When there is no
alarm, respective ordinary signals (RD, INP, SA, ZSP) are output.
Alarm codes and alarm names are listed below:
(Note) Alarm code
CN1B CN1A CN1A
19 Pin 18 Pin 19 Pin
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Alarm
display
Name
88888
Watchdog
AL.12
Memory error 1
AL.13
Clock error
AL.15
Memory error 2
AL.17
Board error
AL.19
Memory error 3
AL.37
Parameter error
AL.8A
Serial communication
timeout
AL.8E
Serial communication error
AL.30
Regenerative error
AL.33
Overvoltage
AL.10
Undervoltage
AL.45
Main circuit device
AL.46
Servo motor overheat
AL.50
Overload 1
AL.51
Overload 2
AL.24
Main circuit error
AL.32
Overcurrent
AL.31
Overspeed
AL.35
Command pulse frequency
alarm
AL.52
Error excessive
AL.16
Encoder error 1
AL.1A
Monitor combination error
AL.20
Encoder error 2
AL.25
Absolute position erase
Note.0: Pin-SG off (open)
1: Pin-SG on (short)
3 - 20
DO-1
Control
mode
P
S
T
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Connector pin
No.
Symbol
Encoder Z-phase
pulse
(Open collector)
OP
CN1A
14
Outputs the zero-point signal of the encoder. One pulse is output
per servo motor revolution. OP and LG are connected when the
zero-point position is reached. (Negative logic)
The minimum pulse width is about 400 s. For home position
return using this pulse, set the creep speed to 100r/min. or less.
DO-2
Encoder A-phase
pulse
(Differential line
driver)
LA
CN1A
6
CN1A
16
Outputs pulses per servo motor revolution set in parameter No.
27 in the differential line driver system. In CCW rotation of the
servo motor, the encoder B-phase pulse lags the encoder A-phase
pulse by a phase angle of /2.
The relationships between rotation direction and phase difference
of the A- and B-phase pulses can be changed using parameter No.
54.
DO-2
CN1A
5
CN1A
15
The same signal as OP is output in the differential line driver
system.
DO-2
Encoder B-phase
pulse
(Differential line
driver)
LAR
LB
LBR
LZ
Encoder Z-phase
pulse
(Differential line
driver)
LZR
CN1A
7
CN1A
17
Functions/Applications
I/O
division
Signal
Analog monitor 1
MO1
CN3
4
Used to output the data set in parameter No.17 to across MO1-LG
in terms of voltage. Resolution 10 bits
Analog
output
Analog monitor 2
MO2
CN3
14
Used to output the data set in parameter No.17 to across MO2-LG
in terms of voltage. Resolution 10 bits
Analog
output
Control
mode
P
S
T
(3) Communication
POINT
Refer to Chapter 14 for the communication function.
Signal
RS-422 I/F
Symbol
SDP
SDN
RDP
RDN
Connector pin
No.
Functions/Applications
CN3
9
CN3
19
CN3
5
CN3
15
RS-485 and RS-232C functions cannot be used together.
Choose either one in parameter No. 16.
RS-422
termination
TRE
CN3
10
Termination resistor connection terminal of RS-422 interface.
When the servo amplifier is the termination axis, connect this
terminal to RDN (CN3-15).
RS-232C I/F
RXD
CN3
2
CN3
12
RS-485 and RS-232C functions cannot be used together.
Choose either one in parameter No. 16.
TXD
3 - 21
I/O
division
Control
mode
P
S
T
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(4) Power supply
Signal
ConnecSymbol tor pin
No.
Functions/Applications
I/F internal
power supply
VDD
CN1B
3
Used to output 24V 10% to across VDD-SG.
When using this power supply for digital interface, connect it with
COM.
Permissible current : 80mA
Digital I/F power
supply input
COM
CN1A
9
CN1B
13
Used to input 24VDC for input interface.
Connect the positive terminal of the 24VDC external power
supply.
24VDC 10%
Open collector
power input
OPC
CN1A
11
When inputting a pulse train in the open collector system, supply
this terminal with the positive ( ) power of 24VDC.
SG
CN1A
10
20
CN1B
10
20
Common terminal for input signals such as SON and EMG. Pins
are connected internally.
Separated from LG.
P15R
CN1A
4
CN1B
11
Outputs 15VDC to across P15R-LG. Available as power for TC,
TLA, VC, VLA.
Permissible current: 30mA
Control common
LG
CN1A
1
CN1B
1
CN3
1
3
5
11
13
15
Common terminal for TLA, TC, VC, VLA, FPA, FPB, OP ,MO1,
MO2 and P15R.
Pins are connected internally.
Shield
SD
Plate
Connect the external conductor of the shield cable.
Digital I/F
common
15VDC power
supply
3 - 22
I/O
division
Control
mode
P
S
T
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.4 Detailed description of the signals
3.4.1 Position control mode
(1) Pulse train input
(a) Input pulse waveform selection
Encoder pulses may be input in any of three different forms, for which positive or negative logic
can be chosen. Set the command pulse train form in parameter No. 21.
Arrow
or
in the table indicates the timing of importing a pulse train.
A- and B-phase pulse trains are imported after they have been multiplied by 4.
Pulse train form
Negative logic
Forward rotation
pulse train
Reverse rotation
pulse train
Forward rotation
command
Reverse rotation
command
Parameter No. 21
(Command pulse train)
PP
0010
NP
PP
Pulse train
0011
sign
NP
L
H
PP
A-phase pulse train
B-phase pulse train
0012
Positive logic
NP
Forward rotation
pulse train
Reverse rotation
pulse train
PP
0000
NP
PP
Pulse train
sign
0001
NP
L
H
PP
A-phase pulse train
B-phase pulse train
0002
NP
3 - 23
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(b) Connections and waveforms
1) Open collector system
Connect as shown below:
Servo amplifier
VDD
OPC
PP
Approx.
1.2k
NP
Approx.
1.2k
SG
SD
The explanation assumes that the input waveform has been set to the negative logic and forward
and reverse rotation pulse trains (parameter No.21 has been set to 0010). The waveforms in the
table in (a), (1) of this section are voltage waveforms of PP and NP based on SG. Their
relationships with transistor ON/OFF are as follows:
Forward rotation
pulse train
(transistor)
Reverse rotation
pulse train
(transistor)
(OFF) (ON) (OFF) (ON)
(OFF)
(ON) (OFF) (ON) (OFF) (ON)
(OFF)
Forward rotation command
3 - 24
Reverse rotation command
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
2) Differential line driver system
Connect as shown below:
Servo amplifier
PP
PG
NP
NG
SD
The explanation assumes that the input waveform has been set to the negative logic and forward
and reverse rotation pulse trains (parameter No.21 has been set to 0010).
For the differential line driver, the waveforms in the table in (a), (1) of this section are as follows.
The waveforms of PP, PG, NP and NG are based on that of the ground of the differential line
driver.
Forward rotation
pulse train
PP
PG
Reverse rotation
pulse train
NP
NG
Forward rotation command
3 - 25
Reverse rotation command
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(2) In-position (INP)
PF-SG are connected when the number of droop pulses in the deviation counter falls within the preset
in-position range (parameter No. 5). INP-SG may remain connected when low-speed operation is
performed with a large value set as the in-position range.
Servo-on (SON)
Alarm
ON
OFF
Yes
No
In-position range
Droop pulses
In position (INP)
ON
OFF
(3) Ready (RD)
Servo-on (SON)
Alarm
Ready (RD)
ON
OFF
Yes
No
ON
80ms or less
10ms or less
10ms or less
OFF
(4) Electronic gear switching
The combination of CM1-SG and CM2-SG gives you a choice of four different electronic gear
numerators set in the parameters.
As soon as CM1/CM2 is turned ON or OFF, the denominator of the electronic gear changes. Therefore,
if any shock occurs at this change, use position smoothing (parameter No. 7) to relieve shock.
(Note) External input signal
Electronic gear denomination
CM2
CM1
0
0
Parameter No. 3 (CMX)
0
1
Parameter No. 69 (CM2)
1
0
Parameter No. 70 (CM3)
1
1
Parameter No. 71 (CM4)
Note.0: CM1/CM2-SG off(open)
1: CM1/CM2-SG on(short)
3 - 26
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(5) Torque limit
(a) Torque limit and generated torque
By setting parameter No. 28 (internal torque limit 1), torque is always limited to the maximum
value during operation. A relationship between the limit value and servo motor-generated torque is
shown below.
Generated torque
Max. torque
0
0
100
Torque limit value [%]
Torque limit value [%]
A relationship between the applied voltage of the analog torque limit (TLA) and the torque limit
value of the servo motor is shown below. Generated torque limit values will vary about 5% relative
to the voltage depending on products.
At the voltage of less than 0.05V, generated torque may vary as it may not be limited sufficiently.
Therefore, use this function at the voltage of 0.05V or more.
Servo amplifier
100
TL
SG
5%
0
0 0.05
2k
10
TLA application voltage [V]
2k
P15R
TLA
Japan resistor
RRS10 or equivalent
LG
SD
TLA application voltage vs.
torque limit value
(b) Torque limit value selection
Choose the torque limit made valid by the internal torque limit value 1 (parameter No. 28) using
the external torque limit selection (TL) or the torque limit made valid by the analog torque limit
(TLA) as indicated below.
When internal torque limit selection (TL1) is made usable by parameter No. 43 to 48, internal
torque limit 2 (parameter No. 76) can be selected. However, if the parameter No. 28 value is less
than the limit value selected by TL/TL1, the parameter No. 28 value is made valid.
(Note) External input signals
TL1
TL
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Torque limit value made valid
Internal torque limit value 1 (parameter No. 28)
TLA Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 28
TLA Parameter No. 28: TLA
Parameter No. 76 Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 28
Parameter No. 76 Parameter No. 28: Parameter No. 76
TLA Parameter No. 76: Parameter No. 76
TLA Parameter No. 76: TLA
Note.0: TL/TL1-SG off (open)
1: TL/TL1-SG on (short)
(c) Limiting torque (TLC)
TLC-SG are connected when the torque generated by the servo motor reaches the torque set to
internal torque limit value 1 or analog torque limit.
3 - 27
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.4.2 Speed control mode
(1) Speed setting
(a) Speed command and speed
The servo motor is run at the speeds set in the parameters or at the speed set in the applied
voltage of the analog speed command (VC). A relationship between the analog speed command
(VC) applied voltage and the servo motor speed is shown below:
The maximum speed is achieved at 10V. The speed at 10V can be changed using parameter No.
25.
Rated speed [r/min]
Speed [r/min]
10
Forward rotation (CCW)
CCW direction
0
10
VC applied voltage [V]
CW direction
Rated speed
Reverse rotation (CW)
The following table indicates the rotation direction according to forward rotation start (ST1) and
reverse rotation start (ST2) combination:
(Note) External input signals
Rotation direction
Analog speed command (VC)
Internal speed
commands
ST2
ST1
0
0
Stop
(Servo lock)
Stop
(Servo lock)
Stop
(Servo lock)
Stop
(Servo lock)
0
1
CCW
CCW
0
CW
Stop
(No servo lock)
CW
1
CCW
CW
1
Stop
(Servo lock)
Stop
(Servo lock)
Stop
(Servo lock)
Stop
(Servo lock)
1
Polarity
0V
Polarity
Note.0: ST1/ST2-SG off (open)
1: ST1/ST2-SG on (short)
The forward rotation start signal (ST1) and reverse rotation start signal (ST2) can be assigned to
any pins of the connector CN1A, CN1B using parameters No. 43 to 48.
Generally, make connection as shown below:
Servo amplifier
2k
2k
Japan resistor
RRS10 or equivalent
3 - 28
ST1
ST2
SG
P15R
VC
LG
SD
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(b) Speed selection 1 (SP1), speed selection 2 (SP2) and speed command value
Choose any of the speed settings made by the internal speed commands 1 to 3 using speed selection
1 (SP1) and speed selection 2 (SP2) or the speed setting made by the analog speed command (VC).
(Note) External input signals
Speed command value
SP2
SP1
0
0
Analog speed command (VC)
0
1
Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8)
1
0
Internal speed command 2 (parameter No. 9)
1
1
Internal speed command 3 (parameter No. 10)
Note.0: SP1/SP2-SG off (open)
1: SP1/SP2-SG on (short)
By making speed selection 3 (SP3) usable by setting of parameter No. 43 to 48, you can choose
the speed command values of analog speed command (VC) and internal speed commands 1 to 7.
(Note) External input signals
Speed command value
SP3
SP2
SP1
0
0
0
Analog speed command (VC)
0
0
1
Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8)
0
1
0
Internal speed command 2 (parameter No. 9)
0
1
1
Internal speed command 3 (parameter No. 10)
1
0
0
Internal speed command 4 (parameter No. 72)
1
0
1
Internal speed command 5 (parameter No. 73)
1
1
0
Internal speed command 6 (parameter No. 74)
1
1
1
Internal speed command 7 (parameter No. 75)
Note.0 : SP1/SP2/SP3-SG off (open)
1 : SP1/SP2/SP3-SG on (short)
The speed may be changed during rotation. In this case, the values set in parameters No. 11 and
12 are used for acceleration/deceleration.
When the speed has been specified under any internal speed command, it does not vary due to the
ambient temperature.
(2) Speed reached (SA)
SA-SG are connected when the servo motor speed nearly reaches the speed set to the internal speed
command or analog speed command.
Internal speed
command 1
Set speed selection
Start (ST1,ST2)
ON
OFF
Servo motor speed
Speed reached (SA)
ON
OFF
(3) Torque limit
As in Section 3.4.1 (5).
3 - 29
Internal speed
command 2
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.4.3 Torque control mode
(1) Torque control
(a) Torque command and generated torque
A relationship between the applied voltage of the analog torque command (TC) and the torque
generated by the servo motor is shown below.
The maximum torque is generated at 8V. Note that the torque generated at 8V input can be
changed with parameter No. 26.
CCW direction
Max. torque
Forward rotation (CCW)
Generated torque
8
0.05
0.05 8
TC applied voltage [V]
CW direction
Max. torque (Note)
Reverse rotation (CW)
Generated torque limit values will vary about 5% relative to the voltage depending on products.
Also the generated torque may vary if the voltage is low ( 0.05 to 0.05V) and the actual speed
is close to the limit value. In such a case, increase the speed limit value.
The following table indicates the torque generation directions determined by the forward rotation
selection (RS1) and reverse rotation selection (RS2) when the analog torque command (TC) is used.
(Note) External input signals
Rotation direction
Torque control command (TC)
RS2
RS1
0
0
Torque is not generated.
1
CCW (reverse rotation in
driving mode/forward
rotation in regenerative
mode)
1
0
CW (forward rotation in
driving mode/reverse
rotation in regenerative
mode)
1
1
Torque is not generated.
0
Polarity
0V
CW (forward rotation in
driving mode/reverse
rotation in regenerative
Torque is not mode)
generated. CCW (reverse rotation in
driving mode/forward
rotation in regenerative
mode)
Torque is not generated.
Note. 0: RS1/RS2-SG off (open)
1: RS1/RS2-SG on (short)
Generally, make connection as shown below:
Servo amplifier
8 to 8V
Polarity
Torque is not generated.
RS1
RS2
SG
TC
LG
SD
3 - 30
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(b) Analog torque command offset
Using parameter No. 30, the offset voltage of
voltage as shown below.
999 to 999mV can be added to the TC applied
Generated torque
Max. torque
Parameter No.30 offset range
999 to 999mV
0
8( 8)
TC applied voltage [V]
(2) Torque limit
By setting parameter No. 28 (internal torque limit 1), torque is always limited to the maximum value
during operation. A relationship between limit value and servo motor-generated torque is as in (5) in
section 3.4.1. Note that the analog torque limit (TLA) is unavailable.
(3) Speed limit
(a) Speed limit value and speed
The speed is limited to the values set in parameters No. 8 to 10, 72 to 75 (internal speed limits 1 to
7) or the value set in the applied voltage of the analog speed limit (VLA).
A relationship between the analog speed limit (VLA) applied voltage and the servo motor speed is
shown below.
When the motor speed reaches the speed limit value, torque control may become unstable. Make
the set value more than 100r/m greater than the desired speed limit value.
Rated speed
Speed [r/min]
Forward rotation (CCW)
CCW direction
10
0
10
VLA applied voltage [V]
CW direction
Rated speed
Reverse rotation (CW)
The following table indicates the limit direction according to forward rotation selection (RS1) and
reverse rotation selection (RS2) combination:
(Note) External input signals
RS1
Speed limit direction
Analog speed limit (VLA)
Polarity
Polarity
CCW
CW
CW
CCW
RS2
1
0
0
1
Note.0: RS1/RS2-SG off (open)
1: RS1/RS2-SG on (short)
Generally, make connection as shown below:
Servo amplifier
2k
2k
Japan resistor
RRS10 or equivalent
3 - 31
SP1
SP2
SG
P15R
VC
LG
SD
Internal speed
commands
CCW
CW
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(b) Speed selection 1(SP1)/speed selection 2(SP2)/speed selection 3(SP3) and speed limit values
Choose any of the speed settings made by the internal speed limits 1 to 7 using speed selection
1(SP1), speed selection 2(SP2) and speed selection 3(SP3) or the speed setting made by the speed
limit command (VLA), as indicated below.
Setting of parameter
No. 43 to 48
(Note) Input signals
SP3
When speed selection
(SP3) is not used
(initial status)
When speed selection
(SP3) is made valid
Speed limit value
SP2
SP1
0
0
Analog speed command (VLA)
0
1
Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8)
1
0
Internal speed command 2 (parameter No. 9)
1
1
Internal speed command 3 (parameter No. 10)
0
0
0
Analog speed command (VLA)
0
0
1
Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8)
0
1
0
Internal speed command 2 (parameter No. 9)
0
1
1
Internal speed command 3 (parameter No. 10)
1
0
0
Internal speed command 4 (parameter No. 72)
1
0
1
Internal speed command 5 (parameter No. 73)
1
1
0
Internal speed command 6 (parameter No. 74)
1
1
1
Internal speed command 7 (parameter No. 75)
Note.0: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG off (open)
1: SP1/SP2/SP3-SG on (short)
When the internal speed limits 1 to 7 are used to command the speed, the speed does not vary
with the ambient temperature.
(c) Limiting speed (VLC)
VLC-SG are connected when the servo motor speed reaches the limit speed set to any of the
internal speed limits 1 to 3 or analog speed limit.
3 - 32
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.4.4 Position/speed control change mode
Set "0001" in parameter No. 0 to switch to the position/speed control change mode. This function is not
available in the absolute position detection system.
(1) Control change (LOP)
Use control change (LOP) to switch between the position control mode and the speed control mode
from an external contact. Relationships between LOP-SG status and control modes are indicated
below:
(Note) LOP
Servo control mode
0
Position control mode
1
Speed control mode
Note.0: LOP-SG off (open)
1: LOP-SG on (short)
The control mode may be changed in the zero-speed status. To ensure safety, change control after the
servo motor has stopped. When position control mode is changed to speed control mode, droop pulses are
reset.
If the signal has been switched on-off at the speed higher than the zero speed and the speed is then
reduced to the zero speed or less, the control mode cannot be changed. A change timing chart is shown
below:
Position
control mode
Servo motor speed
Zero speed (ZSP)
Control change (LOP)
Speed
control mode
Position
control mode
Zero speed
level
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(Note)
(Note)
Note: When ZSP is not on, control cannot be changed if LOP is switched on-off.
If ZSP switches on after that, control cannot not be changed.
(2) Torque limit in position control mode
As in Section 3.4.1 (5).
3 - 33
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(3) Speed setting in speed control mode
(a) Speed command and speed
The servo motor is run at the speed set in parameter No. 8 (internal speed command 1) or at the
speed set in the applied voltage of the analog speed command (VC). A relationship between analog
speed command (VC) applied voltage and servo motor speed and the rotation directions determined
by the forward rotation start signal (ST1) and reverse rotation start signal (ST2) are as in (a), (1) in
section 3.4.2.
Generally, make connection as shown below:
Servo amplifier
2k
2k
Japan resistor
RRS10 or equivalent
SP1
SG
P15R
VC
LG
SD
(b) Speed selection 1 (SP1) and speed command value
Use speed selection 1 (SP1) to select between the speed set by the internal speed command 1 and
the speed set by the analog speed command (VC) as indicated in the following table:
(Note) External input signals
SP1
Speed command value
0
Analog speed command (VC)
1
Internal speed command 1 (parameter No. 8)
Note.0: SP1-SG off (open)
1: SP1-SG on (short)
The speed may also be changed during rotation. In this case, it is increased or decreased according
to the value set in parameter No. 11 or 12.
When the internal speed command 1 is used to command the speed, the speed does not vary with
the ambient temperature.
(c) Speed reached (SA)
As in Section 3.4.2 (2).
3 - 34
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.4.5 Speed/torque control change mode
Set "0003" in parameter No. 0 to switch to the speed/torque control change mode.
(1) Control change (LOP)
Use control change (LOP) to switch between the speed control mode and the torque control mode from
an external contact. Relationships between LOP-SG status and control modes are indicated below:
(Note) LOP
Servo control mode
0
Speed control mode
1
Torque control mode
Note.0: LOP-SG off (open)
1: LOP-SG on (short)
The control mode may be changed at any time. A change timing chart is shown below:
Torque
Speed
Speed
control mode control mode control mode
Control change (LOP)
ON
OFF
Servo motor speed
(Note)
Analog torque
command (TC)
10V
0
Load torque
Forward rotation in driving mode
Note: When the start signal (ST1 ST2) is switched off as soon as the mode is changed to speed control,
the servo motor comes to a stop according to the deceleration time constant.
(2) Speed setting in speed control mode
As in Section 3.4.2 (1).
(3) Torque limit in speed control mode
As in Section 3.4.1 (5).
3 - 35
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(4) Speed limit in torque control mode
(a) Speed limit value and speed
The speed is limited to the limit value set in parameter No. 8 (internal speed limit 1) or the value
set in the applied voltage of the analog speed limit (VLA). A relationship between the analog speed
limit (VLA) applied voltage and the servo motor speed is as in (a), (3) in section 3.4.3.
Generally, make connection as shown below:
Servo amplifier
2k
2k
Japan resistor
RRS10 or equivalent
SP1
SG
P15R
VLA
LG
SD
(b) Speed selection 1 (SP1) and speed limit value
Use speed selection 1 (SP1) to select between the speed set by the internal speed command 1 and
the speed set by the analog speed limit (VLA) as indicated in the following table:
(Note) External input signals
Speed command value
SP1
0
Analog speed limit (VLA)
1
Internal speed limit 1 (parameter No. 8)
Note.0: SP1-SG off (open)
1: SP1-SG on (short)
When the internal speed limit 1 is used to command the speed, the speed does not vary with the
ambient temperature.
(c) Limiting speed (VLC)
As in (c), (3) in section 3.4.3.
(5) Torque control in torque control mode
As in Section 3.4.3 (1).
(6) Torque limit in torque control mode
As in Section 3.4.3 (2).
3 - 36
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.4.6 Torque/position control change mode
Set "0005" in parameter No. 0 to switch to the torque/position control change mode.
(1) Control change (LOP)
Use control change (LOP) to switch between the torque control mode and the position control mode
from an external contact. Relationships between LOP-SG status and control modes are indicated
below:
(Note) LOP
Servo control mode
0
Torque control mode
1
Position control mode
Note.0: LOP-SG off (open)
1: LOP-SG on (short)
The control mode may be changed in the zero-speed status.
To ensure safety, change control after the servo motor has stopped. When position control mode is
changed to torque control mode, droop pulses are reset.
If the signal has been switched on-off at the speed higher than the zero speed and the speed is then
reduced to the zero speed or less, the control mode cannot be changed. A change timing chart is shown
below:
Speed
Torque
Speed
control mode control mode control mode
Servo motor speed
Zero speed
level
10V
Analog torque
command (TLA)
Zero speed (ZSP)
Control change (LOP)
0V
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(2) Speed limit in torque control mode
As in Section 3.4.3 (3).
(3) Torque control in torque control mode
As in Section 3.4.3 (1).
(4) Torque limit in torque control mode
As in Section 3.4.3 (2).
(5) Torque limit in position control mode
As in Section 3.4.1 (5).
3 - 37
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.5 Alarm occurrence timing chart
When an alarm has occurred, remove its cause, make sure that the operation
signal is not being input, ensure safety, and reset the alarm before restarting
operation.
CAUTION
When an alarm occurs in the servo amplifier, the base circuit is shut off and the servo motor is coated to a
stop. Switch off the main circuit power supply in the external sequence. To reset the alarm, switch the
control circuit power supply from off to on, press the "SET" button on the current alarm screen, or turn
the reset signal (RES) from off to on. However, the alarm cannot be reset unless its cause is removed.
Main circuit
control circuit
power supply
ON
OFF
Base circuit
ON
OFF
Valid
Dynamic brake
Invalid
Servo-on
(SON)
Ready
(RD)
Trouble
(ALM)
Reset
(RES)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Power off
Brake operation
Power on
Brake operation
1s
50ms or more
Alarm occurs.
60ms or more
Remove cause of trouble.
(1) Overcurrent, overload 1 or overload 2
If operation is repeated by switching control circuit power off, then on to reset the overcurrent
(AL.32), overload 1 (AL.50) or overload 2 (AL.51) alarm after its occurrence, without removing
its cause, the servo amplifier and servo motor may become faulty due to temperature rise.
Securely remove the cause of the alarm and also allow about 30 minutes for cooling before
resuming operation.
(2) Regenerative alarm
If operation is repeated by switching control circuit power off, then on to reset the regenerative
(AL.30) alarm after its occurrence, the external regenerative brake resistor will generate heat,
resulting in an accident.
(3) Instantaneous power failure
Undervoltage (AL.10) occurs if power is restored after a 60ms or longer power failure of the
control power supply or after a drop of the bus voltage to or below 200VDC. If the power failure
persists further, the control power switches off. When the power failure is reset in this state, the
alarm is reset and the servo motor will start suddenly if the servo-on signal (SON) is on. To
prevent hazard, make up a sequence which will switch off the servo-on signal (SON) if an alarm
occurs.
(4) In position control mode (incremental)
When an alarm occurs, the home position is lost. When resuming operation after deactivating
the alarm, make a home position return.
3 - 38
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.6 Interfaces
3.6.1 Common line
The following diagram shows the power supply and its common line.
CN1A
CN1B
CN1A
CN1B
DC24V
VDD
RA
ALM .etc
COM
DO-1
SON, etc.
DI-1
SG
(Note)
OPC
PG NG
PP NP
SG
15VDC 10%
30mA
P15R
SG
Isolated
OP
LG
LA etc.
Analog input
( 10V/max. current)
Differential line
driver output
35mA max.
LAR
etc.
LG
TLA
VC etc.
SD
MO1
MO2
LG
CN3 Analog monitor output
LG
SD
RDP
RDN
SDP
RS-422
SDN
LG
SD
TXD
RXD
MR
RS-232C
CN2
MRR
LG
SD
Servo motor
SM
Ground
Note: For the open collection pulse train input. Make the following
connection for the different line driver pulse train input.
OPC
PG NG
PP NP
SG
3 - 39
Servo motor encoder
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.6.2 Detailed description of the interfaces
This section gives the details of the I/O signal interfaces (refer to I/O Division in the table) indicated in
Sections 3.3.2.
Refer to this section and connect the interfaces with the external equipment.
(1) Digital input interface DI-1
Give a signal with a relay or open collector transistor.
Source input is also possible. Refer to (7) in this section.
For use of internal power supply
For use of external power supply
Servo amplifier
Do not connect
VDD-COM.
24VDC
VDD
Servo amplifier
R: Approx. 4.7
COM
24VDC
VDD
24VDC
200mA or more COM
(Note)
For a transistor
R: Approx. 4.7
SON, etc.
Approx. 5mA
SON, etc.
Switch
TR
SG
Switch
V CES 1.0V
I CEO 100 A
SG
Note: This also applies to the use of the external power supply.
(2) Digital output interface DO-1
A lamp, relay or photocoupler can be driven. Provide a diode (D) for an inductive load, or an inrush
current suppressing resister (R) for a lamp load. (Permissible current: 40mA or less, inrush current:
100mA or less)
(a) Inductive load
For use of internal power supply
For use of external power supply
Servo amplifier
24VDC
VDD
Do not connect
VDD-COM.
Servo amplifier
24VDC
VDD
COM
COM
Load
ALM, etc.
Load
24VDC
10%
ALM, etc.
SG
If the diode is not
connected as shown,
the servo amplifier
will be damaged.
SG
If the diode is not
connected as shown,
the servo amplifier
will be damaged.
3 - 40
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(b) Lamp load
For use of internal power supply
For use of external power supply
Servo amplifier
24VDC
Servo amplifier
VDD
24VDC
Do not connect
VDD-COM.
VDD
COM
COM
R
R
24VDC
10%
ALM, etc.
ALM, etc.
SG
SG
(3) Pulse train input interface DI-2
Provide a pulse train signal in the open collector or differential line driver system.
(a) Open collector system
1) Interface
For use of internal power supply
For use of external power supply
Servo amplifier
24VDC
VDD
OPC
Do not connect
VDD-OPC.
Max. input pulse
frequency 200kpps
Servo amplifier
VDD
About 1.2k
OPC
Max. input pulse
frequency 200kpps
About 1.2k
PP, NP
24VDC
PP, NP
SG
SD
SG
SD
2) Conditions of the input pulse
tc
PP
24VDC
tHL
tLH tHL 0.2 s
tc 2 s
tF 3 s
0.9
0.1
tc
tLH
tF
NP
3 - 41
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(b) Differential line driver system
1) Interface
Servo amplifier
Max. input pulse
frequency 500kpps
Am26LS31 or equivalent
PP(NP)
PG(NG)
About 100
SD
2) Conditions of the input pulse
tHL
tc
PP PG
tLH tHL 0.1 s
tc 1 s
tF 3 s
0.9
0.1
tc
tLH
tF
NP NG
(4) Encoder pulse output DO-2
(a) Open collector system
Interface
Max. output current : 35mA
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
OP
OP
LG
LG
SD
SD
3 - 42
5 to 24VDC
Photocoupler
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(b) Differential line driver system
1) Interface
Max. output current: 35mA
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
LA
(LB, LZ)
Am26LS32 or equivalent
LA
(LB, LZ)
100
150
LAR
(LBR, LZR)
LAR
(LBR, LZR)
LG
SD
SD
2) Output pulse
Servo motor CCW rotation
LA
LAR
T
LB
LBR
/2
LZ signal varies 3/8T on its leading edge.
LZ
LZR
400 s or more
OP
(5) Analog input
Input impedance 10 to 12k
Servo amplifier
15VDC
P15R
Upper limit setting 2k
2k
VC‚ etc
LG
Approx.
10k
SD
(6) Analog output
Output voltage 10V
Max.1mA
Max. output current
Resolution : 10bit
Servo amplifier
MO1
(MO2)
LG
10k
Reading in one or
A
both directions
1mA meter
SD
3 - 43
High-speed photocoupler
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(7) Source input interface
When using the input interface of source type, all Dl-1 input signals are of source type.
Source output cannot be provided.
For use of internal power supply
For use of external power supply
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
SG
COM
(Note)
For a transistor
Approx. 5mA
SG
R: Approx. 4.7
COM
SON,
etc.
Switch
Switch
SON,etc.
24VDC
TR
VDD
24VDC
200mA or more
VCES 1.0V
ICEO 100 A
Note: This also applies to the use of the external power supply.
3 - 44
R: Approx. 4.7
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.7 Input power supply circuit
CAUTION
When the servo amplifier has become faulty, switch power off on the servo
amplifier power side. Continuous flow of a large current may cause a fire.
Use the trouble signal to switch power off. Otherwise, a regenerative brake
transistor fault or the like may overheat the regenerative brake resistor, causing a
fire.
3.7.1 Connection example
Wire the power supply and main circuit as shown below so that the servo-on signal turns off as soon as
alarm occurrence is detected and power is shut off.
A no-fuse breaker (NFB) must be used with the input cables of the power supply.
(1) For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC power supply
Emergency
OFF
RA stop
ON
MC
MC
SK
NFB
MC
L1
3-phase
200 to 230 VAC
Servo amplifier
L2
L3
L11
L21
EMG
Emergency stop
Servo-on
SON
SG
VDD
COM
ALM
3 - 45
RA
Trouble
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(2) For 1-phase 100 to 120VAC or 1-phase 100 to 120VAC power supply
Emergency
OFF
RA stop
ON
MC
MC
SK
Power supply
1-phase 100 to
120VAC or
1-phase 230VAC
NFB
MC
L1
Servo amplifier
L2
L3 (Note)
L11
L21
EMG
Emergency stop
Servo-on
SON
SG
VDD
COM
ALM
Note : Not provided for 1-phase 100 to 120VAC.
3 - 46
RA
Trouble
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.7.2 Terminals
The positions and signal arrangements of the terminal blocks change with the capacity of the servo
amplifier. Refer to Section 11.1.
Symbol
Signal
Description
Supply L1, L2 and L3 with the following power:
For 1-phase 230VAC, connect the power supply to L1/L2 and leave L3 open.
Power supply
L1, L2, L3
Main circuit power supply
Servo amplifier MR-J2S-10A to MR-J2S-100A
70A
to 700A
3-phase 200 to 230VAC,
50/60Hz
1-phase 230VAC,
50/60Hz
L1
L1
MR-J2S-10A1
to 40A1
L2 L3
L2
1-phase 100 to 120VAC,
50/60Hz
U, V, W
Servo motor output
Servo amplifier
Control circuit power supply
1-phase 200 to 230VAC,
50/60Hz
1-phase 100 to 120VAC,
50/60Hz
P, C, D
Regenerative brake option
N
Return converter
Brake unit
Protective earth (PE)
L2
Connect to the servo motor power supply terminals (U, V, W).
Power supply
L11, L21
L1
MR-J2S-10A to 700A
L11
MR-J2S-10A1 to 40A1
L21
L11
L21
1) MR-J2S-350A or less
Wiring is factory-connected across P-D (servo amplifier built-in regenerative
brake resistor).
When using the regenerative brake option, always remove the wiring from
across P-D and connect the regenerative brake option across P-C.
2) MR-J2S-500A or more
Wiring is factory-connected across P-C (servo amplifier built-in regenerative
brake resistor).
When using the regenerative brake option, always remove the wiring from
across P-C and connect the regenerative brake option across P-C.
Refer to Section 13.1.1 for details.
When using the return converter or brake unit, connect it across P-N.
Do not connect it to the servo amplifier of MR-J2S-350A or less.
Refer to Sections 13.1.2 and 13.1.3 for details.
Connect this terminal to the protective earth (PE) terminals of the servo motor
and control box for grounding.
3 - 47
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.7.3 Power-on sequence
(1) Power-on procedure
1) Always wire the power supply as shown in above Section 3.7.1 using the magnetic contactor with
the main circuit power supply (three-phase 200V: L1, L2, L3, single-phase 230V: L1, L2). Configure
up an external sequence to switch off the magnetic contactor as soon as an alarm occurs.
2) Switch on the control circuit power supply L11, L21 simultaneously with the main circuit power
supply or before switching on the main circuit power supply. If the main circuit power supply is not
on, the display shows the corresponding warning. However, by switching on the main circuit power
supply, the warning disappears and the servo amplifier will operate properly.
3) The servo amplifier can accept the servo-on signal (SON) about 1 to 2s after the main circuit power
supply is switched on. Therefore, when SON is switched on simultaneously with the main circuit
power supply, the base circuit will switch on in about 1 to 2s, and the ready signal (RD) will switch
on in further about 20ms, making the servo amplifier ready to operate. (Refer to paragraph (2) in
this section.)
4) When the reset signal (RES) is switched on, the base circuit is shut off and the servo motor shaft
coasts.
(2) Timing chart
SON accepted
(1 to 2s)
power supply
ON
OFF
Base circuit
ON
OFF
Servo-on
(SON)
ON
OFF
Reset
(RES)
ON
OFF
Ready
(RD)
ON
OFF
10ms
60ms
10ms
60ms
20ms
10ms
20ms
10ms
20ms
10ms
(3) Emergency stop
Make up a circuit which shuts off main circuit power as soon as EMG-SG are opened at an emergency
stop. To ensure safety, always install an external emergency stop switch across EMG-SG. By
disconnecting EMG-SG, the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden stop. At
this time, the display shows the servo emergency stop warning (AL.E6).
During ordinary operation, do not use the external emergency stop signal to alternate stop and run.
The servo amplifier life may be shortened.
Also, if the start signal is on or a pulse train is input during an emergency stop, the servo motor will
rotate as soon as the warning is reset. During an emergency stop, always shut off the run command.
Servo amplifier
VDD
COM
Emergency stop
EMG
SG
3 - 48
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.8 Connection of servo amplifier and servo motor
3.8.1 Connection instructions
WARNING
Insulate the connections of the power supply terminals to prevent an electric
shock.
CAUTION
Connect the wires to the correct phase terminals (U, V, W) of the servo amplifier
and servo motor. Otherwise, the servo motor will operate improperly.
Do not connect AC power supply directly to the servo motor. Otherwise, a fault
may occur.
The connection method differs according to the series and capacity of the servo motor and whether or not
the servo motor has the electromagnetic brake. Perform wiring in accordance with this section.
(1) For grounding, connect the earth cable of the servo motor to the protective earth (PE) terminal of the
servo amplifier and connect the ground cable of the servo amplifier to the earth via the protective
earth of the control box. Do not connect them directly to the protective earth of the control panel.
Control box
Servo
amplifier
Servo motor
PE terminal
(2) Do not share the 24VDC interface power supply between the interface and electromagnetic brake.
Always use the power supply designed exclusively for the electromagnetic brake.
3.8.2 Connection diagram
The following table lists wiring methods according to the servo motor types. Use the connection diagram
which conforms to the servo motor used. For cables required for wiring, refer to Section 13.2.1. For
encoder cable connection, refer to Section 13.1.4. For the signal layouts of the connectors, refer to Section
3.8.3.
For the servo motor connector, refer to Chapter 3 of the Servo Motor Instruction Manual.
3 - 49
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
Servo motor
Connection diagram
Servo amplifier
Servo motor
U (Red)
U
V (White)
V
W (Black)
W
Motor
(Green)
(Note 1)
24VDC
HC-KFS053 (B) to 73 (B)
HC-MFS053 (B) to 73 (B)
HC-UFS13 (B) to 73 (B)
B1
(Note2)
B2
Electromagnetic
brake
EMG
To be shut off when servo
on signal switches off or by
alarm signal
CN2
Encoder
Encoder cable
Note:1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal of the
servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box.
2. This circuit applies to the servo motor with electromagnetic brake.
Servo amplifier
Servo motor
U
U
V
V
W
W
Motor
(Note 1)
HC-SFS121 (B) to 301 (B)
HC-SFS202 (B) 702 (B)
HC-SFS203 (B) 353 (B)
HC-UFS202 (B) to 502 (B)
HC-RFS353 (B) to 503 (B)
24VDC
(Note2)
B1
B2
EMG
To be shut off when servo
on signal switches off or by
alarm signal
Electromagnetic
brake
CN2
Encoder
Encoder cable
Note:1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal of the
servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box.
2. This circuit applies to the servo motor with electromagnetic brake.
Servo amplifier
Servo motor
U
U
V
V
W
W
Motor
(Note 1)
HC-SFS81 (B)
HC-SFS52 (B) to 152 (B)
HC-SFS53 (B) to 153 (B)
HC-RFS103 (B) to 203 (B)
HC-UFS72 (B) 152 (B)
24VDC
(Note2)
B1
B2
EMG
To be shut off when servo
on signal switches off or by
alarm signal
Electromagnetic
brake
CN2
Encoder cable
Encoder
Note:1. To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal of the
servo amplifier to the protective earth (PE) of the control box.
2. This circuit applies to the servo motor with electromagnetic brake.
3 - 50
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.8.3 I/O terminals
(1) HC-KFS HC-MFS HC-UFS3000r/min series
Encoder connector signal arrangement
Power supply lead
4-AWG19 0.3m
Encoder cable 0.3m
With connector 1-172169-9
(AMP make)
Power supply
connector
5557-04R-210
1
3
2
4
Power supply connector (Molex make)
Without electromagnetic brake
5557-04R-210 (receptacle)
5556PBTL (Female terminal)
With electromagnetic brake
5557-06R-210 (receptacle)
5556PBTL (Female terminal)
Pin Signal Lead wire color
1
Red
U
2
V
White
3
Black
W
4 Earth Green/yellow
Power supply
connector
5557-06R-210
3 - 51
1
4
2
5
3
6
1
2
3
MR
MRR
BAT
4
5
6
MD
MDR
7
8
9
P5
LG
SHD
Pin Signal Lead wire color
1
Red
U
2
V
White
3
Black
W
4 Earth Green/yellow
5
B1
6
B2
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(2) HC-SFS HC-RFS HC-UFS2000 r/min series
Servo motor side connectors
Servo motor
Motor plate
For power supply For encoder
(Opposite side)
HC-SFS81(B)
HC-SFS121(B) to 301(B)
HC-SFS203(B)
17PD-B
353(B)
HC-RFS103(B) to 203 (B)
HC-RFS353(B)
503(B)
Encoder connector
Brake connector
MS3102A10SL4P
CE05-2A32-
HC-SFS702(B)
HC-UFS72(B)
shared.
CE05-2A24-
HC-SFS202(B) to 502 (B)
UP
for power is
23PD-B
HC-SFS53(B) to 153(B)
DOWN
The connector
CE05-2A22-
HC-SFS52(B) to 152(B)
152(B)
Power supply connector
HC-UFS202(B) to 502(B)
Electromagnetic
brake connector
17PD-B
MS3102A20-
CE05-2A22-
29P
23PD-B
The connector
CE05-2A24-
for power is
10PD-B
shared.
CE05-2A2223PD-B
CE05-2A24-
MS3102A10SL-
10PD-B
4P
Power supply connector signal arrangement
CE05-2A22-23PD-B
Key
Key
F
G
A
B
H
CE05-2A24-10PD-B
C
E
D
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Signal
U
V
W
(Earth)
A
F
E
B
G
D
C
(Note) B1
(Note) B2
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Signal
U
V
W
(Earth)
(Note) B1
(Note) B2
Note:24VDC,without
polarity
Note:24VDC,without
polarity
Encoder connector signal arrangement
Electromagnetic brake connector signal arrangement
MS3102A20-29P
MS3102A10SL-4P
Key
M
A B
L
T
K
J
N
S
H
G
C
P
D
R
E
F
Pin
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
Signal
MD
MDR
MR
MRR
BAT
LG
Pin
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
Key
Signal
Pin
A
B
SD
A
LG
P5
3 - 52
B
Signal
(Note)B1
(Note)B2
Note:24VDC without
polarity
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.9 Servo motor with electromagnetic brake
Configure the electromagnetic brake operation circuit so that it is activated not only
by the servo amplifier signals but also by an external emergency stop signal.
Contacts must be open when
servo-on signal is off or when an
alarm (trouble) is present and when
an electromagnetic brake signal.
Circuit must be
opened during
emergency stop signal.
Servo motor
CAUTION
RA EMG
24VDC
Electromagnetic brake
The electromagnetic brake is provided for holding purpose and must not be used
for ordinary braking.
POINT
Refer to the Servo Motor Instruction Manual for specifications such as the
power supply capacity and operation delay time of the electromagnetic
brake.
Note the following when the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake is used for applications
requiring a brake to hold the motor shaft (vertical lift applications):
1) Set "
1 " in parameter No.1 to make the electromagnetic brake interlock signal (MBR) valid.
Note that this will make the zero speed signal (ZSP) unavailable.
2) Do not share the 24VDC interface power supply between the interface and electromagnetic
brake. Always use the power supply designed exclusively for the electromagnetic brake.
3) The brake will operate when the power (24VDC) switches off.
4) While the reset signal is on, the base circuit is shut off. When using the servo motor with a
vertical shaft, use the electromagnetic brake interlock signal (MBR).
5) Switch off the servo-on signal after the servo motor has stopped.
(1) Connection diagram
Servo amplifier
RA
VDD
COM
MBR
Emergency
stop
Servo motor
B1
Z
24VDC
RA
B2
(2) Setting
1) Set "
1 " in parameter No.1 to make the electromagnetic brake interlock signal (MBR) valid.
2) Using parameter No. 33 (electromagnetic brake sequence output), set a time delay (Tb) at servo-off
from electromagnetic brake operation to base circuit shut-off as in the timing chart shown in (3) in
this section.
3 - 53
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(3) Timing charts
(a) Servo-on signal command (from controller) ON/OFF
Tb [ms] after the servo-on (SON) signal is switched off, the servo lock is released and the servo
motor coasts. If the electromagnetic brake is made valid in the servo lock status, the brake life may
be shorter. Therefore, when using the electromagnetic brake in a vertical lift application or the
like, set Tb to about the same as the electromagnetic brake operation delay time to prevent a drop.
Coasting
0 r/min
Servo motor speed
Tb
(60ms)
Base circuit
ON
OFF
Electromagnetic
brake (MBR)
Servo-on(SON)
(80ms)
Invalid(ON)
Electromagnetic brake
operation delay time
Valid(OFF)
ON
OFF
(b) Emergency stop signal (EMG) ON/OFF
Servo motor speed
(10ms)
Base circuit
Dynamic brake
Dynamic brake
Electromagnetic brake
Electromagnetic brake
Electromagnetic brake release
(180ms)
ON
OFF
Electromagnetic
brake interlock (MBR)
Invalid (ON)
Valid (OFF)
(180ms)
Electromagnetic brake
operation delay time
Invalid (ON)
Emergency stop (EMG)
Valid (OFF)
3 - 54
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(c) Alarm occurrence
Dynamic brake
Dynamic brake
Electromagnetic brake
Servo motor speed
Electromagnetic brake
(10ms)
Base circuit
ON
OFF
Invalid(ON)
Electromagnetic
brake interlock (MBR)
Valid(OFF)
Electromagnetic brake
operation delay time
No(ON)
Trouble (ALM)
Yes(OFF)
(d) Both main and control circuit power supplies off
(10ms)
(Note)
15 to 100ms
Servo motor speed
Dynamic brake
Dynamic brake
Electromagnetic brake
Electromagnetic brake
ON
Base circuit
OFF
Invalid(ON)
Electromagnetic
brake interlock(MBR) Valid(OFF)
(10ms or less)
Electromagnetic brake
operation delay time
(Note 2)
No(ON)
Trouble (ALM)
Yes(OFF)
Main circuit
ON
power
Control circuit
OFF
Note: Changes with the operating status.
(e) Only main circuit power supply off (control circuit power supply remains on)
(10ms)
(Note 1)
15ms or more
Servo motor speed
Dynamic brake
Dynamic brake
Electromagnetic brake
Electromagnetic brake
ON
Base circuit
OFF
Electromagnetic
brake interlock
(MBR)
10ms or less
Invalid(ON)
Valid(OFF)
No(ON)
Trouble (ALM)
Electromagnetic brake
operation delay time
(Note 2)
Yes(OFF)
ON
Main circuit power
OFF
supply
Note: 1. Changes with the operating status.
2. When the main circuit power supply is off in a motor stop status,
the main circuit off warning (A.E9) occurs and the ALM signal does not turn off.
3 - 55
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.10 Grounding
WARNING
Ground the servo amplifier and servo motor securely.
To prevent an electric shock, always connect the protective earth (PE) terminal of
the servo amplifier with the protective earth (PE) of the control box.
The servo amplifier switches the power transistor on-off to supply power to the servo motor. Depending on
the wiring and ground cablerouting, the servo amplifier may be affected by the switching noise (due to
di/dt and dv/dt) of the transistor. To prevent such a fault, refer to the following diagram and always
ground.
To conform to the EMC Directive, refer to the EMC Installation Guidelines (IB(NA)67310).
Control box
Servo motor
MC
NFB
CN2
L1
Line filter
(Note)
Power supply
3-phase
200 to 230VAC,
1-phase
230VAC or
1-phase
100 to 120VAC
Servo amplifier
Encoder
L2
L3
L11
L21
U
U
V
V
W
W
SM
Programmable
controller
CN1A CN1B
Protective earth(PE)
Note: For 1-phase 230VAC, connect the power supply to L1 L2 and leave L3 open.
There is no L3 for 1-phase 100 to 120VAC power supply.
3 - 56
Ensure to connect it to PE
terminal of the servo amplifier.
Do not connect it directly to
the protective earth of
the control panel.
Outer
box
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
3.11 Servo amplifier terminal block (TE2) wiring method
(1) Termination of the cables
Solid wire: After the sheath has been stripped, the cable can be used as it is. (Cable size: 0.2 to
2.5mm2)
Approx. 10mm
Twisted wire: Use the cable after stripping the sheath and twisting the core. At this time, take care to
avoid a short caused by the loose wires of the core and the adjacent pole. Do not solder
the core as it may cause a contact fault. (Cable size: 0.2 to 2.5mm2)Alternatively, a bar
terminal may be used to put the wires together.(Phoenix contact make)
Bar terminal for 1 cable
(Bar terminal ferrule with insulation sleeve)
Cable size
Bar terminal for 2 cable
(Twin ferrule with insulation sleeve)
Bar terminal type
[mm2]
AWG
0.25
24
Al0.25-6YE
Al0.25-8YE
0.5
20
Al0.5-6WH
Al0.5-8WH
0.75
18
Al0.75-6GY
Al0.75-8GY
Al-TWIN2
Al-TWIN2
0.75-8GY
0.75-10GY
1
18
Al1-6RD
Al1-8RD
Al-TWIN2
Al-TWIN2
1-8RD
1-10RD
1.5
16
Al1.5-6BK
Al1.5-8BK
Al-TWIN2
Al-TWIN2
1.5-8BK
1.5-12BK
2.5
14
Al2.5-8BU
Al2.5-8BU-1000
Al-TWIN2
Al-TWIN2
2.5-10BU
2.5-13BU
For 1 cable
3 - 57
For 2 cables
Crimping
tool
CRIMPFOX-UD6
3. SIGNALS AND WIRING
(2) Connection
Insert the core of the cable into the opening and tighten the screw with a flat-blade screwdriver so that
the cable does not come off. (Tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6N m) Before inserting the cable into the
opening, make sure that the screw of the terminal is fully loose.
When using a cable of 1.5mm2 or less, two cables may be inserted into one opening.
Flat-blade screwdriver
Tip thickness 0.4 to 0.6mm
Overall width 2.5 to 3.5mm
To loosen.
To tighten.
Cable
Opening
Control circuit terminal block
3.12 Instructions for the 3M connector
When fabricating an encoder cable or the like, securely connect the shielded external conductor of the
cable to the ground plate as shown in this section and fix it to the connector shell.
External conductor
Sheath
Core
Sheath
External conductor
Pull back the external conductor to cover the sheath
Strip the sheath.
Screw
Cable
Screw
Ground plate
3 - 58
4. OPERATION
4. OPERATION
4.1 When switching power on for the first time
Before starting operation, check the following:
(1) Wiring
(a) A correct power supply is connected to the power input terminals (L1, L2, L3, L11, L21) of the servo
amplifier.
(b) The servo motor power supply terminals (U, V, W) of the servo amplifier match in phase with the
power input terminals (U, V, W) of the servo motor.
(c) The servo motor power supply terminals (U, V, W) of the servo amplifier are not shorted to the
power input terminals (L1, L2, L3) of the servo motor.
(d) The servo amplifier and servo motor are grounded securely.
(e) Note the following when using the regenerative brake option, brake unit or power return converter:
1) For the MR-J2S-350A or less, the lead has been removed from across D-P of the control circuit
terminal block, and twisted cables are used for its wiring.
2) For the MR-J2S-500A or more, the lead has been removed from across P-C of the servo amplifier
built-in regenerative brake resistor, and twisted cables are used for its wiring.
(f) When stroke end limit switches are used, the signals across LSP-SG and LSN-SG are on during
operation.
(g) 24VDC or higher voltages are not applied to the pins of connectors CN1A and CN1B.
(h) SD and SG of connectors CN1A and CN1B are not shorted.
(i) The wiring cables are free from excessive force.
(2) Environment
Signal cables and power cables are not shorted by wire offcuts, metallic dust or the like.
(3) Machine
(a) The screws in the servo motor installation part and shaft-to-machine connection are tight.
(b) The servo motor and the machine connected with the servo motor can be operated.
4- 1
4. OPERATION
4.2 Startup
WARNING
Do not operate the switches with wet hands. You may get an electric shock.
CAUTION
Before starting operation, check the parameters. Some machines may perform
unexpected operation.
During power-on for some after power-off, do not touch or close a parts (cable etc.)
to the servo amplifier heat sink, regenerative brake resistor, the servo motor, etc.
Their temperatures may be high and you may get burnt or a parts may damaged.
Connect the servo motor with a machine after confirming that the servo motor operates properly alone.
4.2.1 Selection of control mode
Use parameter No. 0 to choose the control mode used. After setting, this parameter is made valid by
switching power off, then on.
4.2.2 Position control mode
(1) Power on
1) Switch off the servo-on (SON) signal.
2) When main circuit power/control circuit power is switched on, the display shows "C (Cumulative
feedback pulses)", and in two second later, shows data.
In the absolute position detection system, first power-on results in the absolute position lost (AL.25)
alarm and the servo system cannot be switched on. This is not a failure and takes place due to the
uncharged capacitor in the encoder.
The alarm can be deactivated by keeping power on for a few minutes in the alarm status and then
switching power off once and on again.
Also in the absolute position detection system, if power is switched on at the servo motor speed of
500r/min or higher, position mismatch may occur due to external force or the like. Power must
therefore be switched on when the servo motor is at a stop.
(2) Test operation 1
Using jog operation in the test operation mode, make sure that the servo motor operates. (Refer to
Section 6.8.2.)
(3) Parameter setting
Set the parameters according to the structure and specifications of the machine. Refer to Chapter 5 for
the parameter definitions and to Sections 6.5 for the setting method.
Parameter No.
0
Name
Control mode, regenerative brake
option selection
Setting
Description
3 0
Position control mode
MR-RB12 regenerative brake option is used.
0 02
Input filter 3.555ms (initial value)
Electromagnetic brake interlock signal is not used.
Used in incremental positioning system.
1
Function selection 1
2
Auto tuning
3
Electronic gear numerator (CMX)
2
Electronic gear numerator
4
Electronic gear denominator (CDV)
1
Electronic gear denominator
1 5
Middle response (initial value) is selected.
Auto tuning mode 1 is selected.
After setting the above parameters, switch power off once. Then switch power on again to make
the set parameter values valid.
4- 2
4. OPERATION
(4) Servo-on
Switch the servo-on in the following procedure:
1) Switch on main circuit/control power supply.
2) Switch on the servo-on signal (SON).
When placed in the servo-on status, the servo amplifier is ready to operate and the servo motor is
locked.
(5) Command pulse input
Entry of a pulse train from the positioning device rotates the servo motor. At first, run it at low speed
and check the rotation direction, etc. If it does not run in the intended direction, check the input
signal.
On the status display, check the speed, command pulse frequency, load factor, etc. of the servo motor.
When machine operation check is over, check automatic operation with the program of the positioning
device.
This servo amplifier has a real-time auto tuning function under model adaptive control. Performing
operation automatically adjusts gains. The optimum tuning results are provided by setting the
response level appropriate for the machine in parameter No. 2. (Refer to chapter 7)
(6) Home position return
Make home position return as required.
(7) Stop
In any of the following statuses, the servo amplifier interrupts and stops the operation of the servo
motor:
Refer to Section 3.9, (2) for the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake. Note that the stop
pattern of stroke end (LSP/LSN) OFF is as described below.
(a) Servo-on (SON) OFF
The base circuit is shut off and the servo motor coasts.
(b) Alarm occurrence
When an alarm occurs, the base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the
servo motor to a sudden stop.
(c) Emergency stop (EMG) OFF
The base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden
stop. Alarm AL.E6 occurs.
(d) Stroke end (LSP/LSN) OFF
The servo motor is brought to a sudden stop and servo-locked. The motor may be run in the
opposite direction.
POINT
A sudden stop indicates that a stop is made with the droop pulses erased.
4- 3
4. OPERATION
4.2.3 Speed control mode
(1) Power on
1) Switch off the servo-on (SON) signal.
2) When main circuit power/control circuit power is switched on, the display shows "r (servo motor
speed)", and in two second later, shows data.
(2) Test operation
Using jog operation in the test operation mode, make sure that the servo motor operates. (Refer to
Section 6.8.2.)
(3) Parameter setting
Set the parameters according to the structure and specifications of the machine. Refer to Chapter 5 for
the parameter definitions and to Sections 6.5 for the setting method.
Parameter No.
Name
0
Control mode, regenerative brake
option selection
1
Function selection 1
2
Auto tuning
8
9
10
11
12
Internal speed command 1
Internal speed command 2
Internal speed command 3
Acceleration time constant
Deceleration time constant
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration
time constant
Setting
Description
0 2
Speed control mode
Regenerative brake option is not used.
12
Input filter 3.555ms (initial value)
Electromagnetic brake interlock signal is used.
1 5
13
1000
1500
2000
1000
500
0
Middle response (initial value) is selected.
Auto tuning mode 1 is selected.
Set 1000r/min.
Set 1500r/min.
Set 2000r/min.
Set 1000ms.
Set 500ms.
Not used
After setting the above parameters, switch power off once. Then switch power on again to make
the set parameter values valid.
(4) Servo-on
Switch the servo-on in the following procedure:
1) Switch on main circuit/control power supply.
2) Switch on the servo-on signal (SON) (short SON-SG).
When placed in the servo-on status, the servo amplifier is ready to operate and the servo motor is
locked.
(5) Start
Using speed selection 1 (SP1) and speed selection 2 (SP2), choose the servo motor speed. Turn on
forward rotation start (ST1) to run the motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction or reverse
rotation start (ST2) to run it in the reverse rotation (CW) direction. At first, set a low speed and check
the rotation direction, etc. If it does not run in the intended direction, check the input signal.
On the status display, check the speed, load factor, etc. of the servo motor.
When machine operation check is over, check automatic operation with the host controller or the like.
This servo amplifier has a real-time auto tuning function under model adaptive control. Performing
operation automatically adjusts gains. The optimum tuning results are provided by setting the
response level appropriate for the machine in parameter No. 2. (Refer to chapter 7)
4- 4
4. OPERATION
(6) Stop
In any of the following statuses, the servo amplifier interrupts and stops the operation of the servo
motor:
Refer to Section 3.9, (2) for the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake. Note that
simultaneous ON or simultaneous OFF of stroke end (LSP, LSN) OFF and forward rotation start
(ST1) or reverse rotation start (ST2) signal has the same stop pattern as described below.
(a) Servo-on (SON) OFF
The base circuit is shut off and the servo motor coasts.
(b) Alarm occurrence
When an alarm occurs, the base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the
servo motor to a sudden stop.
(c) Emergency stop (EMG) OFF
The base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden
stop. Alarm AL.E6 occurs.
(d) Stroke end (LSP/LSN) OFF
The servo motor is brought to a sudden stop and servo-locked. The motor may be run in the
opposite direction.
(e) Simultaneous ON or simultaneous OFF of forward rotation start (ST1) and reverse rotation start
(ST2) signals
The servo motor is decelerated to a stop.
POINT
A sudden stop indicates that a stop is made at the deceleration time
constant of zero.
4.2.4 Torque control mode
(1) Power on
1) Switch off the servo-on (SON) signal.
2) When main circuit power/control circuit power is switched on, the display shows "U (torque
command voltage)", and in two second later, shows data.
(2) Test operation
Using jog operation in the test operation mode, make sure that the servo motor operates. (Refer to
Section 6.8.2.)
(3) Parameter setting
Set the parameters according to the structure and specifications of the machine. Refer to Chapter 5 for
the parameter definitions and to Sections 6.5 for the setting method.
Parameter No.
Name
0
Control mode, regenerative brake
option selection
1
Function selection 1
8
9
10
11
12
Internal speed limit 1
Internal speed limit 2
Internal speed limit 3
Acceleration time constant
Deceleration time constant
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time
constant
Torque command time constant
Internal torque limit 1
13
14
28
Setting
0 4
02
1000
1500
2000
1000
500
0
2000
50
Description
Torque control mode
Regenerative brake option is not used.
Input filter 3.555ms (initial value)
Electromagnetic brake interlock signal is not used.
Set 1000r/min.
Set 1500r/min.
Set 2000r/min.
Set 1000ms.
Set 500ms.
Not used
Set 2000ms
Controlled to 50% output
After setting the above parameters, switch power off once. Then switch power on again to make the set
parameter values valid.
4- 5
4. OPERATION
(4) Servo-on
Switch the servo-on in the following procedure:
1) Switch on main circuit/control power supply.
2) Switch on the servo-on signal (SON) (short SON-SG).
When placed in the servo-on status, the servo amplifier is ready to operate and the servo motor is
locked.
(5) Start
Using speed selection 1 (SP1) and speed selection 2 (SP2), choose the servo motor speed. Turn on
forward rotation select (DI4) to run the motor in the forward rotation (CCW) direction or reverse
rotation select (DI3) to run it in the reverse rotation (CW) direction, generating torque. At first, set a
low speed and check the rotation direction, etc. If it does not run in the intended direction, check the
input signal.
On the status display, check the speed, load factor, etc. of the servo motor.
When machine operation check is over, check automatic operation with the host controller or the like.
(6) Stop
In any of the following statuses, the servo amplifier interrupts and stops the operation of the servo
motor:
Refer to Section 3.9, (2) for the servo motor equipped with electromagnetic brake.
(a) Servo-on (SON) OFF
The base circuit is shut off and the servo motor coasts.
(b) Alarm occurrence
When an alarm occurs, the base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the
servo motor to a sudden stop.
(c) Emergency stop (EMG) OFF
The base circuit is shut off and the dynamic brake is operated to bring the servo motor to a sudden
stop. Alarm AL.E6 occurs.
(d) Simultaneous ON or simultaneous OFF of forward rotation selection (RS1) and reverse rotation
selection (RS2) signals
The servo motor coasts.
POINT
A sudden stop indicates that a stop is made at the deceleration time
constant of zero.
4.3 Multidrop communication
You can use the RS-422 communication function (parameter No.16) to operate two or more servo
amplifiers on the same bus. In this case, set station numbers to the servo amplifiers to recognize the servo
amplifier to which the current data is being sent. Use parameter No. 15 to set the station numbers.
Always set one station number to one servo amplifier. Normal communication cannot be made if the same
station number is set to two or more servo amplifiers.
For details, refer to Chapter 14.
4- 6
5. PARAMETERS
5. PARAMETERS
CAUTION
Never adjust or change the parameter values extremely as it will make operation
instable.
5.1 Parameter list
5.1.1 Parameter write inhibit
POINT
After setting the parameter No. 19 value, switch power off, then on to
make that setting valid.
In the MR-J2S-A servo amplifier, its parameters are classified into the basic parameters (No. 0 to 19),
expansion parameters 1 (No. 20 to 49) and expansion parameters 2 (No.50 to 84) according to their
safety aspects and frequencies of use. In the factory setting condition, the customer can change the
basic parameter values but cannot change the expansion parameter values. When fine adjustment, e.g.
gain adjustment, is required, change the parameter No. 19 setting to make the expansion parameters
write-enabled.
The following table indicates the parameters which are enabled for reference and write by the setting of
parameter No. 19. Operation can be performed for the parameters marked .
Parameter No. 19 setting
Operation
0000
(initial value)
Reference
000A
000B
000C
000E
100B
100C
100E
Basic parameters
No. 0 to No. 19
Write
Reference
No. 19 only
Write
No. 19 only
Reference
Write
Reference
Write
Reference
Write
Reference
Write
No. 19 only
Reference
Write
No. 19 only
Reference
Write
No. 19 only
5- 1
Expansion parameters 1
No. 20 to No. 49
Expansion parameters 2
No. 50 to No. 84
5. PARAMETERS
5.1.2 Lists
POINT
For any parameter whose symbol is preceded by *, set the parameter
value and switch power off once, then switch it on again to make that
parameter setting valid.
The symbols in the control mode column of the table indicate the following
modes:
P : Position control mode
S : Speed control mode
T : Torque control mode
(1) Item list
Basic parameters
No.
Symbol
Name
Control
mode
Initial
value
Unit
0
*STY
Control mode ,regenerative brake option selection
P S T
0000
1
*OP1
Function selection 1
P S T
0002
2
ATU
Auto tuning
P S
0105
3
CMX
Electronic gear numerator
P
1
4
CDV
Electronic gear denominator
P
1
5
INP
In-position range
P
100
pulse
6
PG1
Position loop gain 1
P
35
rad/s
7
PST
Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant
(Smoothing)
P
3
ms
8
SC1
Internal speed command 1
S
100
r/min
Internal speed limit 1
T
100
r/min
Internal speed command 2
S
500
r/min
Internal speed limit 2
T
500
r/min
Internal speed command 3
S
1000
r/min
Internal speed limit 3
T
1000
r/min
9
10
SC2
SC3
11
STA
Acceleration time constant
S T
0
ms
12
STB
Deceleration time constant
S T
0
ms
13
STC
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant
S T
0
ms
14
TQC
Torque command time constant
T
0
ms
15
*SNO
Station number setting
P S T
0
station
16
*BPS
Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear
P S T
0000
17
MOD
Analog monitor output
P S T
0100
18
*DMD Status display selection
P S T
0000
19
*BLK
P S T
0000
Parameter block
5- 2
Customer
setting
5. PARAMETERS
No.
Name
20
*OP2
Function selection 2
21
*OP3
Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection)
22
*OP4
Function selection 4
23
FFC
Feed forward gain
24
ZSP
Zero speed
25
VCM
26
TLC
27
*ENR
28
TL1
29
Expansion parameters 1
Symbol
VCO
Control
mode
Initial
value
P S
0000
P
0000
P S T
0000
Unit
P
0
%
P S T
50
r/min
Analog speed command maximum speed
S
(Note1)0 (r/min)
Analog speed limit maximum speed
T
(Note1)0 (r/min)
Analog torque command maximum output
T
100
%
Encoder output pulses
P S T
4000
pulse
/rev
Internal torque limit 1
P S T
100
%
Analog speed command offset
S
(Note2)
mV
Analog speed limit offset
T
(Note2)
mV
Analog torque command offset
T
0
mV
30
TLO
S
0
mV
31
MO1
Analog monitor 1 offset
P S T
0
mV
32
MO2
Analog monitor 2 offset
P S T
0
mV
33
MBR
Electromagnetic brake sequence output
P S T
100
ms
70
0.1
times
34
GD2
Analog torque limit offset
Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment
P S
35
PG2
Position loop gain 2
P
35
rad/s
36
VG1
Speed loop gain 1
P S
177
rad/s
37
VG2
Speed loop gain 2
P S
817
rad/s
38
VIC
Speed integral compensation
P S
48
ms
39
VDC
Speed differential compensation
P S
980
40
For manufacturer setting
0
41
*DIA
Input signal automatic ON selection
P S T
0000
42
*DI1
Input signal selection 1
P S T
0003
43
*DI2
Input signal selection 2 (CN1B-5)
P S T
0111
44
*DI3
Input signal selection 3 (CN1B-14)
P S T
0222
45
*DI4
Input signal selection 4 (CN1A-8)
P S T
0665
46
*DI5
Input signal selection 5 (CN1B-7)
P S T
0770
47
*DI6
Input signal selection 6 (CN1B-8)
P S T
0883
48
*DI7
Input signal selection 7 (CN1B-9)
P S T
0994
49
*DO1
Output signal selection 1
P S T
0000
For notes, refer to next page.
5- 3
Customer
setting
5. PARAMETERS
No.
Symbol
50
51
For manufacturer setting
Initial
value
Function selection 6
53
*OP8
Function selection 8
P S T
P S T
54
*OP9
Function selection 9
P S T
0000
55
*OPA
Function selection A
P
0000
56
SIC
For manufacturer setting
57
Unit
0000
*OP6
52
Expansion parameters 2
Control
mode
Name
0000
0000
Serial communication time-out selection
P S T
For manufacturer setting
0000
0
s
10
58
NH1
Machine resonance suppression filter 1
P S T
0000
59
NH2
Machine resonance suppression filter 2
P S T
0000
60
LPF
Low-pass filter, adaptive vibration suppression control
P S T
0000
61
GD2B
Ratio of load inertia moment to Servo motor inertia moment 2
P S
70
0.1
times
62
PG2B
Position control gain 2 changing ratio
P
100
%
63
VG2B
Speed control gain 2 changing ratio
P S
100
%
64
VICB
Speed integral compensation changing ratio
P S
100
%
65
*CDP
Gain changing selection
P S
0000
66
CDS
Gain changing condition
P S
10
(Note3)
67
CDT
Gain changing time constant
P S
1
ms
68
For manufacturer setting
0
69
CMX2
Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2
P
1
70
CMX3
Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3
P
1
71
CMX4
Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4
P
1
Internal speed command 4
S
Internal speed limit 4
T
72
SC4
73
SC5
74
SC6
75
SC7
76
TL2
77
Internal speed command 5
S
Internal speed limit 5
T
Internal speed command 6
S
Internal speed limit 6
T
Internal speed command 7
S
Internal speed limit 7
T
Internal torque limit 2
P S T
200
r/min
300
r/min
500
r/min
800
r/min
100
%
100
For manufacturer setting
78
10000
79
10
80
10
81
100
82
100
83
100
84
0
Note 1. The setting of "0" provides the rated servo motor speed.
2. Depends on the servo amplifier.
3. Depends on the parameter No. 65 setting.
5- 4
Customer
setting
5. PARAMETERS
(2) Details list
Class
No. Symbol
0
*STY
Name and function
Control mode, regenerative brake option selection
Used to select the control mode and regenerative brake option.
0
Initial
value
0000
Unit
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to
P S T
Name
and
0
function
column.
Select the control mode.
0:Position
1:Position and speed
2:Speed
3:Speed and torque
4:Torque
5:Torque and position
Basic parameters
Selection of regenerative brake option
0:Not used
1:FR-RC, FR-BU
2:MR-RB032
3:MR-RB12
4:MR-RB32
5:MR-RB30
6:MR-RB50
8:MR-RB31
9:MR-RB51
POINT
Wrong setting may cause the regenerative brake option to burn.
If the regenerative brake option selected is not for use with the
servo amplifier, parameter error (AL.37) occurs.
1
*OP1
Function selection 1
Used to select the input signal filter, pin CN1B-19 function and
absolute position detection system.
0002
Refer to
Name
and
function
0
column.
Input signal filter
If external input signal causes chattering
due to noise, etc., input filter is used to
suppress it.
0:None
1:1.777[ms]
2:3.555[ms]
3:5.333[ms]
CN1B-pin 19's function selection
0:Zero Speed detection signal
1:Electromagnetic brake interlock signal
Selection of absolute position detection system
(Refer to Chapter 15)
0: Used in incremental system
1: Used in absolute position detection system
5- 5
P S T
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
2
ATU
Name and function
Auto tuning
Used to selection the response level, etc. for execution of auto tuning.
Refer to Chapter 7.
0
Initial
value
0105
Unit
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to
P S
Name
and
function
0
column.
Auto tuning response level setting
Set
value
Response
level
Low
response
Machine resonance
frequency guideline
Basic parameters
1
15Hz
2
20Hz
25Hz
3
4
30Hz
35Hz
5
6
45Hz
7
55Hz
Middle
8
70Hz
response
85Hz
9
A
105Hz
B
130Hz
C
160Hz
200Hz
D
High
E
240Hz
response
F
300Hz
If the machine hunts or generates
large gear sound, decrease the
set value.
To improve performance, e.g.
shorten the settling time, increase
the set value.
Gain adjustment mode selection
(For more information, refer to Section 7.1.1.)
Set
Description
Gain adjustment mode
value
Interpolation mode
Fixes position control gain 1
0
(parameter No. 6).
Auto tuning mode 1
Ordinary auto tuning.
1
Auto tuning mode 2
2
Fixes the load inertia moment
ratio set in parameter No. 34.
Response level setting can be
changed.
3
Manual mode 1
Simple manual adjustment.
Manual mode 2
4
Manual adjustment of all gains.
3
CMX
Electronic gear numerator
Used to set the electronic gear numerator value.
For the setting, refer to Section 5.2.1.
Setting "0" automatically sets the resolution of the servo motor
connected.
For the HC-MFS series, 131072 pulses are set for example.
1
0
1
to
65535
P
4
CDV
Electronic gear denominator
Used to set the electronic gear denominator value.
For the setting, refer to Section 5.2.1.
1
1
to
65535
P
5- 6
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
5
INP
6
PG1
7
PST
Name and function
In-position range
Used to set the in-position signal (INP) output range in the command
pulse increments prior to electronic gear calculation.
For example, when you want to set 10 m in the conditions that the
ballscrew is direct coupled, the lead is 10mm, and the feedback
pulses are 8192 pulses/rev (parameter No. 6 : 1), set "8" as indicated
by the following expression:
10
10
6
10
10
3
8192
8.192
Setting Control
range
mode
Initial
value
Unit
100
pulse
0
to
10000
P
35
red/s
4
to
2000
P
3
ms
0
to
20000
P
100
r/min
0 to
instantaneous
permissible
speed
S
8
Position loop gain 1
Used to set the gain of position loop.
Increase the gain to improve trackability in response to the position
command.
When auto turning mode 1,2 is selected, the result of auto turning is
automatically used.
Position command acceleration/deceleration time constant
(position smoothing)
Used to set the time constant of a low pass filter in response to the
position command.
You can use parameter No. 55 to choose the primary delay or linear
acceleration/deceleration control system. When you choose linear
acceleration/deceleration, the setting range is 0 to 10ms. Setting of
longer than 10ms is recognized as 10ms.
Basic parameters
POINT
When you have chosen linear acceleration/deceleration, do not
select control selection (parameter No. 0) and restart after
instantaneous power failure (parameter No. 20). Doing so will
cause the servo motor to make a sudden stop at the time of
position control switching or restart.
Example: When a command is given from a synchronizing detector,
synchronous operation can be started smoothly if started during line
operation.
Synchronizing
detector
Start
Servo motor
Servo amplifier
Without time
constant setting
Servo motor
speed
Start
8
SC1
With time
constant setting
ON
OFF
t
Internal speed command 1
Used to set speed 1 of internal speed commands.
Internal speed limit 1
Used to set speed 1 of internal speed limits.
5- 7
T
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
9
SC2
Initial
value
500
Name and function
Internal speed command 2
Used to set speed 2 of internal speed commands.
Internal speed limit 2
Used to set speed 2 of internal speed limits.
10
SC3
Internal speed command 3
Used to set speed 3 of internal speed commands.
1000
Internal speed limit 3
Used to set speed 3 of internal speed limits.
11
STA
Acceleration time constant
Used to set the acceleration time required to reach the rated speed
from 0r/min in response to the analog speed command and internal
speed commands 1 to 7.
If the preset speed command is
lower than the rated speed,
Speed
acceleration/deceleration time
Rated
will be shorter.
speed
0
Setting Control
range
mode
r/min
S
0 to
Unit
instantaneous
permissible
speed
r/min
0 to
instantaneous
permissible
speed
T
S
T
ms
0
to
20000
S T
ms
0
to
1000
S T
12
STB
13
STC
Time
Parameter
Parameter
No.11 setting
No.12 setting
For example for the servo motor of 3000r/min rated speed, set 3000
(3s) to increase speed from 0r/min to 1000r/min in 1 second.
Deceleration time constant
Used to set the deceleration time required to reach 0r/min from the
rated speed in response to the analog speed command and internal
speed commands 1 to 7.
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant
Used to smooth start/stop of the servo motor.
Set the time of the arc part for S-pattern acceleration/deceleration.
Speed command
Speed
Servo motor
Basic parameters
Zero
speed
0r/min
STC
Time
STA
STC
STC STB STC
STA: Acceleration time constant (parameter No.11)
STB: Deceleration time constant (parameter No.12)
STC: S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant (parameter No.13)
Long setting of STA (acceleration time constant) or STB (deceleration time
constant) may produce an error in the time of the arc part for the setting of the
S-pattern acceleration/deceleration time constant.
The upper limit value of the actual arc part time is limited by
2000000
2000000
for acceleration or by
for deceleration.
STA
STB
(Example) At the setting of STA 20000, STB 5000 and STC 200,
the actual arc part times are as follows:
Limited to 100[ms] since
2000000
During acceleration: 100[ms]
100[ms] 200[ms].
20000
200[ms] as set since
During deceleration: 200[ms]
2000000
5000
400[ms] 200[ms].
5- 8
0
0
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
14
TQC
Name and function
Torque command time constant
Used to set the constant of a low pass filter in response to the torque
command.
Torque command
Torque
Setting Control
range
mode
Initial
value
Unit
0
ms
0
to
20000
T
station
0
to
31
P S T
Refer to
P S T
After
filtered
TQC
TQC
Time
Basic parameters
TQC: Torque command time constant
15
*SNO
Station number setting
Used to specify the station number for serial communication.
Always set one station to one axis of servo amplifier. If one station
number is set to two or more stations, normal communication cannot
be made.
0
16
*BPS
Serial communication function selection, alarm history clear
Used to select the serial communication baudrate, select various
communication conditions, and clear the alarm history.
0000
Name
and
function
column.
Serial baudrate selection
0: 9600 [bps]
1: 19200[bps]
2: 38400[bps]
3: 57600[bps]
Alarm history clear
0: Invalid
1: Valid
When alarm history clear is made valid,
the alarm history is cleared at next power-on.
After the alarm history is cleared, the setting
is automatically made invalid (reset to 0).
Serial communication standard selection
0: RS-232C used
1: RS-485 used
Serial communication response delay time
0: Invalid
1: Valid, reply sent after delay time of 800 s or more
5- 9
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
17
MOD
Analog monitor output
Used to selection the signal provided to the analog monitor output.
(Refer to Section 5.3)
0
0100
Unit
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to
Name
and
function
0
Setting
column.
Analog monitor output selection
ch2
Basic parameters
Initial
value
Name and function
ch1
0
Servo motor speed ( 8V/max. speed)
1
Torque ( 8V/max. torque)
2
Motor speed ( 8V/max. speed)
3
Torque ( 8V/max. torque)
4
Current command ( 8V/max. current command)
5
Command pulse frequency ( 10V/500kpulse/s)
6
Droop pulses
( 10V/128 pulses)
7
Droop pulses
( 10V/2048 pulses)
8
Droop pulses
( 10V/8192 pulses)
9
Droop pulses ( 10V/32768 pulses)
A
Droop pulses ( 10V/131072 pulses)
B
Bus voltage ( 8V/400V)
5 - 10
P S T
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
18
Initial
value
Name and function
*DMD Status display selection
Used to select the status display shown at power-on.
Unit
0000
Refer to
P S T
Name
and
0 0
Basic parameters
Setting Control
range
mode
function
Selection of status display at
power-on
0: Cumulative feedback pulses
1: Servo motor speed
2: Droop pulses
3: Cumulative command pulses
4: Command pulse frequency
5: Analog speed command voltage
(Note 1)
6: Analog torque command voltage
(Note 2)
7: Regenerative load ratio
8: Effective load ratio
9: Peak load ratio
A: Instantaneous torque
B: Within one-revolution position low
C: Within one-revolution position high
D: ABS counter
E: Load inertia moment ratio
F: Bus voltage
column.
Note: 1. In speed control mode. Analog
speed limit voltage in torque
control mode.
2. In torque control mode. Analog
torque limit voltage in speed or
position control mode.
Status display at power-on in
corresponding control mode
0: Depends on the control mode.
Control Mode
Status display at power-on
Position
Cumulative feedback pulses
Position/speed
Cumulative feedback pulses/servo motor speed
Speed
Servo motor speed
Speed/torque
Servo motor speed/analog torque command voltage
Torque
Analog torque command voltage
Torque/position
Analog torque command voltage/cumulative feedback pulses
1: Depends on the first digit setting of this parameter.
5 - 11
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
19
*BLK
Name and function
Parameter block
Used to select the reference and write ranges of the parameters.
Operation can be performed for the parameters marked .
Set
value
Operation
Basic parameters
0000
(Initial
value)
000B
000C
000E
100B
100C
100E
20
*OP2
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to P S T
Name
and
function
column.
Expansion
Expansion
parameters 1 parameters 2
No. 20
No. 50
to No. 49
to No. 84
Write
No. 19 only
No. 19 only
No. 19 only
No. 19 only
No. 19 only
Function selection 2
Used to select restart after instantaneous power failure,
servo lock at a stop in speed control mode, and slight vibration
suppression control.
0000
Refer to
Name
and
function
column.
0
Expansion parameters 1
Unit
Reference
Reference
Write
Reference
Write
Reference
Write
Reference
Write
Reference
Write
Reference
Write
Reference
Write
000A
Basic
parameters
No. 0
to No. 19
Initial
value
0000
Restart after instantaneous
power failure
If the input power supply voltage
had reduced in the speed control
mode to stop the servo motor due
to the undervoltage alarm (AL.10)
but the supply voltage has returned to normal, the servo motor can
be restarted by merely switching
on the start signal without resetting the alarm.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
S
Stop-time servo lock selection
The shaft can be servo-locked to
remain still at a stop in the speed
control mode.
0: Valid
1: Invalid
Slight vibration suppression control
Made valid when auto tuning selection is
set to "0400" in parameter No. 2.
Used to suppress vibration at a stop.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
5 - 12
P
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
21
*OP3
Initial
value
Name and function
Function selection 3 (Command pulse selection)
Used to select the input form of the pulse train input signal.
(Refer to Section 3.4.1.)
0000
Unit
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to
P
Name
and
function
0 0
column.
Command pulse train input form
0: Forward/reverse rotation pulse train
1: Signed pulse train
2: A/B phase pulse train
Pulse train logic selection
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Expansion parameters 1
22
*OP4
Function selection 4
Used to select stop processing at LSP/LSN signal off and choose
VC/VLA voltage averaging.
0
0000
Refer to
Name
and
function
0
column.
How to make a stop when LSP/LSN
signal is valid. (Refer to Section 5.2.3.)
0: Sudden stop
1: Slow stop
VC/VLA voltage averaging
Used to set the filtering time when the
analog speed command (VC) voltage
or analog speed limit (VLA) is imported.
Set 0 to vary the speed to voltage fluctuation in real time. Increase the set value
to vary the speed slower to voltage fluctuation.
Set value
Filtering time [ms]
0
0
1
0.444
2
0.888
3
1.777
4
3.555
5 - 13
P S
P S T
5. PARAMETERS
No. Symbol
23
FFC
24
ZSP
25
VCM
26
TLC
27
*ENR
Expansion parameters 1
Class
Name and function
Feed forward gain
Used to set the feed forward gain.
At the setting of 100%, droop pulses during constant-speed operation
will be almost “zero”.
Note that sudden acceleration/deceleration will increase overshoot.
As a guideline, set 1s or more as the acceleration/deceleration time
constant to the rated speed when the feed forward gain is set to
100%.
Zero speed
Used to set the output range of the zero speed signal (ZSP).
Analog speed command maximum speed
Used to set the speed at the maximum input voltage (10V) of the
analog speed command (VC).
Set "0" to select the rated speed of the servo motor connected.
Analog speed limit maximum speed
Used to set the speed at the maximum input voltage (10V) of the
analog speed limit (VLA).
Set "0" to select the rated speed of the servo motor connected.
Analog torque command maximum output
Used to set the output torque at the analog torque command voltage
(TC
8V) of 8V on the assumption that the maximum torque is
100[%]. For example, set 50 to output (maximum torque
50/100) at
the TC of 8V.
Encoder output pulses
Used to set the encoder pulses (A-phase, B-phase) output by the
servo amplifier.
Set the value 4 times greater than the A-phase or B-phase pulses.
You can use parameter No. 54 to choose the output pulse setting or
output division ratio setting.
The number of A/B-phase pulses actually output is 1/4 times greater
than the preset number of pulses.
The maximum output frequency is 1.3Mpps (after multiplication by
4). Use this parameter within this range.
For output pulse designation
Set " 0
" (initial value) in parameter No. 54.
Set the number of pulses per servo motor revolution.
Output pulse set value [pulses/rev]
At the setting of 5600, for example, the actually output A/B-phase
pulses are as indicated below:
5600
A B-phase output pulses
1400[pulse]
4
For output division ratio setting
Set "1
"in parameter No. 54.
The number of pulses per servo motor revolution is divided by the
set value.
Resolution per servo motor revolution
Output pulse
[pulses/rev]
Set value
At the setting of 8, for example, the actually output A/B-phase
pulses are as indicated below:
A B-phase output pulses
28
TL1
131072
8
1
4
Initial
value
0
50
Unit
%
r/min
0
r/min
0
r/min
Setting Control
range
mode
0
P
to
100
0
to
10000
0
1
to
50000
0
1
to
50000
0
to
1000
P S T
S
T
100
%
T
4000
pulse/
rev
1
to
65535
P S T
100
%
0
to
100
P S T
4096[pulse]
Internal torque limit 1
Set this parameter to limit servo motor-generated torque on the
assumption that the maximum torque is 100[%].
When 0 is set, torque is not produced.
(Note)
Torque limit
TL
0
Internal torque limit 1 (Parameter No. 28)
1
Analog torque limit internal torque limit 1
: Analog torque limit
Analog torque limit internal torque limit 1
: Internal torque limit 1
Note.0 :TL-SG off (open)
1 :TL-SG on(short)
When torque is output in analog monitor output, this set value is the
maximum output voltage ( 8V). (Refer to Section 3.4.1, (5))
5 - 14
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
29
Expansion parameters 1
30
VCO
TLO
31
MO1
32
MO2
33
MBR
34
GD2
35
PG2
36
VG1
37
VG2
38
VIC
Name and function
Initial
value
Unit
Analog speed command offset
Depends
mV
Used to set the offset voltage of the analog speed command (VC).
on servo
For example, if CCW rotation is provided by switching on forward amplifier
rotation start (ST1) with 0V applied to VC, set a negative value.
When automatic VC offset is used, the automatically offset value is
set to this parameter. (Refer to Section6.3.)
The initial value is the value provided by the automatic VC offset
function before shipment at the VC-LG voltage of 0V.
Analog speed limit offset
Used to set the offset voltage of the analog speed limit (VLA).
For example, if CCW rotation is provided by switching on forward
rotation selection (RS1) with 0V applied to VLA, set a negative value.
When automatic VC offset is used, the automatically offset value is
set to this parameter. (Refer to Section6.3.)
The initial value is the value provided by the automatic VC offset
function before shipment at the VLA-LG voltage of 0V.
Analog torque command offset
0
mV
Used to set the offset voltage of the analog torque command (TC).
Analog torque limit offset
Used to set the offset voltage of the analog torque limit (TLA).
Analog monitor 1 offset
0
mV
Used to set the offset voltage of the analog monitor ch1 output (MO1).
Analog monitor 2 offset
0
mV
Used to set the offset voltage of the analog monitor ch2 output (MO2).
100
ms
Electromagnetic brake sequence output
Used to set the delay time (Tb) between electronic brake interlock
signal (MBR) and the base drive circuit is shut-off.
70
0.1
Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment
times
Used to set the ratio of the load inertia moment to the servo motor
shaft inertia moment. When auto tuning mode 1 and interpolation
mode is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used.
(Refer to section 7.1.1)
In this case, it varies between 0 and 1000.
35
rad/s
Position loop gain 2
Used to set the gain of the position loop.
Set this parameter to increase the position response to level load
disturbance. Higher setting increases the response level but is liable
to generate vibration and/or noise.
When auto tuning mode 1,2 and interpolation mode is selected, the
result of auto tuning is automatically used.
177
rad/s
Speed loop gain 1
Normally this parameter setting need not be changed.
Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate
vibration and/or noise.
When auto tuning mode 1 2, manual mode and interpolation mode
is selected, the result of auto tuning is automatically used.
Speed loop gain 2
817
rad/s
Set this parameter when vibration occurs on machines of low rigidity
or large backlash. Higher setting increases the response level but is
liable to generate vibration and/or noise.
When auto tuning mode 1 2 and interpolation mode is selected, the
result of auto tuning is automatically used.
Speed integral compensation
48
ms
Used to set the integral time constant of the speed loop.
Higher setting increases the response level but is liable to generate
vibration and/or noise.
When auto tuning mode 1 2 and interpolation mode is selected, the
result of auto tuning is automatically used.
5 - 15
Setting Control
range
mode
999
to
999
S
T
999
to
999
999
to 999
999
to 999
0
to
1000
0
to
3000
T
S
P S T
P S T
P S T
P S
1
to
1000
P
20
to
8000
P S
20
to
20000
P S
1
to
1000
P S
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
39
VDC
40
41
Name and function
Speed differential compensation
Used to set the differential compensation.
Made valid when the proportion control signal is switched on.
For manufacturer setting
Must not be changed.
*DIA
Initial
value
980
Unit
Setting Control
range
mode
0
to
1000
P S
Refer to
P S T
0
Input signal automatic ON selection
Used to set automatic ON of SON, LSP and LSN.
0000
Name
and
0
function
column.
Servo-on signal (SON) input selection
0: Switched on/off by external input.
1: Switched on automatically in servo
amplifier.
(No need of external wiring)
Expansion parameters 1
Forward rotation stroke end signal
(LSP) input selection
0: Switched on/off by external input.
1: Switched on automatically in servo
amplifier.
(No need of external wiring)
P S
Reverse rotation stroke end signal (LSN)
input selection
0: Switched on/off by external input.
1: Switched on automatically in servo
amplifier.
(No need of external wiring)
42
*DI1
Input signal selection 1
Used to assign the control mode changing signal input pins and to set
the clear signal.
0003
Refer to
Name
and
function
0 0
column.
Control change signal (LOP) input pin assignment
Used to set the control mode
change signal input connector
pins. Note that this parameter is
made valid when parameter No.
0 is set to select the position/speed, speed/torque or torque/position change mode.
Set value
Connector pin No.
0
CN1B-5
1
CN1B-14
2
CN1A-8
3
CN1B-7
4
CN1B-8
5
CN1B-9
Clear signal (CR) selection
0: Droop pulses are cleared on the
leading edge.
1: While on, droop pulses are always cleared.
5 - 16
P/S
S/T
T/P
P S T
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
43
*DI2
Initial
value
Name and function
Input signal selection 2 (CN1B-5)
This parameter is unavailable when parameter No.42 is set to assign
the control change signal (LOP) to CN1B-pin 5.
Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1B-pin 5.
Note that the setting digit and assigned signal differ according to the
control mode.
0111
Unit
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to
P S T
Name
and
function
column.
0
Position
control mode Input signals of
Speed control
CN1B-pin 5
mode
selected.
Torque control mode
Signals that may be assigned in each control mode are indicated
below by their symbols.
Setting of any other signal will be invalid.
Set value
(Note) Control mode
P
S
T
Expansion parameters 1
0
1
SON
SON
SON
2
RES
RES
RES
3
PC
PC
4
TL
TL
5
CR
CR
CR
6
SP1
SP1
7
SP2
SP2
8
ST1
RS2
9
ST2
RS1
SP3
SP3
A
B
CM1
C
CM2
D
TL1
TL1
TL1
E
CDP
CDP
CDP
Note: P: Position control mode
S: Speed control mode
T: Torque control mode
44
*DI3
Input signal selection 3 (CN1B-14)
Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1B-pin 14.
The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input
signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43).
0222
Refer to
Name
and
function
column.
0
Position
control mode
Speed control
mode
Torque control mode
Input signals of
CN1B-pin 14
selected.
This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to
assign the control change signal (LOP) to CN1B-pin 14.
5 - 17
P S T
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
45
*DI4
Name and function
Input signal selection 4 (CN1A-8)
Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1A-pin 8.
The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input
signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43).
Initial
value
0665
function
Input signals of
CN1A-pin 8
selected.
This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to
assign the control change signal (LOP) to CN1 A-pin 8.
Input signal selection 5 (CN1B-7)
Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1B-pin 7.
The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input
signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43).
0770
and
function
Expansion parameters 1
Input signals of
CN1B-pin 7
selected.
This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to
assign the control change signal (LOP) to CN1 B-pin 7.
Input signal selection 6 (CN1B-8)
Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1B-pin 8.
The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input
signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43).
0883
Refer to
P S T
Name
and
function
column.
Position
control mode
Speed control
mode
Torque control mode
*DI7
P S T
Name
0
48
Refer to
column.
Position
control mode
Speed control
mode
Torque control mode
*DI6
P S T
and
0
47
Refer to
column.
Position
control mode
Speed control
mode
Torque control mode
*DI5
Setting Control
range
mode
Name
0
46
Unit
Input signals of
CN1B-pin 8
selected.
This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to
assign the control change signal (LOP) to CN1B-pin 8.
When "Used in absolute position detection system" is selected in
parameter No. 1, CN1B-pin 8 is in the ABS transfer mode (ABSM).
(Refer to Section 15.5.)
Input signal selection 7 (CN1B-9)
Allows any input signal to be assigned to CN1B-pin 9.
The assignable signals and setting method are the same as in input
signal selection 2 (parameter No. 43).
0994
Refer to
Name
and
function
column.
0
Position
control mode
Speed control
mode
Torque control mode
Input signals of
CN1B-pin 9
selected.
This parameter is unavailable when parameter No. 42 is set to
assign the control change signal (LOP) to CN1B-pin 9.
When "Used in absolute position detection system" is selected in
parameter No. 1, CN1B-pin 9 is in the ABS request mode (ABSR).
(Refer to Section 15.5.)
5 - 18
P S T
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
49
*DO1
Initial
value
Name and function
Output signal selection 1
Used to select the connector pins to output the alarm code, warning
(WNG) and battery warning (BWNG).
Setting
range
Control
mode
Refer to
P S T
Name
and
function
0
column.
Setting of alarm code output
Connector pins
Set value
CN1B-19
CN1A-18
CN1A-19
0
ZSP
INP or SA
RD
Alarm code is output at alarm occurrence.
1
(Note) Alarm code
Alarm
CN1B CN1A CN1A
display
pin 19 pin 18 pin 19
0
Expansion parameters 1
0000
Unit
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Name
88888
Watchdog
AL.12
Memory error 1
AL.13
Clock error
AL.15
Memory error 2
AL.17
Board error 2
AL.19
Memory error 3
AL.37
Parameter error
AL.8A
Serial communication time-out error
AL.8E
Serial communication error
AL.30
Regenerative error
AL.33
Overvoltage
AL.10
Undervoltage
AL.45
Main circuit device overheat
AL.46
Servo motor overheat
AL.50
Overload 1
AL.51
Overload 2
AL.24
Main circuit
AL.32
Overcurrent
AL.31
Overspeed
AL.35
Command pulse frequency error
AL.52
Error excessive
AL.16
Encoder error 1
AL.1A
Motor combination error
AL.20
Encoder error 2
AL.25
Absolute position erase
Note: 0:Pin-SG off (open)
1:Pin-SG on (short)
Setting of warning (WNG) output
Select the connector pin to output warning.
The old signal before selection will be unavailable.
Set value
Connector pin No.
0
Not output.
1
CN1A-19
2
CN1B-18
3
CN1A-18
4
CN1B-19
5
CN1B-6
Setting of battery warning (BWNG) output
Select the connector pin to output battery warning.
The old signal before selection will be unavailable.
Set this function as in the second digit of this
parameter.
Parameter No. 1 setting has priority.
5 - 19
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
50
51
*OP6
Initial
value
Name and function
For manufacturer setting
Must not be changed.
0000
Function selection 6
Used to select the operation to be performed when the alarm reset
signal switches on.
0000
0
Unit
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to
P S T
Name
and
function
0 0
column.
Operation to be performed when the
alarm reset signal switches on
0: Base circuit not switched off
1: Base circuit switched off
52
53
*OP8
For manufacturer setting
Must not be changed.
0000
Function selection 8
Used to select the protocol of serial communication.
0000
0
Refer to
P S T
Name
and
0
function
Expansion parameters 2
column.
Protocol checksum selection
0: Yes (checksum added)
1: No (checksum not added)
Protocol checksum selection
0: With station numbers
1: No station numbers
54
*OP9
Function selection 9
Use to select the command pulse rotation direction, encoder output
pulse direction and encoder pulse output setting.
Name
and
column.
Servo motor rotation direction changing
Changes the servo motor rotation
direction for the input pulse train.
Set value
Servo motor rotation direction
At forward rotation
At reverse rotation
pulse input (Note)
pulse input (Note)
0
CCW
CW
1
CW
CCW
Note. Refer to Section 3.4.1, (1), (a).
Encoder pulse output phase changing
Changes the phases of A, B-phase encoder pulses output .
Servo motor rotation direction
Set value
1
Refer to
function
0
0
0000
CCW
CW
A phase
A phase
B phase
B phase
A phase
A phase
B phase
B phase
Encoder output pulse setting selection (refer to parameter No. 27)
0: Output pulse setting
1: Division ratio setting
5 - 20
P S T
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
55
*OPA
Initial
value
Name and function
Function selection A
Used to select the position command acceleration/deceleration time
constant (parameter No. 7) control system.
0 0
Unit
0000
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to
P
Name
and
function
0
column.
Position command acceleration/deceleration
time constant control
0: Primary delay
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration
56
SIC
57
58
NH1
Serial communication time-out selection
Used to set the communication protocol time-out period in [s].
When you set "0", time-out check is not made.
0
For manufacturer setting
Must not be changed.
10
Machine resonance suppression filter 1
Used to selection the machine resonance suppression filter.
(Refer to Section 8.1.)
0
s
0000
P S T
1 to 60
Refer to
P S T
Name
and
function
0
column.
Expansion parameters 2
Notch frequency selection
Set "00" when you have set adaptive vibration
suppression control to be "valid" or "held"
(parameter No. 60: 1
or 2
).
Setting Frequency Setting Frequency Setting Frequency Setting Frequency
value
value
value
value
00
Invalid
08
562.5
10
281.3
18
187.5
01
4500
09
500
11
264.7
19
180
02
2250
0A
450
12
250
1A
173.1
03
1500
0B
409.1
13
236.8
1B
166.7
04
1125
0C
375
14
225
1C
160.1
05
900
0D
346.2
15
214.3
1D
155.2
06
750
0E
321.4
16
204.5
1E
150
07
642.9
0F
300
17
195.7
1F
145.2
Notch depth selection
59
NH2
Setting
value
Depth
Gain
0
Deep
40dB
1
to
14dB
2
3
Shallow
8dB
4dB
Machine resonance suppression filter 2
Used to set the machine resonance suppression filter.
0000
Refer to
Name
and
0
function
column.
Notch frequency
Same setting as in parameter No. 58
However, you need not set "00" if you have
set adaptive vibration suppression control to
be "valid" or "held".
Notch depth
Same setting as in parameter No. 58
5 - 21
P S T
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
60
LPF
Name and function
Low-pass filter/adaptive vibration suppression control
Used to selection the low-pass filter and adaptive vibration
suppression control. (Refer to Chapter 8.)
Initial
value
Unit
0000
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to
P S T
Name
and
function
0
column.
Low-pass filter selection
0: Valid (Automatic adjustment)
1: Invalid
VG2 setting 10
When you choose "valid",
2 (1 GD2 setting 0.1) [Hz]
bandwidth filter is set automatically.
Expansion parameters 2
Adaptive vibration suppression control selection
Choosing "valid" or "held" in adaptive vibration
suppression control selection makes the machine
resonance control filter 1 (parameter No. 58) invalid.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Machine resonance frequency is always detected
and the filter is generated in response to resonance to
suppress machine vibration.
2: Held
The characteristics of the filter generated so far are held,
and detection of machine resonance is stopped.
Adaptive vibration suppression control sensitivity selection
Used to set the sensitivity of machine resonance detection.
0: Normal
1: Large sensitivity
61
GD2B Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2
Used to set the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia
moment when gain changing is valid.
70
0.1
times
0
to
3000
P S
62
PG2B
Position control gain 2 changing ratio
Used to set the ratio of changing the position control gain 2 when
gain changing is valid.
Made valid when auto tuning is invalid.
100
%
10
to
200
P
63
VG2B
Speed control gain 2 changing ratio
Used to set the ratio of changing the speed control gain 2 when gain
changing is valid.
Made valid when auto tuning is invalid.
100
%
10
to
200
P S
64
VICB
Speed integral compensation changing ratio
Used to set the ratio of changing the speed integral compensation
when gain changing is valid. Made valid when auto tuning is invalid.
100
%
50
to
1000
P S
5 - 22
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
65
*CDP
Name and function
Gain changing selection
Used to select the gain changing condition. (Refer to Section 8.3.)
Initial
value
Unit
0000
Setting Control
range
mode
Refer to
P S
Name
and
0 0 0
function
column.
Expansion parameters 2
Gain changing selection
Gains are changed in accordance with the settings
of parameters No. 61 to 64 under any of the following
conditions:
0: Invalid
1: Gain changing (CDP) signal is ON
2: Command frequency is equal to higher than
parameter No. 66 setting
3: Droop pulse value is equal to higher than
parameter No. 66 setting
4: Servo motor speed is equal to higher than
parameter No. 66 setting
66
CDS
Gain changing condition
Used to set the value of gain changing condition (command
frequency, droop pulses, servo motor speed) selected in parameter
No. 65.The set value unit changes with the changing condition item.
(Refer to Section 8.3.)
10
kpps
pulse
r/min
10
to
9999
P S
67
CDT
Gain changing time constant
Used to set the time constant at which the gains will change in
response to the conditions set in parameters No. 65 and 66.
(Refer to Section 8.3.)
1
ms
0
to
100
P S
For manufacturer setting
Must not be changed.
0
68
69
CMX2 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 2
Used to set the multiplier for the command pulse.
Setting "0" automatically sets the connected motor resolution.
1
0 1
to
65535
P
70
CMX3 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 3
Used to set the multiplier for the command pulse.
Setting "0" automatically sets the connected motor resolution.
1
0 1
to
65535
P
71
CMX4 Command pulse multiplying factor numerator 4
Used to set the multiplier for the command pulse.
Setting "0" automatically sets the connected motor resolution.
1
0 1
to
65535
P
r/min 0 to instantaneous
permissible
speed
S
72
SC4
Internal speed command 4
Used to set speed 4 of internal speed commands.
Internal speed limit 4
Used to set speed 4 of internal speed limits.
5 - 23
200
T
5. PARAMETERS
Class
No. Symbol
73
SC5
Name and function
Internal speed command 5
Used to set speed 5 of internal speed commands.
Initial
value
300
Internal speed limit 5
Used to set speed 5 of internal speed limits.
74
SC6
Internal speed command 6
Used to set speed 6 of internal speed commands.
500
Internal speed limit 6
Used to set speed 6 of internal speed limits.
Expansion parameters 2
75
SC7
Internal speed command 7
Used to set speed 7 of internal speed commands.
800
Setting Control
range
mode
r/min 0 to inS
stantaneous
permiT
ssible
speed
r/min 0 to inS
stantaneous
permiT
ssible
speed
Unit
r/min
Internal speed limit 7
Used to set speed 7 of internal speed limits.
76
77
78
TL2
Internal torque limit 2
Set this parameter to limit servo motor torque on the assumption
that the maximum torque is 100[%].
When 0 is set, torque is not produced.
When torque is output in analog monitor output, this set value is the
maximum output voltage ( 8V). (Refer to Section 3.4.1, (5))
For manufacturer setting
Must not be changed.
100
00
10000
79
10
80
10
81
100
82
100
83
100
84
0
5 - 24
%
0 to instantaneous
permissible
speed
0
to
100
S
T
P S T
5. PARAMETERS
5.2 Detailed description
5.2.1 Electronic gear
CAUTION
Wrong setting can lead to unexpected fast rotation, causing injury.
POINT
1
CMX
500.
50
CDV
If the set value is outside this range, noise may be generated during
acceleration/ deceleration or operation may not be performed at the preset
speed and/or acceleration/deceleration time constants.
The following specification symbols are required to calculate the electronic
gear.
The guideline of the electronic gear setting range is
CMX
CDV
Input pulse train
(1) Concept of electronic gear
The machine can be moved at any multiplication factor to input pulses.
Parameter No.3
Parameter No.4
Motor
CMX
CDV
Deviation
counter
Feedback pulse
Electronic gear
Encoder
The following setting examples are used to explain how to calculate the electronic gear:
POINT
The following specification symbols are required to calculate the electronic
gear
Pb : Ballscrew lead [mm]
n : Reduction ratio
Pt : Servo motor resolution [pulses/rev]
0: Travel per command pulse [mm/pulse]
S : Travel per servo motor revolution [mm/rev]
: Angle per pulse [ /pulse]
: Angle per revolution [ /rev]
(a) For motion in increments of 10 m per pulse
n
n NL/NM
1/2
NL
Machine specifications
Ballscrew lead Pb 10 [mm]
Reduction ratio: n 1/2
Servo motor resolution: Pt 131072 [pulses/rev]
CMX
CDV
0
Pt
S
0
Pt
n Pb
10 10
3
131072
1/2 10
Hence, set 32768 to CMX and 125 to CDV.
5 - 25
Pb 10[mm]
NM
Servo motor
131072 [pulse/rev]
262144
1000
32768
125
5. PARAMETERS
(b) Conveyor setting example
For rotation in increments of 0.01 per pulse
Servo motor
131072 [pulse/rev]
Machine specifications
Table
Table : 360 /rev
Reduction ratio: n 4/64
Servo motor resolution: Pt
Pt
CMX
CDV
0.01
131072 [pulses/rev]
131072
4/64 360
Timing belt : 4/64
65536
................................................................................. (5.2)
1125
Since CMX is not within the setting range in this status, it must be reduced to the lowest term.
When CMX has been reduced to a value within the setting range, round off the value to the
nearest unit.
26214.4
26214
CMX 65536
1125
450
450
CDV
Hence, set 26214 to CMX and 450 to CDV.
POINT
For unlimited one-way rotation, e.g. an index table, indexing positions will
be missed due to cumulative error produced by rounding off.
For example, entering a command of 36000 pulses in the above example
causes the table to rotate only:
26214
1
4
36000
360
359.995
450
131072 64
Therefore, indexing cannot be done in the same position on the table.
(2) Instructions for reduction
The calculated value before reduction must be as near as possible to the calculated value after
reduction.
In the case of (1), (b) in this section, an error will be smaller if reduction is made to provide no fraction
for CDV. The fraction of Expression (5.1) before reduction is calculated as follows.
CMX
CDV
65536
1125
58.25422.................................................................................................................... (5.2)
The result of reduction to provide no fraction for CMX is as follows.
CMX
CDV
65536
1125
32768
562.5
32768
563
58.20249 .................................................................................... (5.3)
The result of reduction to provide no fraction for CDV is as follows.
CMX
CDV
65536
1125
26214.4
450
26214
450
58.25333 .................................................................................. (5.4)
As a result, it is understood that the value nearer to the calculation result of Expression (5.2) is the
result of Expression (5.4). Accordingly, the set values of (1), (b) in this section are CMX 26214,
CDV 450.
5 - 26
5. PARAMETERS
(3) Setting for use of AD75P
The AD75P also has the following electronic gear parameters. Normally, the servo amplifier side
electronic gear must also be set due to the restriction on the command pulse frequency (differential
400kpulse/s, open collector 200kpulse/s).
AP: Number of pulses per motor revolution
AL: Moving distance per motor revolution
AM: Unit scale factor
AP75P
Command
value
Servo amplifier
Control
unit
AL
AP
AM
Electronic gear
Command
pulse
CMX
CDV
Electronic gear
Deviation
counter
Feedback pulse
Servo motor
The resolution of the servo motor is 131072 pulses/rev. For example, the pulse command needed to
rotate the servo motor is as follows
Servo motor speed [r/min]
Required pulse command
2000
131072
2000/60 4369066 pulse/s
3000
131072
3000/60 6553600 pulse/s
For the AD75P, the maximum value of the pulse command that may be output is 200kpulse/s in the
open collector system or 400kpulse/s in the differential line driver system. Hence, either of the servo
motor speeds exceeds the maximum output pulse command of the AD75P.
Use the electronic gear of the servo amplifier to run the servo motor under the maximum output pulse
command of the AD75P.
5 - 27
5. PARAMETERS
To rotate the servo motor at 3000r/min in the open collector system (200kpulse/s), set the electronic
gear as follows
f
CMX
CDV
f
:
N0 :
Pt :
200
N0
60
pt
Input pulses [pulse/s]
Servo motor speed [r/min]
Servo motor resolution [pulse/rev]
CMX
CDV
3000
131072
60
CMX
CDV
3000
60
131072
200
3000 131072
60 200000
4096
125
The following table indicates the electronic gear setting example (ballscrew lead
AD75P is used in this way.
Rated servo motor speed
3000r/min
Open
collector
Input system
Servo amplifier
10mm) when the
Max. input pulse frequency [kpulse/s]
200
Feedback pulse/revolution [pulse/rev]
2000r/min
Differential
line driver
500
Open
collector
200
131072
Electronic gear (CMX/CDV)
Differential
line driver
500
131072
4096/125
2048/125
8192/375
4096/375
Command pulse frequency [kpulse/s] (Note)
200
400
200
400
Number of pulses per servo motor revolution as
viewed from AD75P[pulse/rev]
4000
10000
6000
15000
AP
1
1
1
1
AL
1
1
1
1
AM
1
1
1
1
AP
4000
10000
6000
15000
AL
1000
1000
1000
1000
AM
10
10
10
10
Minimum command unit
1pulse
AD75P
Electronic gear
Minimum command unit
0.1 m
Note: Command pulse frequency at rated speed
5 - 28
5. PARAMETERS
5.2.2 Analog output
The servo status can be output to two channels in terms of voltage. Use this function when using an
ammeter to monitor the servo status or synchronizing the torque/speed with the other servo.
(1) Setting
Change the following digits of parameter No.17:
Parameter No. 17
0
0
Analog monitor ch1 output selection
(Signal output to across MO1-LG)
Analog monitor ch2 output selection
(Signal output to across MO2-LG)
Parameters No.31 and 32 can be used to set the offset voltages to the analog output voltages. The setting
range is between 999 and 999mV.
Parameter No.
Description
31
Used to set the offset voltage for the analog monitor ch1 output.
32
Used to set the offset voltage for the analog monitor ch2 output.
5 - 29
Setting range [mV]
999 to 999
5. PARAMETERS
(2) Set content
The servo amplifier is factory-set to output the motor speed to ch1 and the torque to ch2. The setting
can be changed as listed below by changing the parameter No.17 value:
Refer to Appendix 2 for the measurement point.
Setting
0
Output item
Motor speed
Description
Setting
6
CCW direction
8[V]
Output item
Droop pulses
( 10V/128pulse)
Description
10[V]
CCW direction
128[pulse]
Max. speed
0
0 Max. speed
8[V]
1
Torque
8[V]
Driving in CCW direction
7
Droop pulses
( 10V/2048pulse)
10[V]
0 2048[pulse]
0 Max. torque
2
CCW direction
2048[pulse]
Max. torque
Driving in CW direction
10[V]
CW direction
CW direction
128[pulse]
8[V]
Motor speed
8
CW
direction 8[V]
10[V]
CW direction
CCW
direction
Droop pulses
( 10V/8192pulse)
10[V]
CCW direction
8192[pulse]
0 8192[pulse]
Max. speed
0 Max. speed
10[V]
CW direction
3
Torque
9
Driving in
CW direction 8[V]
Driving in
CCW direction
Droop pulses
( 10V/32768pulse)
10[V]
CCW direction
32768[pulse]
0 32768[pulse]
Max. torque
0 Max. torque
10[V]
CW direction
4
5
Current command
(Torque command)
Command pulse
frequency
8[V] CCW direction
Max. command
current
(Max. torque
command)
0 Max. command
current
(Max. torque
command)
8[V]
CW direction
A
10[V]
CCW direction
131072[pulse]
0
CW direction
B
CCW direction
10[V]
Droop pulses
( 10V/131072pulse)
131072[pulse]
10[V]
Bus voltage
8[V]
500kpps
0
500kpps
0
10[V]
CW direction
5 - 30
400[V]
Command
pulse
Command
pulse frequency
Droop pulse
Position
control
Speed
command
Differential
Motor speed
Speed
control
Current
command
Torque
Current
control
5 - 31
Encoder
M Servo Motor
Position feedback
Current feedback
PWM
Current
encoder
Bus voltage
5. PARAMETERS
(3) Analog monitor block diagram
5. PARAMETERS
5.2.3 Using forward/reverse rotation stroke end to change the stopping pattern
The stopping pattern is factory-set to make a sudden stop when the forward/reverse rotation stroke end is
made valid. A slow stop can be made by changing the parameter No. 22 value.
Parameter No.22 Setting
0
(initial value)
Stopping method
Sudden stop
Position control mode
: Motor stops with droop pulses cleared.
Speed control mode
: Motor stops at deceleration time constant of zero.
Slow stop
Position control mode
: The motor is decelerated to a stop in accordance with the
1
parameter No. 7 value.
Speed control mode
: The motor is decelerated to a stop in accordance with the
parameter No. 12 value.
5.2.4 Alarm history clear
The servo amplifier stores one current alarm and five past alarms from when its power is switched on
first. To control alarms which will occur during operation, clear the alarm history using parameter No.16
before starting operation.
Clearing the alarm history automatically returns to "
0 ".
After setting, this parameter is made valid by switch power from OFF to ON.
Parameter No.16
Alarm history clear
0: Invalid (not cleared)
1: Valid (cleared)
5 - 32
5. PARAMETERS
5.2.5 Position smoothing
By setting the position command acceleration/deceleration time constant (parameter No.7), you can run
the servo motor smoothly in response to a sudden position command.
The following diagrams show the operation patterns of the servo motor in response to a position command
when you have set the position command acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Choose the primary delay or linear acceleration/deceleration in parameter No. 55 according to the
machine used.
(1) For step input
Command
: Input position command
t
t
: Position command after
filtering for primary delay
: Position command after filtering
for linear acceleration/deceleration
: Position command acceleration/
deceleration time constant (parameter No. 7)
t
Time
(3t)
(2) For trapezoidal input
(3t)
t
: Input position command
Command
: Position command after filtering
for linear acceleration/deceleration
: Position command after
filtering for primary delay
t
t
(3t)
5 - 33
Time
: Position command acceleration/
deceleration time constant
(parameter No. 7)
5. PARAMETERS
MEMO
5 - 34
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.1 Display flowchart
Use the display (5-digit, 7-segment LED) on the front panel of the servo amplifier for status display,
parameter setting, etc. Set the parameters before operation, diagnose an alarm, confirm external
sequences, and/or confirm the operation status. Press the "MODE" "UP" or "DOWN" button once to move
to the next screen.
To refer to or set the expansion parameters, make them valid with parameter No. 19 (parameter write
disable).
button
MODE
Status display
Diagnosis
Alarm
Basic
parameters
Expansion
parameters 1
Expansion
parameters 2
(Note)
Cumulative feedback
pulses [pulse]
Sequence
Current alarm
Parameter No. 0
Parameter No. 20
Parameter No. 50
Motor speed
[r/min]
External I/O
signal display
Last alarm
Parameter No. 1
Parameter No. 21
Parameter No. 51
Droop pulses
[pulse]
Output signal
forced output
Second alarm in past
Cumulative command
pulses [pulse]
Test operation
Jog feed
Third alarm in past
Command pulse
frequency [kpps]
Test operation
Positioning operation
Fourth alarm in past
Parameter No. 18
Parameter No. 48
Parameter No. 83
Speed command voltage
Speed limit voltage[mV]
Test operation
Motor-less operation
Fifth alarm in past
Parameter No. 19
Parameter No. 49
Parameter No. 84
Torque limit voltage
Torque command voltage
[mV]
Test operation
Machine analyzer operation
Sixth alarm in past
Regenerative load
ratio [%]
Software version L
Parameter error No.
Effective load ratio
[%]
Software version H
Peak load ratio
[%]
Automatic VC offset
Instantaneous torque
[%]
Motor series ID
Within one-revolution
position low [pulse]
Motor type ID
Within one-revolution
position, high [100 pulses]
Encoder ID
UP
DOWN
ABS counter
[rev]
Load inertia moment
ratio [times]
Bus voltage [V]
Note: The initial status display at power-on depends on the control mode.
Position control mode: Cumulative feedback pulses(C), Speed control mode: Motor speed(r),
Torque control mode: Torque command voltage(U)
Also, parameter No. 18 can be used to change the initial indication of the status display at power-on.
6- 1
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.2 Status display
The servo status during operation is shown on the 5-digit, 7-segment LED display. Press the "UP" or
"DOWN" button to change display data as desired. When the required data is selected, the corresponding
symbol appears. Press the "SET" button to display its data. At only power-on, however, data appears after
the symbol of the status display selected in parameter No. 18 has been shown for 2[s].
The servo amplifier display shows the lower five digits of 16 data items such as the motor speed.
6.2.1 Display examples
The following table lists display examples:
Item
Displayed data
Status
Servo amplifier display
Forward rotation at 3000r/min
Motor speed
Reverse rotation at 3000r/min
Reverse rotation is indicated by " ".
Load inertia
moment
15.5 times
11252pulse
Multirevolution
counter
12566pulse
Lit
Negative value is indicated by the lit decimal points in the upper four
digits.
6- 2
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.2.2 Status display list
The following table lists the servo statuses that may be shown:
Refer to Appendix 2 for the measurement point.
Name
Symbol
Unit
Description
Cumulative feedback
pulses
C
pulse
Servo motor speed
r
r/min
Feedback pulses from the servo motor encoder are counted and
displayed. The value in excess of 99999 is counted, bus since the
servo amplifier display is five digits, it shows the lower five digits of
the actual value. Press the "SET" button to reset the display value to
zero.
Reverse rotation is indicated by the lit decimal points in the upper
four digits.
The servo motor speed is displayed.
The value rounded off is displayed in 0.1r/min.
Droop pulses
E
pulse
Cumulative command
pulses
P
pulse
Command pulse
frequency
n
kpps
Analog speed
command voltage
Analog speed limit
voltage
Analog torque
command voltage
Analog torque limit
voltage
F
V
U
V
The number of droop pulses in the deviation counter is displayed.
When the servo motor is rotating in the reverse direction, the
decimal points in the upper four digits are lit.
Since the servo amplifier display is five digits, it shows the lower five
digits of the actual value.
The number of pulses displayed is not yet multiplied by the electronic
gear.
The position command input pulses are counted and displayed.
As the value displayed is not yet multiplied by the electronic gear
(CMX/CDV), it may not match the indication of the cumulative
feedback pulses.
The value in excess of 99999 is counted, but since the servo
amplifier display is five digits, it shows the lower five digits of the
actual value. Press the "SET" button to reset the display value to
zero. When the servo motor is rotating in the reverse direction, the
decimal points in the upper four digits are lit.
The frequency of the position command input pulses is displayed.
The value displayed is not multiplied by the electronic gear
(CMX/CDV).
(1) Torque control mode
Analog speed limit (VLA) voltage is displayed.
(2) Speed control mode
Analog speed command (VC) voltage is displayed.
(1) Position control mode, speed control mode
Analog torque limit (TLA) voltage is displayed.
(2) Torque control mode
Analog torque command (TLA) voltage is displayed.
Regenerative load
ratio
L
%
The ratio of regenerative power to permissible regenerative power is
displayed in %.
Effective load ratio
J
%
The continuous effective load torque is displayed.
The effective value is displayed relative to the rated torque of 100%.
Peak load ratio
b
%
Instantaneous torque
T
%
Cy1
pulse
The maximum torque generated during acceleration/deceleration, etc.
The highest value in the past 15 seconds is displayed relative to the
rated torque of 100%.
Torque that occurred instantaneously is displayed.
The value of the torque that occurred is displayed in real time
relative to the rate torque of 100%.
Position within one revolution is displayed in encoder pulses.
The value returns to 0 when it exceeds the maximum number of
pulses.
The value is incremented in the CCW direction of rotation.
Within one-revolution
position low
6- 3
Display
range
99999
to
99999
5400
to
5400
99999
to
99999
99999
to
99999
800
to
800
10.00
to
10.00
0
to
10V
10
to
10V
0
to
100
0
to
300
0
to
400
0
to
400
0
to
99999
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Display
range
Name
Symbol
Unit
Description
Within one-revolution
position high
Cy2
100
pulse
The within one-revolution position is displayed in 100 pulse
increments of the encoder.
The value returns to 0 when it exceeds the maximum number of
pulses.
The value is incremented in the CCW direction of rotation.
0
to
1310
ABS counter
LS
rev
Travel value from the home position in the absolute position
detection systems is displayed in terms of the absolute position
detectors counter value.
32768
to
32767
Load inertia moment
ratio
dC
0.1
Times
The estimated ratio of the load inertia moment to the servo motor
shaft inertia moment is displayed.
0.0
to
300.0
Bus voltage
Pn
V
The voltage (across P-N) of the main circuit converter is displayed.
0
to
450
6.2.3 Changing the status display screen
The status display item of the servo amplifier display shown at power-on can be changed by changing the
parameter No. 18 settings.
The item displayed in the initial status changes with the control mode as follows:
Control mode
Status display at power-on
Position
Cumulative feedback pulses
Position/speed
Cumulative feedback pulses/servo motor speed
Speed
Servo motor speed
Speed/torque
Servo motor speed/analog torque command voltage
Torque
Analog torque command voltage
Torque/position Analog torque command voltage/cumulative feedback pulses
6- 4
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.3 Diagnostic mode
Name
Display
Description
Not ready.
Indicates that the servo amplifier is being initialized or an alarm
has occurred.
Sequence
Ready.
Indicates that the servo was switched on after completion of
initialization and the servo amplifier is ready to operate.
External I/O signal
display
Indicates the ON-OFF states of the external I/O signals.
The upper segments correspond to the input signals and the
lower segments to the output signals.
Lit: ON
Extinguished: OFF
The I/O signals can be changed using parameters No. 43 to 49.
Output signal (DO)
forced output
The digital output signal can be forced on/off. For more
information, refer to section 6.7.
Refer to section 6.6.
Jog feed
Positioning
operation
Test
operation
mode
Motorless
operation
Machine
analyzer
operation
Jog operation can be performed when there is no command from
the external command device.
For details, refer to section 6.8.2.
The servo configuration software (MRZJW3-SETUP121E) is
required for positioning operation. This operation cannot be
performed from the operation section of the servo amplifier.
Positioning operation can be performed once when there is no
command from the external command device.
Without connection of the servo motor, the servo amplifier
provides output signals and displays the status as if the servo
motor is running actually in response to the external input
signal.
For details, refer to section 6.8.4.
Merely connecting the servo amplifier allows the resonance point
of the mechanical system to be measured.
The servo configuration software (MRZJW3-SETUP121E or later)
is required for machine analyzer operation.
Software version Low
Indicates the version of the software.
Software version High
Indicates the system number of the software.
Automatic VC offset
If offset voltages in the analog circuits inside and outside the
servo amplifier cause the servo motor to rotate slowly at the
analog speed command (VC) or analog speed limit (VLA) of 0V,
this function automatically makes zero-adjustment of offset
voltages.
When using this function, make it valid in the following
procedure. Making it valid causes the parameter No. 29 value to
be the automatically adjusted offset voltage.
1) Press "SET" once.
2) Set the number in the first digit to 1 with "UP"/"DOWN".
3) Press "SET".
You cannot use this function if the input voltage of VC or VLA
is 0.4V or more.
6- 5
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
Name
Display
Description
Motor series
Press the "SET" button to show the motor series ID of the servo
motor currently connected.
For indication details, refer to the optional MELSERVO Servo
Motor Instruction Manual.
Motor type
Press the "SET" button to show the motor type ID of the servo
motor currently connected.
For indication details, refer to the optional MELSERVO Servo
Motor Instruction Manual.
Encoder
Press the "SET" button to show the encoder ID of the servo motor
currently connected.
For indication details, refer to the optional MELSERVO Servo
Motor Instruction Manual.
6- 6
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.4 Alarm mode
The current alarm, past alarm history and parameter error are displayed. The lower 2 digits on the
display indicate the alarm number that has occurred or the parameter number in error. Display examples
are shown below.
Name
Display
Description
Indicates no occurrence of an alarm.
Current alarm
Indicates the occurrence of overvoltage (AL.33).
Flickers at occurrence of the alarm.
Indicates that the last alarm is overload 1 (AL.50).
Indicates that the second alarm in the past is overvoltage (AL.33).
Indicates that the third alarm in the past is undervoltage (AL.10).
Alarm history
Indicates that the fourth alarm in the past is overspeed (AL.31).
Indicates that there is no fifth alarm in the past.
Indicates that there is no sixth alarm in the past.
Indicates no occurrence of parameter error (AL.37).
Parameter error
Indicates that the data of parameter No. 1 is faulty.
Functions at occurrence of an alarm
(1) Any mode screen displays the current alarm.
(2) The other screen is visible during occurrence of an alarm. At this time, the decimal point in the fourth
digit flickers.
(3) For any alarm, remove its cause and clear it in any of the following methods (for clearable alarms,
refer to Section 10.2.1):
(a) Switch power OFF, then ON.
(b) Press the "SET" button on the current alarm screen.
(c) Turn on the alarm reset (RES) signal.
(4) Use parameter No. 16 to clear the alarm history.
(5) Pressing "SET" on the alarm history display screen for 2s or longer shows the following detailed
information display screen. Note that this is provided for maintenance by the manufacturer.
(6) Press "UP" or "DOWN" to move to the next history.
6- 7
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.5 Parameter mode
The parameters whose abbreviations are marked* are made valid by changing the setting and then
switching power off once and switching it on again. Refer to Section 5.1.2.
(1) Operation example
The following example shows the operation procedure performed after power-on to change the control
mode (parameter No. 0) to the speed control mode.
Using the "MODE" button, show the basic parameter screen.
The parameter number is displayed.
Press
UP
or
DOWN
to change the number.
Press SET twice.
The set value of the specified parameter number flickers.
Press UP once.
During flickering, the set value can be changed.
Use
(
or
.
UP DOWN
2: Speed control mode)
Press SET to enter.
/
To shift to the next parameter, press the UP DOWN button.
When changing the parameter No. 0 setting, change its set value, then switch power off once and
switch it on again to make the new value valid.
(2) Expansion parameters
To use the expansion parameters, change the setting of parameter No. 19 (parameter write disable).
Refer to section 5.1.1.
6- 8
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.6 External I/O signal display
The ON/OFF states of the digital I/O signals connected to the servo amplifier can be confirmed.
(1) Operation
Call the display screen shown after power-on.
Using the "MODE" button, show the diagnostic screen.
Press UP once.
External I/O signal display screen
(2) Display definition
CN1B CN1B
15
9
CN1B CN1B
8
7
CN1A CN1B
14
8
CN1B CN1B
5
17
CN1B
16
CN1A
14
CN1B
18
CN1B CN1B
4
6
CN1B CN1A
18
19
CN1A
19
Input signals
Always lit
Output signals
Lit: ON
Extinguished: OFF
The 7-segment LED shown above indicates ON/OFF.
Each segment at top indicates the input signal and each segment at bottom indicates the output signal.
The signals corresponding to the pins in the respective control modes are indicated below:
6- 9
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
(a) Control modes and I/O signals
Connector
(Note 2) Symbols of I/O signals in control modes
Signal
input/output
(Note 1) I/O
Pin No.
P
P/S
S
S/T
T
T/P
Related
parameter
CR
CR/SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1
SP1/CR
No.43 to 48
OP
OP
OP
/INP
No.49
RD
RD
No.49
8
I
14
O
OP
OP
OP
18
O
INP
INP/SA
SA
19
O
RD
RD
RD
(Note 3) 4
O
DO1
DO1
DO1
DO1
DO1
DO1
5
I
SON
SON
SON
SON
SON
SON
6
O
TLC
7
I
8
I
9
I
14
CN1A
CN1B
SA/
RD
No.43 to 48
TLC
TLC
TLC/VLC
VLC
VLC/TLC
No.49
LOP
SP2
LOP
SP2
LOP
No.43 to 48
PC
PC/ST1
ST1
ST1/RS2
RS2
RS2/PC
No.43 to 48
TL
TL/ST2
ST2
ST2/RS1
RS1
RS1/TL
No.43 to 48
I
RES
RES
RES
RES
RES
RES
No.43 to 48
15
I
EMG
EMG
EMG
EMG
EMG
EMG
16
I
LSP
LSP
LSP
LSP/
/LSP
17
I
LSN
LSN
LSN
LSN/
/LSN
18
O
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
ALM
19
O
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
No.49
No.1
49
Note: 1. I: Input signal, O: Output signal
2. P: Position control mode, S: Speed control mode, T: Torque control mode, P/S: Position/speed control change mode, S/T:
Speed/torque control change mode, T/P: Torque/position control change mode
3. The signal of CN1A-18 is always output.
(b) Symbol and signal names
Symbol
Signal name
Symbol
Signal name
SON
Servo-on
EMG
Emergency stop
LSP
Forward rotation stroke end
LOP
Control change
LSN
Reverse rotation stroke end
TLC
Limiting torque
CR
Clear
VLC
Limiting speed
SP1
Speed selection 1
RD
Ready
SP2
Speed selection 2
ZSP
Zero speed
PC
Proportion control
INP
In position
ST1
Forward rotation start
SA
Speed reached
ST2
Reverse rotation start
ALM
Trouble
RS1
Forward rotation selection
WNG
Warning
RS2
Reverse rotation selection
OP
Encoder Z-phase pulse (open collector)
TL
Torque limit
BWNG
Battery warning
RES
Reset
6 - 10
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
(3) Default signal indications
(a) Position control mode
EMG(CN 1 B-15) Emergency stop
TL (CN 1 B-9) Torque limit
PC (CN 1 B-8) Proportional control
CR (CN 1 A-8) Clear
RES (CN 1 B-14) Reset
SON(CN 1 B-5) Servo-on
LSN (CN 1 B-17) Reverse rotation stroke end
Input signals
Output signals
LSP (CN 1 B-16) Forward rotation stroke end
Lit: ON
Extinguished:OFF
RD (CN 1 A-19) Ready
LNP (CN 1 A-18) In position
ZSP (CN 1 B-19) Zero speed
TLC (CN 1 B-6) Limiting torque
DO1 (CN 1 B-4) In position
ALM (CN 1 B-18) Trouble
OP (CN 1 A-14) Encoder Z-phase pulse
(b) Speed control mode
EMG(CN 1 B-15) Emergency stop
ST2 (CN 1 B-9) Reverse rotation start
ST1 (CN 1 B-8) For ward rotation start
SP2 (CN 1 B-7) Speed selection 2
SP1 (CN 1 A-8) Speed selection 1
RES (CN 1 B-14) Reset
SON (CN 1 B-5) Servo-on
LSN (CN 1 B-17) External emergency stop
LSP (CN 1 B-16) Forward rotation stroke end
Lit: ON
Extinguished: OFF
Input signals
Output signals
RD (CN 1 A-19) Ready
SA (CN 1 A-18) Limiting speed
ZSP (CN 1 B-19) Zero speed
TLC (CN 1 B-6) Limiting torque
DO1 (CN 1 B-4) Limiting speed
ALM (CN 1 B-18) Trouble
OP (CN 1 A-14) Encoder Z-phase pulse
(c) Torque control mode
EMG(CN 1 B-15) Emergency stop
RS1 (CN 1 B-9) Forward rotation selection
RS2 (CN 1 B-8) Reverse rotation selection
SP2 (CN 1 B-7) Speed selection 2
SP1 (CN 1 A-8) Speed selection 1
RES (CN 1 B-14) Reset
SON (CN 1 B-5) Servo-on
Input signals
Output signals
Lit: ON
Extinguished: OFF
RD (CN 1 A-19) Ready
ZSP (CN 1 B-19) Zero speed
VLC (CN 1 B-6) Speed reached
ALM (CN 1 B-18) Trouble
OP (CN 1 A-14) Encoder Z-phase pulse
6 - 11
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.7 Output signal (DO) forced output
POINT
When the servo system is used in a vertical lift application, turning on the
electromagnetic brake interlock signal after assigning it to pin CN1B-19
will release the electromagnetic brake, causing a drop. Take drop
preventive measures on the machine side.
The output signal can be forced on/off independently of the servo status. This function is used for output
signal wiring check, etc. This operation must be performed in the servo off state (SON signal off).
Operation
Call the display screen shown after power-on.
Using the "MODE" button, show the diagnostic screen.
Press UP twice.
Press SET for more than 2 seconds.
CN1A
14
CN1B CN1B CN1B CN1B CN1A CN1A
18
4
6
19
18
19
Switch on/off the signal below the lit segment.
Always lit
Indicates the ON/OFF of the output signal. The correspondences
between segments and signals are as in the output signals of the
external I/O signal display.
(Lit: ON, extinguished: OFF)
Press MODE once.
The segment above CN1A-pin 18 is lit.
Press UP once.
CN1A-pin 18 is switched on.
(CN1A-pin 18-SG conduct.)
Press DOWN once.
CN1A-pin 18 is switched off.
Press SET for more than 2 seconds.
6 - 12
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.8 Test operation mode
CAUTION
The test operation mode is designed to confirm servo operation and not to confirm
machine operation. In this mode, do not use the servo motor with the machine.
Always use the servo motor alone.
If any operational fault has occurred, stop operation using the forced stop (EMG)
signal.
POINT
The test operation mode cannot be used in the absolute position detection
system. Use it after choosing "Incremental system" in parameter No. 1.
The servo configuration software is required to perform positioning
operation.
Test operation cannot be performed if the servo-on (SON) signal is not
turned OFF.
6.8.1 Mode change
Call the display screen shown after power-on. Choose jog operation/motor-less operation in the following
procedure. Using the "MODE" button, show the diagnostic screen.
Press UP three times.
Press UP five times.
Press SET for more
than 2s.
When this screen
appears, jog feed can
be performed.
Flickers in the test operation mode.
Press SET for more than 2s.
6 - 13
When this screen is displayed,
motor-less operation can be
performed.
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.8.2 Jog operation
Jog operation can be performed when there is no command from the external command device.
(1) Operation
Connect EMG-SG to start jog operation and connect VDD-COM to use the internal power supply.
Hold down the "UP" or "DOWN" button to run the servo motor. Release it to stop. When using the
servo configuration software, you can change the operation conditions. The initial conditions and
setting ranges for operation are listed below:
Item
Initial setting
Setting range
Speed [r/min]
200
0 to instantaneous permissible speed
Acceleration/deceleration time constant [ms]
1000
0 to 50000
How to use the buttons is explained below:
Button
"UP"
"DOWN"
Description
Press to start CCW rotation.
Release to stop.
Press to start CW rotation.
Release to stop.
If the communication cable is disconnected during jog operation performed by using the servo
configuration software, the servo motor will be decelerated to a stop.
(2) Status display
You can confirm the servo status during jog operation.
Pressing the "MODE" button in the jog operation-ready status calls the status display screen. With
this screen being shown, perform jog operation with the "UP" or "DOWN" button. Every time you
press the "MODE" button, the next status display screen appears, and on completion of a screen cycle,
pressing that button returns to the jog operation-ready status screen. For full information of the status
display, refer to Section 6.2. In the test operation mode, you cannot use the "UP" and "DOWN" buttons
to change the status display screen from one to another.
(3) Termination of jog operation
To end the jog operation, switch power off once or press the "MODE" button to switch to the next
screen and then hold down the "SET" button for 2 or more seconds.
6 - 14
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.8.3 Positioning operation
POINT
The servo configuration software is required to perform positioning
operation.
Positioning operation can be performed once when there is no command from the external command
device.
(1) Operation
Connect EMG-SG to start positioning operation and connect VDD-COM to use the internal power
supply.
Pressing the "Forward" or "Reverse" button on the servo configuration software starts the servo motor,
which will then stop after moving the preset travel distance. You can change the operation conditions
on the servo configuration software. The initial conditions and setting ranges for operation are listed
below:
Item
Initial setting
Travel distance [pulse]
Setting range
10000
0 to 9999999
Speed [r/min]
200
0 to instantaneous permissible speed
Acceleration/deceleration time constant [ms]
1000
0 to 50000
How to use the keys is explained below:
Key
Description
"Forward"
Press to start positioning operation CCW.
"Reverse"
Press to start positioning operation CW.
"Pause"
Press during operation to make a temporary stop. Pressing
the "Pause" button again erases the remaining distance.
To resume operation, press the button that was pressed to
start the operation.
If the communication cable is disconnected during positioning operation, the servo motor will come
to a sudden stop.
(2) Status display
You can monitor the status display even during positioning operation.
6 - 15
6. DISPLAY AND OPERATION
6.8.4 Motor-less operation
Without connecting the servo motor, you can provide output signals or monitor the status display as if the
servo motor is running in response to external input signals. This operation can be used to check the
sequence of a host programmable controller or the like.
(1) Operation
After turning off the signal across SON-SG, choose motor-less operation. After that, perform external
operation as in ordinary operation.
(2) Status display
You can confirm the servo status during motor-less operation.
Pressing the "MODE" button in the motor-less operation-ready status calls the status display screen.
With this screen being shown, perform motor-less operation. Every time you press the "MODE"
button, the next status display screen appears, and on completion of a screen cycle, pressing that
button returns to the motor-less operation-ready status screen. For full information of the status
display, refer to Section 6.2. In the test operation mode, you cannot use the "UP" and "DOWN" buttons
to change the status display screen from one to another.
(3) Termination of motor-less operation
To terminate the motor-less operation, switch power off.
6 - 16
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
POINT
For use in the torque control mode, you need not make gain adjustment.
7.1 Different adjustment methods
7.1.1 Adjustment on a single servo amplifier
The gain adjustment in this section can be made on a single servo amplifier. For gain adjustment, first
execute auto tuning mode 1. If you are not satisfied with the results, execute auto tuning mode 2, manual
mode 1 and manual mode 2 in this order.
(1) Gain adjustment mode explanation
Gain adjustment mode
Parameter No. 2
setting
Estimation of load inertia
moment ratio
Automatically set
parameters
Manually set parameters
Auto tuning mode 1
(initial value)
010
Always estimated
PG1 (parameter No. 6)
GD2 (parameter No. 34)
PG2 (parameter No. 35)
VG1 (parameter No. 36)
VG2 (parameter No. 37)
VIC (parameter No. 38)
Response level setting of
parameter No. 2
Auto tuning mode 2
020
Fixed to parameter No. PG1 (parameter No. 6)
34 value
PG2 (parameter No. 35)
VG1 (parameter No. 36)
VG2 (parameter No. 37)
VIC (parameter No. 38)
GD2 (parameter No. 34)
Response level setting of
parameter No. 2
Manual mode 1
030
PG2 (parameter No. 35)
VG1 (parameter No. 36)
Manual mode 2
040
Interpolation mode
000
PG1 (parameter No. 6)
GD2 (parameter No. 34)
VG2 (parameter No. 37)
VIC (parameter No. 38)
PG1 (parameter No. 6)
GD2 (parameter No. 34)
PG2 (parameter No. 35)
VG1 (parameter No. 36)
VG2 (parameter No. 37)
VIC (parameter No. 38)
Always estimated
7- 1
GD2 (parameter No. 34)
PG2 (parameter No. 35)
VG2 (parameter No. 37)
VIC (parameter No. 38)
PG1 (parameter No. 6)
VG1 (parameter No. 36)
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
(2) Adjustment sequence and mode usage
START
Usage
Interpolation
made for 2 or more
axes?
Yes
Interpolation mode
No
Operation
Allows adjustment by
merely changing the
response level setting.
First use this mode to make
adjustment.
Auto tuning mode 1
Operation
Yes
No
OK?
No
Operation
OK?
Used when the conditions of
auto tuning mode 1 are not
met and the load inertia
moment ratio could not be
estimated properly, for
example.
This mode permits
adjustment easily with three
gains if you were not
satisfied with auto tuning
results.
No
Manual mode 1
Operation
Yes
OK?
Yes
Auto tuning mode 2
Yes
Used when you want to
match the position gain
(PG1) between 2 or more
axes. Normally not used for
other purposes.
OK?
You can adjust all gains
manually when you want to
do fast settling or the like.
No
Manual mode 2
END
7.1.2 Adjustment using servo configuration software
This section gives the functions and adjustment that may be performed by using the servo amplifier with
the servo configuration software which operates on a personal computer.
Function
Description
Adjustment
Machine analyzer
With the machine and servo motor
coupled, the characteristic of the
mechanical system can be measured by
giving a random vibration command from
the personal computer to the servo and
measuring the machine response.
Gain search
Executing gain search under to-and-fro
positioning command measures settling
characteristic while simultaneously
changing gains, and automatically
searches for gains which make settling
time shortest.
Response at positioning settling of a
machine can be simulated from machine
analyzer results on personal computer.
Machine simulation
7- 2
You can grasp the machine resonance frequency and
determine the notch frequency of the machine
resonance suppression filter.
You can automatically set the optimum gains in
response to the machine characteristic. This simple
adjustment is suitable for a machine which has large
machine resonance and does not require much settling
time.
You can automatically set gains which make positioning
settling time shortest.
You can optimize gain adjustment and command
pattern on personal computer.
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
7.2 Auto tuning
7.2.1 Auto tuning mode
The servo amplifier has a real-time auto tuning function which estimates the machine characteristic (load
inertia moment ratio) in real time and automatically sets the optimum gains according to that value. This
function permits ease of gain adjustment of the servo amplifier.
(1) Auto tuning mode 1
The servo amplifier is factory-set to the auto tuning mode 1.
In this mode, the load inertia moment ratio of a machine is always estimated to set the optimum gains
automatically.
The following parameters are automatically adjusted in the auto tuning mode 1.
Parameter No.
Abbreviation
6
PG1
Name
34
GD2
Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment
35
PG2
Position control gain 2
36
VG1
Speed control gain 1
37
VG2
Speed control gain 2
38
VIC
Speed integral compensation
Position control gain 1
POINT
The auto tuning mode 1 may not be performed properly if the following
conditions are not satisfied.
Time to reach 2000r/min is the acceleration/deceleration time constant of 5s or
less.
Speed is 150r/min or higher.
The ratio of load inertia moment to motor inertia moment is not more
than 100 times.
The acceleration/deceleration torque is 10% or more of the rated torque.
Under operating conditions which will impose sudden disturbance torque
during acceleration/deceleration or on a machine which is extremely loose,
auto tuning may not function properly, either. In such cases, use the auto
tuning mode 2 or manual mode 1,2 to make gain adjustment.
(2) Auto tuning mode 2
Use the auto tuning mode 2 when proper gain adjustment cannot be made by auto tuning mode 1.
Since the load inertia moment ratio is not estimated in this mode, set the value of a correct load
inertia moment ratio (parameter No. 34).
The following parameters are automatically adjusted in the auto tuning mode 2.
Parameter No.
Abbreviation
6
PG1
Name
Position control gain 1
35
PG2
Position control gain 2
36
VG1
Speed control gain 1
37
VG2
Speed control gain 2
38
VIC
Speed integral compensation
7- 3
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
7.2.2 Auto tuning mode operation
The block diagram of real-time auto tuning is shown below.
Load inertia
moment
Automatic setting
Command
Encoder
Control gains
PG1,VG1
PG2,VG2,VIC
Current
control
Servo
motor
Current feedback
Set 0 or 1 to turn on.
Gain
table
Parameter No. 2
0 1 0 7
Real-time auto
tuning section
Switch
Load inertia
moment ratio
estimation section
Position/speed
feedback
Speed feedback
Parameter No. 34
Load inertia moment
ratio estimation value
First digit
Third digit Response level setting
Auto tuning selection
When a servo motor is accelerated/decelerated, the load inertia moment ratio estimation section always
estimates the load inertia moment ratio from the current and speed of the servo motor. The results of
estimation are written to parameter No. 34 (load inertia moment ratio). These results can be confirmed on
the status display screen of the servo amplifier display section.
If the value of the load inertia moment ratio is already known or if estimation cannot be made properly,
chose the "auto tuning mode 2" (parameter No.2:
2
) to stop the estimation of the load inertia
moment ratio (Switch in above diagram turned off), and set the load inertia moment ratio (parameter No.
34) manually.
From the preset load inertia moment ratio (parameter No. 34) value and response level (The first digit of
parameter No. 2), the optimum control gains are automatically set on the basis of the internal gain tale.
The auto tuning results are saved in the EEP-ROM of the servo amplifier every 6 minutes since power-on.
At power-on, auto tuning is performed with the value of each control gain saved in the EEP-ROM being
used as an initial value.
POINT
If sudden disturbance torque is imposed during operation, the estimation
of the inertia moment ratio may malfunction temporarily. In such a case,
choose the "auto tuning mode 2" (parameter No. 2: 020 ) and set the
correct load inertia moment ratio in parameter No. 34.
7- 4
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
7.2.3 Adjustment procedure by auto tuning
Since auto tuning is made valid before shipment from the factory, simply running the servo motor
automatically sets the optimum gains that match the machine. Merely changing the response level
setting value as required completes the adjustment. The adjustment procedure is as follows.
(1) Basic procedure
Auto tuning adjustment
Acceleration/deceleration repeated
Yes
Load inertia moment ratio
estimation value stable?
No
Auto tuning
conditions not satisfied.
(Estimation of load inertia
moment ratio is difficult)
No
Yes
Choose the auto tuning mode 2
(parameter No.2 : 020 ) and set
the load inertia moment ratio
(parameter No.34) manually.
Adjust response level setting
so that desired response is
achieved on vibration-free level.
Acceleration/deceleration repeated
Requested
performance satisfied?
No
Yes
END
To manual mode
7- 5
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
7.2.4 Response level setting in auto tuning mode
Set the response (The first digit of parameter No.2) of the whole servo system. As the response level
setting is increased, the trackability and settling time for a command decreases, but a too high response
level will generate vibration. Hence, make setting until desired response is obtained within the vibrationfree range.
If the response level setting cannot be increased up to the desired response because of machine resonance
beyond 100Hz, adaptive vibration suppression control (parameter No. 60) or machine resonance
suppression filter (parameter No. 58 59) may be used to suppress machine resonance. Suppressing
machine resonance may allow the response level setting to increase. Refer to Section 8.1 for adaptive
vibration suppression control and machine resonance suppression filter.
Parameter No. 2
0 1 0 7
Response level setting
Auto tuning selection
Machine characteristic
Response level setting
1
Machine rigidity
Machine resonance
frequency guideline
Low
15Hz
2
20Hz
3
25Hz
4
30Hz
5
35Hz
6
45Hz
7
55Hz
8
Middle
85Hz
A
105Hz
B
130Hz
C
160Hz
D
200Hz
E
240Hz
High
Large conveyor
Arm robot
General machine
tool conveyor
70Hz
9
F
Guideline of corresponding machine
300Hz
7- 6
Precision
working
machine
Inserter
Mounter
Bonder
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
7.3 Manual mode 1 (simple manual adjustment)
If you are not satisfied with the adjustment of auto tuning, you can make simple manual adjustment with
three parameters.
7.3.1 Operation of manual mode 1
In this mode, setting the three gains of position control gain 1 (PG1), speed control gain 2 (VG2) and
speed integral compensation (VIC) automatically sets the other gains to the optimum values according to
these gains.
User setting
PG1
VG2
VIC
GD2
Automatic setting
PG2
VG1
Therefore, you can adjust the model adaptive control system in the same image as the general PI control
system (position gain, speed gain, speed integral time constant). Here, the position gain corresponds to
PG1, the speed gain to VG2 and the speed integral time constant to VIC. When making gain adjustment
in this mode, set the load inertia moment ratio (parameter No. 34) correctly.
7.3.2 Adjustment by manual mode 1
POINT
If machine resonance occurs, adaptive vibration suppression control
(parameter No. 60) or machine resonance suppression filter (parameter No.
58 59) may be used to suppress machine resonance. (Refer to Section 8.1.)
(1) For speed control
(a) Parameters
The following parameters are used for gain adjustment:
Parameter No.
Abbreviation
Name
34
GD2
Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment
37
VG2
Speed control gain 2
38
VIC
Speed integral compensation
(b) Adjustment procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
5
Operation
Description
Set an estimated value to the ratio of load inertia moment to servo
motor inertia moment (parameter No. 34).
Increase the speed control gain 2 (parameter No. 37) within the
vibration- and unusual noise-free range, and return slightly if vibration
takes place.
Decrease the speed integral compensation (parameter No. 38) within
the vibration-free range, and return slightly if vibration takes place.
If the gains cannot be increased due to mechanical system resonance or
the like and the desired response cannot be achieved, response may be
increased by suppressing resonance with adaptive vibration
suppression control or machine resonance suppression filter and then
executing steps 2 and 3.
While checking the settling characteristic and rotational status, fineadjust each gain.
7- 7
Increase the speed control gain.
Decrease the time constant of the speed
integral compensation.
Suppression of machine resonance.
Refer to Section 8.2, 8.3.
Fine adjustment
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
(c)Adjustment description
1) Speed control gain 2 (parameter No. 37)
This parameter determines the response level of the speed control loop. Increasing this value
enhances response but a too high value will make the mechanical system liable to vibrate. The
actual response frequency of the speed loop is as indicated in the following expression:
Speed loop response
frequency(Hz)
Speed control gain 2 setting
(1 ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment) 2
2) Speed integral compensation (VIC: parameter No. 38)
To eliminate stationary deviation against a command, the speed control loop is under
proportional integral control. For the speed integral compensation, set the time constant of this
integral control. Increasing the setting lowers the response level. However, if the load inertia
moment ratio is large or the mechanical system has any vibratory element, the mechanical
system is liable to vibrate unless the setting is increased to some degree. The guideline is as
indicated in the following expression:
Speed integral compensation
setting(ms)
2000 to 3000
Speed control gain 2 setting/ (1 ratio of load inertia moment to
servo motor inertia moment setting 0.1)
(2) For position control
(a) Parameters
The following parameters are used for gain adjustment:
Parameter No.
Abbreviation
6
PG1
Position control gain 1
Name
34
GD2
Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment
37
VG2
Speed control gain 2
38
VIC
Speed integral compensation
(b) Adjustment procedure
Step
Operation
1
Set an estimated value to the ratio of load inertia moment to servo
motor inertia moment (parameter No. 34).
Description
2
Set a slightly smaller value to the position control gain 1 (parameter
No. 6).
3
Increase the speed control gain 2 (parameter No. 37) within the Increase the speed control gain.
vibration- and unusual noise-free range, and return slightly if vibration
takes place.
4
Decrease the speed integral compensation (parameter No. 38) within Decrease the time constant of the speed
the vibration-free range, and return slightly if vibration takes place.
integral compensation.
5
Increase the position control gain 1 (parameter No. 6).
6
If the gains cannot be increased due to mechanical system resonance or Suppression of machine resonance.
the like and the desired response cannot be achieved, response may be Refer to Section 8.1.
increased by suppressing resonance with adaptive vibration
suppression control or machine resonance suppression filter and then
executing steps 3 to 5.
7
While checking the settling characteristic and rotational status, fine- Fine adjustment
adjust each gain.
7- 8
Increase the position control gain.
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
(c) Adjustment description
1) Position control gain 1 (parameter No. 6)
This parameter determines the response level of the position control loop. Increasing position
control gain 1 improves trackability to a position command but a too high value will make
overshooting liable to occur at the time of settling.
Position control
gain 1 guideline
Speed control gain 2 setting
(1 ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment)
( 13 to 15 )
2) Speed control gain 2 (VG2: parameter No. 37)
This parameter determines the response level of the speed control loop. Increasing this value
enhances response but a too high value will make the mechanical system liable to vibrate. The
actual response frequency of the speed loop is as indicated in the following expression:
Speed loop response
frequency(Hz)
Speed control gain 2 setting
(1 ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment) 2
3) Speed integral compensation (parameter No. 38)
To eliminate stationary deviation against a command, the speed control loop is under
proportional integral control. For the speed integral compensation, set the time constant of this
integral control. Increasing the setting lowers the response level. However, if the load inertia
moment ratio is large or the mechanical system has any vibratory element, the mechanical
system is liable to vibrate unless the setting is increased to some degree. The guideline is as
indicated in the following expression:
Speed integral
compensation setting(ms)
2000 to 3000
Speed control gain 2 setting/ (1 ratio of load inertia moment to
servo motor inertia moment 2 setting
7- 9
0.1)
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
7.4 Interpolation mode
The interpolation mode is used to match the position control gains of the axes when performing the
interpolation operation of servo motors of two or more axes for an X-Y table or the like. In this mode, the
position control gain 2 and speed control gain 2 which determine command trackability are set manually
and the other parameter for gain adjustment are set automatically.
(1) Parameter
(a) Automatically adjusted parameters
The following parameters are automatically adjusted by auto tuning.
Parameter No.
Abbreviation
34
35
37
38
GD2
PG2
VG2
VIC
Name
Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment
Position control gain 2
Speed control gain 2
Speed integral compensation
(b) Manually adjusted parameters
The following parameters are adjustable manually.
Parameter No.
Abbreviation
6
36
PG1
VG1
Name
Position control gain 1
Speed control gain 1
(2) Adjustment procedure
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Operation
Set 15Hz (parameter No. 2: 010 ) as the machine resonance frequency of response
in the auto tuning mode 1.
During operation, increase the response level setting (parameter No. 2), and
return the setting if vibration occurs.
Check the values of position control gain 1 (parameter No. 6) and speed control
gain 1 (parameter No. 36).
Set the interpolation mode (parameter No. 2: 000 ).
Using the position control gain 1 value checked in step 3 as the guideline of the
upper limit, set in PG1 the value identical to the position loop gain of the axis to
be interpolated.
Using the speed control gain 1 value checked in step 3 as the guideline of the
upper limit, look at the rotation status and set in speed control gain 1 the value
three or more times greater than the position control gain 1 setting.
Looking at the interpolation characteristic and rotation status, fine-adjust the
gains and response level setting.
Description
Select the auto tuning mode 1.
Adjustment in auto tuning mode
1.
Check the upper setting limits.
Select the interpolation mode.
Set position control gain 1.
Set speed control gain 1.
Fine adjustment.
(3) Adjustment description
(a) Position control gain 1 (parameter No.6)
This parameter determines the response level of the position control loop. Increasing position
control gain 1 improves trackability to a position command but a too high value will make
overshooting liable to occur at the time of settling. The droop pulse value is determined by the
following expression.
Droop pulse value (pulse)
Rotation speed (r/min) 131,072(pulse)
Position control gain 1 setting
(b) Speed control gain 1 (parameter No. 36)
Set the response level of the speed loop of the model. Make setting using the following expression
as a guideline.
Speed control gain 1 setting Position control gain 1 setting 3
7 - 10
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
7.5 Differences in auto tuning between MELSERVO-J2 and MELSERVO-J2-Super
7.5.1 Response level setting
To meet higher response demands, the MELSERVO-J2-Super series has been changed in response level
setting range from the MELSERVO-J2 series. The following table lists comparison of the response level
setting.
Parameter No. 2
5
Response level setting
MELSERVO-J2 series
Response level setting
MELSERVO-J2-Super series
Machine resonance frequency
1
Response level setting
20Hz
Machine resonance frequency guideline
1
15Hz
2
20Hz
3
25Hz
4
30Hz
5
35Hz
2
40Hz
6
45Hz
7
55Hz
3
60Hz
8
70Hz
4
80Hz
9
85Hz
5
100Hz
A
105Hz
B
130Hz
C
160Hz
D
200Hz
E
240Hz
F
300Hz
Note that because of a slight difference in gain adjustment pattern, response may not be the same if the
resonance frequency is set to the same value.
7.5.2 Auto tuning selection
The MELSERVO-J2-Super series has an addition of the load inertia moment ratio fixing mode. It also has
the addition of the manual mode 1 which permits manual adjustment with three parameters.
Parameter No. 2
1
Auto tuning selection
Gain adjustment mode
Interpolation mode
Auto tuning mode 1
Auto tuning
Auto tuning selection
MELSERVO-J2-Super series
0
0
1
1
Ordinary auto tuning
2
Estimation of load inertia moment
ratio stopped.
Response level setting valid.
3
Simple manual adjustment
4
Manual adjustment of all gains
Auto tuning mode 2
Auto tuning Manual mode 1
invalid
Manual mode 2
Remarks
MELSERVO-J2 series
2
7 - 11
Position control gain 1 is fixed.
7. GENERAL GAIN ADJUSTMENT
MEMO
7 - 12
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
POINT
The functions given in this chapter need not be used generally. Use them
if you are not satisfied with the machine status after making adjustment
in the methods in Chapter 7.
If a mechanical system has a natural resonance point, increasing the servo system response may cause
the mechanical system to produce resonance (vibration or unusual noise) at that resonance frequency.
Using the machine resonance suppression filter and adaptive vibration suppression control functions can
suppress the resonance of the mechanical system.
8.1 Function block diagram
Speed
control
00
Parameter
No.58
Machine resonance
suppression filter 1
Parameter
No.60
Parameter
No.59
00
0
except
Parameter Current
No.60 command
Machine resonance
suppression filter 2
00
Low-pass
filter
0
Servo
motor
1
except
Encoder
00
Adaptive vibration
suppression control
1
or
2
8.2 Machine resonance suppression filter
(1) Function
The machine resonance suppression filter is a filter function (notch filter) which decreases the gain of
the specific frequency to suppress the resonance of the mechanical system. You can set the gain
decreasing frequency (notch frequency) and gain decreasing depth.
Mechanical
system
response
Machine resonance point
Frequency
Notch
depth
Notch frequency
8- 1
Frequency
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
You can use the machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. 58) and machine resonance
suppression filter 2 (parameter No. 59) to suppress the vibration of two resonance frequencies. Note
that if adaptive vibration suppression control is made valid, the machine resonance suppression filter
1 (parameter No. 58) is made invalid.
Machine resonance point
Mechanical
system
response
Frequency
Notch
depth
Frequency
Parameter No. 58
Parameter No. 59
POINT
The machine resonance suppression filter is a delay factor for the servo
system. Hence, vibration may increase if you set a wrong resonance
frequency or a too deep notch.
(2) Parameters
(a) Machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. 58)
Set the notch frequency and notch depth of the machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter
No. 58)
When you have made adaptive vibration suppression control selection (parameter No. 60) "valid" or
"held", make the machine resonance suppression filter 1 invalid (parameter No. 58: 0000).
Parameter No. 58
0
Notch frequency
Setting
Setting
Setting
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency
value
value
value
Setting
Frequency
value
00
Invalid
08
562.5
10
281.3
18
01
4500
09
500
11
264.7
19
180
02
2250
0A
450
12
250
1A
173.1
03
1500
0B
409.1
13
236.8
1B
166.7
04
1125
0C
375
14
225
1C
160.1
05
900
0D
346.2
15
214.3
1D
155.2
06
750
0E
321.4
16
204.5
1E
150
07
642.9
0F
300
17
195.7
1F
145.2
Notch depth
Setting
value
Depth (Gain)
0
1
2
3
Deep ( 40dB)
( 14dB)
( 8dB)
Shallow( 4dB)
8- 2
187.5
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
POINT
If the frequency of machine resonance is unknown, decrease the notch
frequency from higher to lower ones in order. The optimum notch
frequency is set at the point where vibration is minimal.
A deeper notch has a higher effect on machine resonance suppression but
increases a phase delay and may increase vibration.
The machine characteristic can be grasped beforehand by the machine
analyzer on the servo configuration software. This allows the required
notch frequency and depth to be determined.
Resonance may occur if parameter No. 58 59 is used to select a close
notch frequency and set a deep notch.
(b) Machine resonance suppression filter 2 (parameter No. 59)
The setting method of machine resonance suppression filter 2 (parameter No. 59) is the same as
that of machine resonance suppression filter 1 (parameter No. 58). However, the machine
resonance suppression filter 2 can be set independently of whether adaptive vibration suppression
control is valid or invalid.
8.3 Adaptive vibration suppression control
(1) Function
Adaptive vibration suppression control is a function in which the servo amplifier detects machine
resonance and sets the filter characteristics automatically to suppress mechanical system vibration.
Since the filter characteristics (frequency, depth) are set automatically, you need not be conscious of
the resonance frequency of a mechanical system. Also, while adaptive vibration suppression control is
valid, the servo amplifier always detects machine resonance, and if the resonance frequency changes,
it changes the filter characteristics in response to that frequency.
Machine resonance point
Mechanical
system
response
Mechanical
system
response
Machine resonance point
Frequency
Frequency
Notch
depth
Notch
depth
Frequency
Frequency
Notch frequency
Notch frequency
When machine resonance is large and frequency is low
When machine resonance is small and frequency is high
POINT
The machine resonance frequency which adaptive vibration suppression
control can respond to is about 150 to 500Hz. Adaptive vibration
suppression control has no effect on the resonance frequency outside this
range. Use the machine resonance suppression filter for the machine
resonance of such frequency.
Adaptive vibration suppression control may provide no effect on a
mechanical system which has complex resonance characteristics or which
has too large resonance.
Under operating conditions in which sudden disturbance torque is imposed
during operation, the detection of the resonance frequency may malfunction
temporarily, causing machine vibration. In such a case, set adaptive
vibration suppression control to be "held" (parameter No. 60: 2
) to fix
the characteristics of the adaptive vibration suppression control filter.
8- 3
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
(2) Parameters
The operation of adaptive vibration suppression control selection (parameter No.60).
Parameter No. 60
0 0
Adaptive vibration suppression control selection
Choosing "valid" or "held" in adaptive vibration suppression
control selection makes the machine resonance suppression
filter 1 (parameter No. 58) invalid.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Machine resonance frequency is always detected to
generate the filter in response to resonance, suppressing
machine vibration.
2: Held
Filter characteristics generated so far is held, and detection of
machine resonance is stopped.
Adaptive vibration suppression control sensitivity selection
Set the sensitivity of detecting machine resonance.
0: Normal
1: Large sensitivity
POINT
Adaptive vibration suppression control is factory-set to be invalid
(parameter No. 60: 0000).
The filter characteristics generated are saved in the EEP-ROM every 6
minutes since power-on. At next power-on, vibration suppression control is
performed with this data saved in the EEP-ROM being used as an initial
value.
Setting the adaptive vibration suppression control sensitivity can change
the sensitivity of detecting machine resonance. Setting of "large sensitivity"
detects smaller machine resonance and generates a filter to suppress
machine vibration. However, since a phase delay will also increase, the
response of the servo system may not increase.
8.4 Low-pass filter
(1) Function
When a ballscrew or the like is used, resonance of high frequency may occur as the response of the
servo system is increased. To prevent this, the low-pass filter is factory-set to be valid for a torque
command. The filter frequency of this low-pass filter is automatically adjusted to the value in the
following expression:
Filter frequency(Hz)
2
Speed control gain 2 setting 10
(1 Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment setting 0.1)
(2) Parameter
Set the operation of the low-pass filter (parameter No. 60.)
Parameter No. 60
0
Low-pass filter selection
0: Valid (automatic adjustment)
1: Invalid
initial value
POINT
In a mechanical system where rigidity is extremely high and resonance is
difficult to occur, setting the low-pass filter to be "invalid" may increase
the servo system response to shorten the settling time.
8- 4
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
8.5 Gain changing function
This function can change the gains. You can change between gains during rotation and gains during stop
or can use an external signal to change gains during operation.
8.5.1 Applications
This function is used when:
(1) You want to increase the gains during servo lock but decrease the gains to reduce noise during rotation.
(2) You want to increase the gains during settling to shorten the stop settling time.
(3) You want to change the gains using an external signal to ensure stability of the servo system since the
load inertia moment ratio varies greatly during a stop (e.g. a large load is mounted on a carrier).
8.5.2 Function block diagram
The valid control gains PG2, VG2, VIC and GD2 of the actual loop are changed according to the conditions
selected by gain changing selection CDP (parameter No. 65) and gain changing condition CDS (parameter
No. 66).
CDP
Parameter No.65
External signal
CDP
Command pulse
frequency
Droop pulses
Changing
Model speed
CDS
Parameter No.66
Comparator
GD2
Parameter No.34
GD2
Parameter No.61
Valid
GD2 value
PG2
Parameter No.35
PG2
PG2B
100
Valid
PG2 value
VG2
Parameter No.37
VG2
VG2B
100
Valid
VG2 value
VIC
Parameter No.38
VIC
VICB
100
8- 5
Valid
VIC value
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
8.5.3 Parameters
When using the gain changing function, always set "
4 " in parameter No.2 (auto tuning) to choose
the manual mode of the gain adjustment modes. The gain changing function cannot be used in the auto
tuning mode.
Parameter Abbrevi
No.
ation
Name
Unit
Description
Position and speed gains of a model used to set the response
level to a command. Always valid.
6
PG1
Position control gain 1
rad/s
36
VG1
Speed control gain 1
rad/s
34
GD2
Ratio of load inertia moment to
servo motor inertia moment
0.1
times
35
PG2
Position control gain 2
rad/s
37
VG2
Speed control gain 2
rad/s
38
VIC
Speed integral compensation
Control parameters before changing
ms
61
GD2B
Ratio of load inertia moment to
servo motor inertia moment 2
62
PG2B
Position control gain 2 changing
ratio
%
Used to set the ratio (%) of the after-changing position
control gain 2 to position control gain 2.
63
VG2B
Speed control gain 2 changing
ratio
%
Used to set the ratio (%) of the after-changing speed control
gain 2 to speed control gain 2.
64
VICB
Speed integral
changing ratio
%
Used to set the ratio (%) of the after-changing speed integral
compensation to speed integral compensation.
65
CDP
Gain changing selection
compensation
66
CDS
Gain changing condition
67
CDT
Gain changing time constant
0.1
times
Used to set the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor
inertia moment after changing.
Used to select the changing condition.
kpps
pulse
r/min
ms
Used to set the changing condition values.
You can set the filter time constant for a gain change at
changing.
8- 6
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
(1) Parameters No. 6, 34 to 38
These parameters are the same as in ordinary manual adjustment. Gain changing allows the values of
ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment, position control gain 2, speed control gain
2 and speed integral compensation to be changed.
(2) Ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment 2 (GD2B: parameter No. 61)
Set the ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment after changing. If the load inertia
moment ratio does not change, set it to the same value as ratio of load inertia moment to servo motor
inertia moment (parameter No. 34).
(3) Position control gain 2 changing ratio (parameter No. 62), speed control gain 2 changing ratio (parameter
No. 63), speed integral compensation changing ratio (parameter No. 64)
Set the values of after-changing position control gain 2, speed control gain 2 and speed integral
compensation in ratio (%). 100% setting means no gain change.
For example, at the setting of position control gain 2 100, speed control gain 2 2000, speed integral
compensation 20 and position control gain 2 changing ratio 180%, speed control gain 2 changing
ratio 150% and speed integral compensation changing ratio 80%, the after-changing values are as
follows:
Position control gain 2 Position control gain 2 Position control gain 2 changing ratio /100 180rad/s
Speed control gain 2 Speed control gain 2 Speed control gain 2 changing ratio /100 3000rad/s
Speed integral compensation Speed integral compensation Speed integral compensation changing
ratio /100 16ms
(4) Gain changing selection (parameter No. 65)
Used to set the gain changing condition. Choose the changing condition in the first digit. If you set "1"
here, you can use the gain changing (CDP) external input signal for gain changing. The gain changing
signal (CDP) can be assigned to the pins using parameters No. 43 to 48.
Parameter No. 65
0 0 0
Gain changing selection
Gains are changed in accordance with the settings of
parameters No. 61 to 64 under any of the following conditions:
0: Invalid
1: Gain changing (CDP) input signal is ON
2: Command frequency is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting
3: Droop pulse value is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting
4: Servo motor speed is equal to higher than parameter No. 66 setting
(5) Gain changing condition (parameter No. 66)
When you selected "command frequency", "droop pulses" or "servo motor speed" in gain changing
selection (parameter No.65), set the gain changing level.
The setting unit is as follows:
Gain changing condition
Unit
Command frequency
kpps
Droop pulses
pulse
Servo motor speed
r/min
(6) Gain changing time constant (parameter No. 67)
You can set the primary delay filter to each gain at gain changing. This parameter is used to suppress
shock given to the machine if the gain difference is large at gain changing, for example.
8- 7
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
8.5.4 Gain changing operation
This operation will be described by way of setting examples.
(1) When you choose changing by external input
(a) Setting
Parameter No.
Abbreviation
Name
Setting
Unit
6
PG1
Position control gain 1
100
rad/s
36
VG1
Speed control gain 1
1000
rad/s
34
GD2
Ratio of load inertia moment to
servo motor inertia moment
4
0.1 times
35
PG2
Position control gain 2
120
rad/s
37
VG2
Speed control gain 2
3000
rad/s
38
VIC
Speed integral compensation
20
ms
100
0.1 times
61
GD2B
Ratio of load inertia moment to
servo motor inertia moment 2
62
PG2B
Position control gain 2
changing ratio
70
%
63
VG2B
Speed control gain 2 changing
ratio
133
%
64
VICB
Speed integral compensation
changing ratio
250
%
65
CDP
Gain changing selection
67
CDT
Gain changing time constant
0001
(Changed by ON/OFF of
pin CN1A-8)
100
(b) Changing operation
OFF
Gain changing
(CDP)
Change of
each gain
ON
After-changing gain
Before-changing gain
CDT 100ms
Position control gain 1
100
Speed control gain 1
1000
Ratio of load inertia moment
to servo motor inertia moment
OFF
4.0
10.0
4.0
Position control gain 2
120
84
120
Speed control gain 2
3000
4000
3000
20
50
20
Speed integral compensation
8- 8
ms
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
(2) When you choose changing by droop pulses
(a) Setting
Parameter No.
Abbreviation
Setting
Unit
6
PG1
Position control gain 1
Name
100
rad/s
36
VG1
Speed control gain 1
1000
rad/s
34
GD2
Ratio of load inertia moment to
servo motor inertia moment
40
0.1 times
35
PG2
Position control gain 2
120
rad/s
37
VG2
Speed control gain 2
3000
rad/s
38
VIC
Speed integral compensation
20
ms
100
0.1 times
61
GD2B
Ratio of load inertia moment to
servo motor inertia moment 2
62
PG2B
Position control gain 2
changing ratio
70
%
63
VG2B
Speed control gain 2 changing
ratio
133
%
64
VICB
Speed integral compensation
changing ratio
250
%
65
CDP
Gain changing selection
0003
(Changed by droop pulses)
66
CDS
Gain changing condition
50
pulse
67
CDT
Gain changing time constant
100
ms
(b) Changing operation
Command pulse
Droop pulses [pulses] 0
Droop pulses
CDS
CDS
After-changing gain
Change of each gain
Before-changing gain
CDT 100ms
Position control gain 1
100
Speed control gain 1
1000
Ratio of load inertia moment
to servo motor inertia moment
4.0
10.0
4.0
10.0
Position control gain 2
120
84
120
84
Speed control gain 2
3000
4000
3000
4000
20
50
20
50
Speed integral compensation
8- 9
8. SPECIAL ADJUSTMENT FUNCTIONS
MEMO
8 - 10
9. INSPECTION
9. INSPECTION
WARNING
Before starting maintenance and/or inspection, make sure that the charge lamp is
off more than 10 minutes after power-off. Then, confirm that the voltage is safe in
the tester or the like. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
Any person who is involved in inspection should be fully competent to do the work.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock. For repair and parts replacement,
contact your safes representative.
POINT
Do not test the servo amplifier with a megger (measure insulation
resistance), or it may become faulty.
Do not disassemble and/or repair the equipment on customer side.
(1) Inspection
It is recommended to make the following checks periodically:
(a) Check for loose terminal block screws. Retighten any loose screws.
(b) Check the cables and the like for scratches and cracks. Perform periodic inspection according to
operating conditions.
(2) Life
The following parts must be changed periodically as listed below. If any part is found faulty, it must be
changed immediately even when it has not yet reached the end of its life, which depends on the
operating method and environmental conditions. For parts replacement, please contact your sales
representative.
Part name
Life guideline
Smoothing capacitor
Servo amplifier
Relay
Cooling fan
Absolute position battery
10 years
Number of power-on and number of
emergency stop times : 100,000 times
10,000 to 30,000hours (2 to 3 years)
Refer to Section 15.2
(a) Smoothing capacitor
Affected by ripple currents, etc. and deteriorates in characteristic. The life of the capacitor greatly
depends on ambient temperature and operating conditions. The capacitor will reach the end of its
life in 10 years of continuous operation in normal air-conditioned environment.
(b) Relays
Their contacts will wear due to switching currents and contact faults occur. Relays reach the end of
their life when the cumulative number of power-on and emergency stop times is 100,000, which
depends on the power supply capacity.
(c) Servo amplifier cooling fan
The cooling fan bearings reach the end of their life in 10,000 to 30,000 hours. Normally, therefore,
the fan must be changed in a few years of continuous operation as a guideline.
It must also be changed if unusual noise or vibration is found during inspection.
9- 1
9. INSPECTION
MEMO
9- 2
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10.1 Trouble at start-up
CAUTION
Excessive adjustment or change of parameter setting must not be made as it will
make operation instable.
POINT
Using the optional servo configuration software, you can refer to unrotated
servo motor reasons, etc.
The following faults may occur at start-up. If any of such faults occurs, take the corresponding action.
10.1.1 Position control mode
(1) Troubleshooting
No.
1
2
3
Start-up sequence
Power on
Fault
LED is not lit.
LED flickers.
Investigation
Possible cause
Refer to
1. Power supply voltage fault
Not improved if connectors
CN1A, CN1B, CN2 and CN3 2. Servo amplifier is faulty.
are disconnected.
Improved when connectors
CN1A and CN1B are
disconnected.
Power supply of CNP1 cabling
is shorted.
Improved when connector
CN2 is disconnected.
1. Power supply of encoder
cabling is shorted.
2. Encoder is faulty.
Improved when connector
CN3 is disconnected.
Power supply of CN3 cabling is
shorted.
Alarm occurs.
Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause.
Section 10.2
Switch on servo-on
signal.
Alarm occurs.
Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause.
Section 10.2
Servo motor shaft is 1. Check the display to see if 1. Servo-on signal is not input.
(Wiring mistake)
the servo amplifier is
not servo-locked
2. 24VDC power is not
ready to operate.
(is free).
supplied to COM.
2. Check the external I/O
signal indication to see if
the servo-on (SON) signal
is ON.
Section 6.6
Enter input
command.
(Test operation)
Servo motor does
not rotate.
Check cumulative command 1. Wiring mistake
pulses.
(a) For open collector pulse
train input, 24VDC
power is not supplied to
OPC.
(b) LSP/LSN-SG are not
connected.
2. No pulses is input.
1. Mistake in wiring to
controller.
2. Mistake in setting of
parameter No. 54.
Servo motor run in
reverse direction.
10 - 1
Section 6.2
Chapter 5
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
4
5
Start-up sequence
Gain adjustment
Cyclic operation
Fault
Investigation
Possible cause
Refer to
Rotation ripples
(speed fluctuations)
are large at low
speed.
Make gain adjustment in the Gain adjustment fault
following procedure:
1. Increase the auto tuning
response level.
2. Repeat acceleration and
deceleration several times
to complete auto tuning.
Chapter 7
Large load inertia
moment causes the
servo motor shaft to
oscillate side to side.
Gain adjustment fault
If the servo motor may be
run with safety, repeat
acceleration and
deceleration several times to
complete auto tuning.
Chapter 7
Position shift occurs
Pulse counting error, etc.
Confirm the cumulative
command pulses, cumulative due to noise.
feedback pulses and actual
servo motor position.
10 - 2
(2) in this
section
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
(2) How to find the cause of position shift
Positioning unit
Servo amplifier
(a) Output pulse
counter
Electronic gear (parameters No. 3, 4)
Machine
Servo motor
Q
P
(A)
(C) Servo-on (SON),
stroke end
(LSP/LSN) input
L
CMX
SM
CDV
(d) Machine stop
position M
(B)
(b) Cumulative command
pulses
C
Encoder
(c) Cumulative
feedback pulses
When a position shift occurs, check (a) output pulse counter, (b) cumulative command pulse display, (c)
cumulative feedback pulse display, and (d) machine stop position in the above diagram.
(A), (B) and (C) indicate position shift causes. For example, (A) indicates that noise entered the wiring
between positioning unit and servo amplifier, causing pulses to be mis-counted.
In a normal status without position shift, there are the following relationships:
1) Q P (positioning unit's output counter servo amplifier's cumulative command pulses)
CMX(parameter No.3)
2) P
CDV(parameter No.4)
C (cumulative command pulses electronic gear cumulative feedback pulses)
M (cumulative feedback pulses travel per pulse machine position)
3) C
Check for a position shift in the following sequence:
1) When Q P
Noise entered the pulse train signal wiring between positioning unit and servo amplifier,
causing pulses to be miss-counted. (Cause A)
Make the following check or take the following measures:
Check how the shielding is done.
Change the open collector system to the differential line driver system.
Run wiring away from the power circuit.
Install a data line filter. (Refer to (2)(a) Section 13.2.6.)
CMX
2) When P
C
CDV
During operation, the servo-on signal (SON) or forward/reverse rotation stroke end signal was
switched off or the clear signal (CR) and the reset signal (RES) switched on. (Cause C)
If a malfunction may occur due to much noise, increase the input filter setting (parameter No. 1).
3) When C
M
Mechanical slip occurred between the servo motor and machine. (Cause B)
10 - 3
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10.1.2 Speed control mode
No.
1
2
3
4
Start-up sequence
Power on
Fault
LED is not lit.
LED flickers.
Investigation
Possible cause
Refer to
1. Power supply voltage fault
Not improved if connectors
CN1A, CN1B, CN2 and CN3 2. Servo amplifier is faulty.
are disconnected.
Improved when connectors
CN1A and CN1B are
disconnected.
Power supply of CN1 cabling is
shorted.
Improved when connector
CN2 is disconnected.
1. Power supply of encoder
cabling is shorted.
2. Encoder is faulty.
Improved when connector
CN3 is disconnected.
Power supply of CN3 cabling is
shorted.
Alarm occurs.
Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause.
Section 10.2
Switch on servo-on
signal.
Alarm occurs.
Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause.
Section 10.2
Servo motor shaft is
not servo-locked
(is free).
1. Check the display to see if 1. Servo-on signal is not input.
(Wiring mistake)
the servo amplifier is
2. 24VDC power is not
ready to operate.
supplied to COM.
2. Check the external I/O
signal indication to see if
the servo-on (SON) signal
is ON.
Section 6.6
Switch on forward
rotation start (ST1)
or reverse rotation
start (ST2).
Servo motor does
not rotate.
Call the status display and
check the input voltage of
the analog speed command
(VC).
Analog speed command is 0V.
Section 6.2
Call the external I/O signal
display and check the
ON/OFF status of the input
signal.
LSP, LSN, ST1 or ST2 is off.
Section 6.6
Check the internal speed
commands 1 to 7
(parameters No. 8 to 10 72
to 75).
Set value is 0.
(1), Section
5.1.2
Check the internal torque
limit 1 (parameter No. 28).
Torque limit level is too low as
compared to the load torque.
When the analog torque
limit (TLA) is usable, check
the input voltage on the
status display.
Torque limit level is too low as
compared to the load torque.
Gain adjustment
Rotation ripples
(speed fluctuations)
are large at low
speed.
Make gain adjustment in the Gain adjustment fault
following procedure:
1. Increase the auto tuning
response level.
2. Repeat acceleration and
deceleration several
times to complete auto
tuning.
Chapter 7
Large load inertia
moment causes the
servo motor shaft to
oscillate side to side.
Gain adjustment fault
If the servo motor may be
run with safety, repeat
acceleration and
deceleration several times to
complete auto tuning.
Chapter 7
10 - 4
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10.1.3 Torque control mode
No.
1
2
3
Start-up sequence
Power on
Fault
LED is not lit.
LED flickers.
Investigation
Possible cause
Refer to
1. Power supply voltage fault
Not improved if connectors
CN1A, CN1B, CN2 and CN3 2. Servo amplifier is faulty.
are disconnected.
Improved when connectors
CN1A and CN1B are
disconnected.
Power supply of CN1 cabling is
shorted.
Improved when connector
CN2 is disconnected.
1. Power supply of encoder
cabling is shorted.
2. Encoder is faulty.
Improved when connector
CN3 is disconnected.
Power supply of CN3 cabling is
shorted.
Alarm occurs.
Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause.
Section 10.2
Switch on servo-on
signal.
Alarm occurs.
Refer to Section 10.2 and remove cause.
Section 10.2
Servo motor shaft is
free.
Call the external I/O signal
display and check the
ON/OFF status of the input
signal.
1. Servo-on signal is not input.
(Wiring mistake)
2. 24VDC power is not
supplied to COM.
Section 6.6
Switch on forward
rotation start (RS1)
or reverse rotation
start (RS2).
Servo motor does
not rotate.
Call the status display and
check the analog torque
command (TC).
Analog torque command is 0V.
Section 6.2
Call the external I/O signal
display and check the
ON/OFF status of the input
signal.
RS1 or RS2 is off.
Section 6.6
Check the internal speed
limits 1 to 7
(parameters No. 8 to 10 72
to 75).
Set value is 0.
Check the analog torque
command maximum output
(parameter No. 26) value.
Torque command level is too
low as compared to the load
torque.
Check the internal torque
limit 1 (parameter No. 28).
Set value is 0.
10 - 5
(1),
Section 5.1.2
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10.2 When alarm or warning has occurred
POINT
Configure up a circuit which will detect the trouble (ALM) signal and turn
off the servo-on (SON) signal at occurrence of an alarm.
10.2.1 Alarms and warning list
When a fault occurs during operation, the corresponding alarm or warning is displayed. If any alarm or
warning has occurred, refer to Section 10.2.2 or 10.2.3 and take the appropriate action.
1" in parameter No. 49 to output the alarm code in ON/OFF status across the corresponding
Set "
pin and SG. Warnings (AL.92 to AL.EA) have no alarm codes. Any alarm code is output at occurrence of
the corresponding alarm. In the normal status, the signals available before alarm code setting (CN1B-19:
ZSP, CN1A-18: INP or SA, CN1A-19: RD) are output.
The alarms marked
in the alarm deactivation column can be deactivated by the corresponding
operations.
(Note 2) Alarm code
Display
CN1B-19
pin
CN1A-18
pin
Name
CN1A-19
pin
Alarm deactivation
Press
Alarm
"SET" on
reset
Power
current
(RES)
OFF ON
alarm
signal
screen.
Warnings
Alarms
AL.10
0
1
0
Undervoltage
AL.12
0
0
0
Memory error 1
AL.13
0
0
0
Clock error
AL.15
0
0
0
Memory error 2
AL.16
1
1
0
Encoder error 1
AL.17
0
0
0
Board error
AL.19
0
0
0
Memory error 3
AL.1A
1
1
0
Motor combination error
AL.20
1
1
0
Encoder error 2
AL.24
1
0
0
Main circuit error
AL.25
1
1
0
Absolute position erase
AL.30
0
0
1
Regenerative error
AL.31
1
0
1
Overspeed
AL.32
1
0
0
Overcurrent
AL.33
0
0
1
Overvoltage
AL.35
1
0
1
Command pulse frequency error
AL.37
0
0
0
Parameter error
AL.45
0
1
1
Main circuit device overheat
AL.46
0
1
1
Servo motor overheat
AL.50
0
1
1
Overload 1
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
AL.51
0
1
1
Overload 2
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
AL.52
1
0
1
Error excessive
AL.8A
0
0
0
Serial communication time-out error
AL.8E
0
0
0
Serial communication error
88888
0
0
0
Watchdog
AL.92
Open battery cable warning
AL.96
Home position setting warning
AL.9F
Battery warning
AL.E0
Excessive regenerative warning
Removing the cause of occurrence
AL.E1
Overload warning
deactivates the alarm
AL.E3
Absolute position counter warning
automatically.
AL.E5
ABS time-out warning
AL.E6
Servo emergency stop warning
AL.E9
Main circuit off warning
AL.EA
ABS servo-on warning
Note: 1. Deactivate the alarm about 30 minutes of cooling time after removing the cause of occurrence.
2. 0: Pin-SG off (open)
1: Pin-SG on (short)
10 - 6
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
10.2.2 Remedies for alarms
CAUTION
When any alarm has occurred, eliminate its cause, ensure safety, then reset the
alarm, and restart operation. Otherwise, injury may occur.
If an absolute position erase alarm (AL.25) occurred, always make home position
setting again. Otherwise, misoperation may occur.
POINT
When any of the following alarms has occurred, always remove its cause
and allow about 30 minutes for cooling before resuming operation. If
operation is resumed by switching control circuit power off, then on to reset
the alarm, the servo amplifier and servo motor may become faulty.
Regenerative error (AL.30)
Overload 1 (AL.50)
Overload 2 (AL.51)
The alarm can be deactivated by switching power off, then on press the
"SET" button on the current alarm screen or by turning on the reset signal
(RES). For details, refer to Section 10.2.1.
When an alarm occurs, the trouble signal (ALM) switches off and the dynamic brake is operated to stop
the servomotor. At this time, the display indicates the alarm No.
The servo motor comes to a stop. Remove the cause of the alarm in accordance with this section. The
optional servo configuration software may be used to refer to the cause.
Display
AL.10
Name
Undervoltage
Definition
Cause
Action
Review the power supply.
Power supply
1. Power supply voltage is low.
voltage dropped.
2. There was an instantaneous
MR-J2S- A:160V or
control power failure of 60ms or
less
longer.
MR-J2S- A1:83V or 3. Shortage of power supply capacity
less
caused the power supply voltage to
drop at start, etc.
4. Power was restored after the bus
voltage had dropped to 200VDC.
(Main circuit power switched on
within 5s after it had switched off.)
5. Faulty parts in the servo amplifier Change the servo amplifier.
Checking method
Alarm (AL.10) occurs if power is
switched on after CN1A, CN1B
and CN3 connectors are
disconnected.
AL.12
Memory error 1 RAM, memory fault Faulty parts in the servo amplifier
AL.13
Clock error
AL.15
Memory error 2 EEP-ROM fault
AL.16
Encoder error 1 Communication
1. CN2 connector disconnected.
error occurred
2. Encoder fault
between encoder
3. Encoder cable faulty
and servo amplifier.
(Wire breakage or shorted)
Printed board fault
Change the servo amplifier.
Checking method
Alarm (any of AL.12,13 and 15)
occurs if power is switched on
after CN1A, CN1B and CN3
all connectors are disconnected.
10 - 7
Connect correctly.
Change the servo motor.
Repair or change cable.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Display
Name
Definition
Cause
AL.17
AL.19
Board error 2
CPU/parts fault
Faulty parts in the servo amplifier
Memory error 3 ROM memory fault
Checking method
Alarm (AL.17 or AL.19) occurs if
power is switched on after CN1A,
CN1B and CN3 connectors are
disconnected.
AL.1A
Motor
combination
error
Encoder error 2
AL.20
AL.24
Main circuit
error
AL.25
Absolute
position erase
AL.30
Regenerative
alarm
Wrong combination
of servo anplifier
and servo motor.
Communication
error occurred
between encoder
and servo amplifier.
Ground fault
occurred at the
servo motor outputs
(U,V and W phases)
of the servo
amplififer.
Action
Change the servo amplifier.
Wrong combination of servo
Use correct combination.
amplifier and servo motor connected.
1. Encoder connector (CN2)
disconnected.
2. Encoder cable faulty
(Wire breakage or shorted)
1. Power input wires and servo motor
output wires are in contact at
main circuit terminal block (TE1).
2. Sheathes of servo motor power
cables deteriorated, resulting in
ground fault.
3. Main circuit of servo amplifier
failed.
Checking method
AL.24 occurs if the servo is
switched on after disconnecting
the U, V, W power cables from
the servo amplifier.
Connect correctly.
Repair or change the cable.
Connect correctly.
Change the cable.
Change the servo amplifier.
Absolute position
data in error
1. Reduced voltage of super capacitor After leaving the alarm occurring for a few
in encoder
minutes, switch power off, then on again.
Always make home position setting again.
Change battery.
2. Battery voltage low
3. Battery cable or battery is faulty. Always make home position setting again.
Power was switched 4. Super capacitor of the absolute
After leaving the alarm occurring for a few
on for the first time
position encoder is not charged
minutes, switch power off, then on again.
in the absolute
Always make home position setting again.
position detection
system.
Permissible
1. Wrong setting of parameter No. 0 Set correctly.
regenerative power 2. Built-in regenerative brake
Connect correctly
of the built-in
resistor or regenerative brake
regenerative brake
option is not connected.
resistor or
3. High-duty operation or continuous 1. Reduce the frequency of positioning.
regenerative brake
regenerative operation caused the 2. Use the regenerative brake option of
option is exceeded.
larger capacity.
permissible regenerative power of
3. Reduce the load.
the regenerative brake option to
be exceeded.
Checking method
Call the status display and check
the regenerative load ratio.
Regenerative
transistor fault
4. Power supply voltage is abnormal. Review power supply
MR-J2S- A:260V or more
MR-J2S- A1:135V or more
5. Built-in regenerative brake
Change servo amplifier or regenerative
resistor or regenerative brake
brake option.
option faulty.
Change the servo amplifier.
6. Regenerative transistor faulty.
Checking method
1) The regenerative brake option
has overheated abnormally.
2) The alarm occurs even after
removal of the built-in
regenerative brake resistor or
regenerative brake option.
10 - 8
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Display
AL.31
Name
Overspeed
Definition
Cause
Speed has exceeded 1. Input command pulse frequency
the instantaneous
exceeded the permissible
permissible speed.
instantaneous speed frequency.
Action
Set command pulses correctly.
Increase acceleration/deceleration time
2. Small acceleration/deceleration
time constant caused overshoot to constant.
be large.
AL.32
AL.33
Overcurrent
Overvoltage
3. Servo system is instable to cause
overshoot.
1. Re-set servo gain to proper value.
2. If servo gain cannot be set to proper
value:
1) Reduce load inertia moment ratio; or
2) Reexamine acceleration/
deceleration time constant.
4. Electronic gear ratio is large
(parameters No. 3, 4)
Set correctly.
5. Encoder faulty.
Change the servo motor.
Current that flew is 1. Short occurred in servo amplifier
higher than the
output phases U, V and W.
permissible current 2. Transistor (IPM) of the servo
of the servo
amplifier faulty.
amplifier.
Checking method
Alarm (AL.32) occurs if power is
switched on after U,V and W
are disconnected.
Converter bus
voltage exceeded
400V.
Correct the wiring.
Change the servo amplifier.
3. Ground fault occurred in servo
amplifier output phases U, V and
W.
Correct the wiring.
4. External noise caused the
overcurrent detection circuit to
misoperate.
Take noise suppression measures.
1. Lead of built-in regenerative brake 1. Change lead.
2. Connect correctly.
resistor or regenerative brake
option is open or disconnected.
2. Regenerative transistor faulty.
Change servo amplifier
3. Wire breakage of built-in
regenerative brake resistor or
regenerative brake option
1. For wire breakage of built-in
regenerative brake resistor, change
servo amplifier.
2. For wire breakage of regenerative brake
option, change regenerative brake
option.
4. Capacity of built-in regenerative
brake resistor or regenerative
brake option is insufficient.
Add regenerative brake option or increase
capacity.
5. Power supply voltage high.
Review the power supply.
10 - 9
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Display
AL.35
AL.37
AL.45
AL.46
AL.50
Name
Definition
Input pulse
Command
pulse frequency frequency of the
command pulse is
error
too high.
Parameter
error
Overload 1
Action
Change the command pulse frequency to a
proper value.
2. Noise entered command pulses.
Take action against noise.
3. Command device failure
Change the command device.
Parameter setting is 1. Servo amplifier fault caused the
Change the servo amplifier.
wrong.
parameter setting to be rewritten.
Main circuit
Main circuit device
device overheat overheat
Servo motor
overheat
Cause
1. Pulse frequency of the command
pulse is too high.
Servo motor
temperature rise
actuated the
thermal protector.
2. Regenerative brake option not
used with servo amplifier was
selected in parameter No.0.
Set parameter No.0 correctly.
1. Servo amplifier faulty.
Change the servo amplifier.
The drive method is reviewed.
2. The power supply was turned on
and off continuously by overloaded
status.
3. Air cooling fan of servo amplifier
stops.
1. Exchange the cooling fan or the servo
amplifier.
2. Reduce ambient temperature.
1. Ambient temperature of servo
motor is over 40 .
Review environment so that ambient
temperature is 0 to 40 .
2. Servo motor is overloaded.
1. Reduce load.
2. Review operation pattern.
3. Use servo motor that provides larger
output.
3. Thermal protector in encoder is
faulty.
Change servo motor.
Load exceeded
1. Servo amplifier is used in excess
overload protection
of its continuous output current.
characteristic of
servo amplifier.
Load ratio 300%:
2. Servo system is instable and
2.5s or more hunting.
Load ratio 200%:
100s or more
3. Machine struck something.
1. Reduce load.
2. Review operation pattern.
3. Use servo motor that provides larger
output.
1. Repeat acceleration/
deceleration to execute auto tuning.
2. Change auto tuning response setting.
3. Set auto tuning to OFF and make gain
adjustment manually.
1. Review operation pattern.
2. Install limit switches.
4. Wrong connection of servo motor. Connect correctly.
Servo amplifier's output terminals
U, V, W do not match servo
motor's input terminals U, V, W.
5. Encoder faulty.
Checking method
When the servo motor shaft is
rotated slowly with the servo off,
the cumulative feedback pulses
should vary in proportion to the
rotary angle. If the indication
skips or returns midway, the
encoder is faulty.
10 - 10
Change the servo motor.
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Display
AL.51
Name
Overload 2
Definition
Cause
Machine collision or 1. Machine struck something.
the like caused max.
output current to
2. Wrong connection of servo motor.
flow successively for
Servo amplifier's output terminals
several seconds.
U, V, W do not match servo
Servo motor locked:
motor's input terminals U, V, W.
1s or more 3. Servo system is instable and
hunting.
4. Encoder faulty.
Action
1. Review operation pattern.
2. Install limit switches.
Connect correctly.
1. Repeat acceleration/deceleration to
execute auto tuning.
2. Change auto tuning response setting.
3. Set auto tuning to OFF and make gain
adjustment manually.
Change the servo motor.
Checking method
When the servo motor shaft is
rotated slowly with the servo off,
the cumulative feedback pulses
should vary in proportion to the
rotary angle. If the indication
skips or returns midway, the
encoder is faulty.
AL.52
Error excessive The droop pulse
value of the
deviation counter
exceeded the
encoder resolution
10 [pulse].
1. Acceleration/deceleration time
constant is too small.
Increase the acceleration/deceleration
time constant.
2. Torque limit value (parameter
No.28) is too small.
Increase the torque limit value.
3. Motor cannot be started due to
torque shortage caused by power
supply voltage drop.
1. Review the power supply capacity.
2. Use servo motor which provides larger
output.
4. Position control gain 1 (parameter Increase set value and adjust to ensure
No.6) value is small.
proper operation.
5. Servo motor shaft was rotated by
external force.
1. When torque is limited, increase the
limit value.
2. Reduce load.
3. Use servo motor that provides larger
output.
6. Machine struck something.
1. Review operation pattern.
2. Install limit switches.
7. Encoder faulty
Change the servo motor.
8. Wrong connection of servo motor. Connect correctly.
Servo amplifier's output terminals
U, V, W do not match servo
motor's input terminals U, V, W.
AL.8A
AL.8E
RS-232C or RS-422
Serial
communication communication
time-out error stopped for longer
than the time set in
parameter No.56.
Serial
Serial
communication communication
error occurred
error
between servo
amplifier and
communication
device (e.g. personal
computer).
1. Communication cable breakage.
Repair or change communication cable
2. Communication cycle longer than
parameter No. 56 setting.
Set correct value in parameter.
3. Wrong protocol.
Correct protocol.
1. Communication cable fault
(Open cable or short circuit)
Repair or change the cable.
2. Communication device (e.g.
personal computer) faulty
Change the communication device (e.g.
personal computer).
10 - 11
10. TROUBLESHOOTING
Display
88888
Name
Watchdog
Definition
CPU, parts faulty
Cause
Action
Fault of parts in servo amplifier
Change servo amplifier.
Checking method
Alarm (88888) occurs if power
is switched on after CN1A, CN1B
and CN3 connectors are
disconnected.
10.2.3 Remedies for warnings
If AL.E6 or AL.EA occurs, the servo off status is established. If any other warning occurs, operation can
be continued but an alarm may take place or proper operation may not be performed. Use the optional
servo configuration software to refer to the cause of warning.
Display
Name
Definition
Cause
Action
AL.92 Open battery
cable warning
Absolute position
1. Battery cable is open.
Repair cable or changed.
detection system battery 2. Battery voltage dropped to 2.8V or less. Change battery.
voltage is low.
AL.96 Home position
setting warning
Home position setting
could not be made.
1. Droop pulses remaining are greater
than the in-position range setting.
Remove the cause of droop pulse
occurrence
2. Command pulse entered after clearing
of droop pulses.
Do not enter command pulse
after clearing of droop pulses.
3. Creep speed high.
Reduce creep speed.
Battery voltage fell to 3.2V or less.
AL.9F Battery warning Voltage of battery for
absolute position
detection system reduced.
Change the battery.
Regenerative power increased to 85% or
1. Reduce frequency of
more of permissible regenerative power of
positioning.
built-in regenerative brake resistor or
2. Change regenerative brake
regenerative brake option.
option for the one with larger
Checking method
capacity.
Call the status display and check
3. Reduce load.
regenerative load ratio.
AL.E0 Excessive
regenerative
warning
There is a possibility that
regenerative power may
exceed permissible
regenerative power of
built-in regenerative
brake resistor or
regenerative brake
option.
AL.E1 Overload
warning
There is a possibility that Load increased to 85% or more of overload Refer to AL.50, AL.51.
alarm 1 or 2 occurrence level.
overload alarm 1 or 2
may occur.
Cause, checking method
Refer to AL.50,51.
AL.E3 Absolute position Absolute position encoder 1. Noise entered the encoder.
counter warning pulses faulty.
Take noise suppression
measures.
2. Encoder faulty.
Change servo motor.
AL.E5 ABS time-out
warning
1. PC lader program wrong.
Contact the program.
2. ST2 TLC signal mis-wiring
Connect properly.
AL.E6 Servo emergency EMG-SG are open.
stop warning
External emergency stop was made valid. Ensure safety and deactivate
(EMG-SG opened.)
emergency stop.
AL.E9 Main circuit off
warning
Switch on main circuit power.
Servo was switched on
with main circuit power
off.
AL.EA ABS
Servo-on signal (SON)
1. PC ladder program wrong.
servo-on warning turned on more than 1s 2. SON signal mis-wiring.
after servo amplifier had
entered absolute position
data transfer mode.
10 - 12
1. Correct the program.
2. Connect properly.
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
11.1 Servo amplifiers
(1) MR-J2S-10A to MR-J2S-60A
MR-J2S-10A1 to MR-J2S-40A1
[Unit: mm]
6 ( 0.24) mounting hole
70 (2.76)
20
B
6
(0.24)
([Unit: in])
135 (5.32)
Terminal layout
(Terminal cover open)
(0.79)
A
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
168 (6.61)
156 (6.14)
OPEN
OPEN
C
N
1
A
C
N
1
B
C
N
2
E
N
C
C
N
3
TE1
L1
L2
C
N
1
B
C
N
2
E
N
C
C
N
3
L3
(Note)
6 (0.24)
7 (0.28)
Name plate
C
N
1
A
U
V
W
TE2
PE terminal
6
(0.24)
4(0.16)
Variable dimensions
Servo amplifier
MR-J2S-10A(1)
MR-J2S-20A(1)
MR-J2S-40A(1)
MR-J2S-60A
A
B
Weight
[kg]([lb])
50 (1.97)
6 (0.24)
0.7 (1.54)
70 (2.76)
22 (0.87)
1.1 (2.43)
Note: This data applies to the 3-phase 200 to 230VAC and 1-phase 230VAC power supply models.
TE1
For 3-phase 200 to 230VAC and 1-phase 230VAC
For 1-phase 100 to 120VAC
L1
L2
L3
L1
U
V
W
U
Terminal screw: M4
Tightening torque: 1.24 [N m] (175.6 [oz in])
L2
V
W
Terminal screw: M4
Tightening torque: 1.24 [N m] (175.6 [oz in])
PE terminals
TE2
Front
D
C
P
L21
L11
Tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 [N m] (70.8 to 85.0 [oz in])
FRONT MSTB2,5/5-ST-5,08
(Phoenix Contact make)
11 - 1
Terminal screw: M4
Tightening torque: 1.24 [N m] (175.6 [oz in])
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
(2) MR-J2S-70A MR-J2S-100A
[Unit: mm]
70(2.76)
([Unit: in])
190(7.48)
20
6
(0.24)
70(2.76)
22
(0.87)
Terminal layout
(Terminal cover open)
(0.79)
6 ( 0.24)
mounting hole
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
7 (0.28)
6(0.24)
168(6.61)
156(6.14)
OPEN
OPEN
C
N
1
A
C
N
1
B
C
N
2
E
N
C
C
N
3
L1
L2
L3
U
V
W
6(0.24)
22
42
(0.87) (1.65)
Name plate
PE terminal
TE2
TE1
6(0.24)
6(0.24)
Weight
[kg]([lb])
Servo amplifier
MR-J2S-70A
1.7
(3.75)
MR-J2S-100A
TE1
L1
L2
L3
U
V
W
Terminal screw: M4
Tightening torque: 1.24 [N m] (175.6 [oz in])
TE2
FRONT MSTB2,5/6-ST-5,08
Front
D
C
P
L21
L11
N
(Phoenix Contact make)
Tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 [N m] (70.8 to 85.0 [oz in])
PE terminals
Terminal screw: M4
Tightening torque: 1.24 [N m] (175.6 [oz in])
11 - 2
C
N
1
A
C
N
1
B
C
N
2
E
N
C
C
N
3
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
(3) MR-J2S-200A MR-J2S-350A
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in])
6
(0.24)
6 ( 0.24)
mounting hole
6
(0.24)
70(2.76)
90(3.54)
78(3.07)
195(7.68)
Terminal layout
MITSUBISHI
168(6.61)
156(6.14)
MITSUBISHI
TE2
TE1
PE terminal
Fan air orientation
Weight
[kg]([lb])
Servo amplifier
MR-J2S-200A
2.0
(4.41)
MR-J2S-350A
PE terminals
TE1
L1
L2
L3
U
V
W
Terminal screw: M4
Tightening torque: 1.24 [N m] (175.6 [oz in])
Terminal screw: M4
Tightening torque: 1.24 [N m] (175.6 [oz in])
TE2
L11
L21
D
P
C
N
Terminal screw: M4
Tightening torque: 1.24 [N m] (175.6 [oz in])
11 - 3
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
(4) MR-J2S-500A
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in])
OPEN
(0.79)
(0.24) 130(5.12) (0.24)
70
6
6 (2.76)
118(4.65)
20
7.5
(0.5)
2- 6( 0.24)
mounting hole
200(7.87)
(0.19) 5
Terminal layout
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
235(9.25)
250(9.84)
OPEN
C
N
1
B
C
N
1
A
C
N
1
B
C
N
2
C
N
3
C
N
2
C
N
3
TE2
N.P.
N.P.
Fan
7.5
(0.5)
OPEN
TE1
C
N
1
A
Fan
6(0.24)
Fan air orientation
Servo amplifier
Weight
[kg]([lb])
MR-J2S-500A
4.9(10.8)
TE1
PE terminals
L1
L2
Built-in regenerative brake resistor
lead terminal fixing screw
Terminal screw : M4
Tightening torque : 1.2 [N m](169.9[oz in])
L3
C
P
N
U
V
W
Terminal screw : M4
Tightening torque : 1.2 [N m](169.9[oz in])
TE2
L11
L21
Terminal screw : M3.5
Tightening torque : 1.0 [N m](141.6[oz in])
11 - 4
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
(5) MR-J2S-700A
70
10 (2.76)
180(7.09)
160(6.23)
7.5
(0.5)
(0.39)
10
20
(0.39)
200(7.87)
138(5.43)
62
(0.79)
2- 6( 0.24)
mounting hole
(2.44)
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in])
6(0.24)
Terminal layout
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
OPEN
OPEN
C
N
1
A
C
N
1
B
C
N
1
A
C
N
1
B
C
N
2
C
N
3
C
N
2
C
N
3
350(13.8)
335(13.2)
TE2
OPEN
TE1
Fan
7.5
(0.5)
6 (0.24)
Fan air orientation
Servo amplifier
Weight
[kg]([lb])
MR-J2S-700A
7.2(15.9)
TE1
PE terminals
L1
L2
L3
C
P
N
U
V
W
Terminal screw : M4
Tightening torque : 1.2 [N m](169.9[oz in])
Built-in regenerative brake resistor
lead terminal fixing screw
Terminal screw : M4
Tightening torque : 1.2 [N m](169.9[oz in])
TE2
L11 Terminal screw : M3.5
Tightening torque : 1.0 [N m](141.6[oz in])
L21
11 - 5
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
11.2 Connectors
(1) Servo amplifier side
<3M >
(a) Soldered type
Model
Connector
Shell kit
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in])
: 10120-3000VE
: 10320-52F0-008
10.0(0.39)
12.0(0.47)
14.0
(0.55)
22.0 (0.87)
39.0 (1.54)
23.8 (0.94)
Logo, etc. are indicated here.
33.3 (1.31)
12.7(0.50)
(b) Threaded type
33.3
(1.31)
12.7
(0.50)
10.0
14.0
(0.55)
12.0
(0.47)
27.4 (1.08)
5.7
(0.22)
39.0 (1.54)
23.8
(0.94)
22.0
(0.87)
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in])
(0.39)
Model
Connector
: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit
: 10320-52A0-008
Note. This is not available as option
and should be user-prepared.
(c) Insulation displacement type
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in])
: 10120-6000EL
: 10320-3210-000
6.7
( 0.26)
20.9 (0.82)
11.5(0.45)
Model
Connector
Shell kit
Logo, etc. are indicated here.
42.0 (1.65)
33.0 (1.30)
2- 0.5 (0.02)
29.7 (1.17)
11 - 6
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
(2) Bus cable connector
<Honda Tsushin>
PCR-LS20LA1
PCR-LS20LA1W
10.4
(0.409)
13.0 (0.512)
20.6
(0.811)
14.2 (0.559)
38.5 (1.516)
HONDA
38.5 (1.516)
HONDA
1 12.2 1
(0.039) (0.48) (0.039)
23.0 (0.906)
RS
RS
27.4 (1.079)
32.0 (0.906)
1
1.9 (0.039) 12.2
27.4 (1.079)
32.0 (0.906)
(0.075)
1
(0.039)
(0.48)
Model
Number of Pins
20
[Unit: mm]
(Unit: in)
Connector
Case
PCR-S20FS (soldering type)
PCR-LS20LA1
PCR-S20F (insulation displacement type)
PCR-LS20LA1W
Crimping terminal: FHAT-002A
Note: PCR-S20F and PCR-LS20LA1W are not options and are to be supplied by the customer.
(3) Communication cable connector
<Japan Aviation Electronics Industry >
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in])
B
A
Fitting fixing screw G
E (max. diameter of
cable used)
F
C
D
Type
DE-C1-J6-S6
A
1
B
1
C
0.25
D
1
34.5(1.36)
19(0.75)
24.99(0.98)
33(1.30)
11 - 7
E
6(0.24)
F
Reference
G
18(0.71)
#4-40
11. OUTLINE DIMENSION DRAWINGS
MEMO
11 - 8
12. CHARACTERISTICS
12. CHARACTERISTICS
12.1 Overload protection characteristics
An electronic thermal relay is built in the servo amplifier to protect the servo motor and servo amplifier
from overloads. The operation characteristics of the electronic thermal relay are shown below. Overload 1
alarm (AL.50) occurs if overload operation performed is above the electronic thermal relay protection
curve shown below. Overload 2 alarm (AL.51) occurs if the maximum current flew continuously for
several seconds due to machine collision, etc. Use the equipment on the left-hand side area of the
continuous or broken line in the graph.
In a machine like the one for vertical lift application where unbalanced torque will be produced, it is
recommended to use the machine so that the unbalanced torque is 70% or less of the rated torque.
(1) MR-J2S-10A to MR-J2S-100A
HC-KFS series
HC-MFS series
HC-SFS series
HC-UFS series
1000
During rotation
Operation time[s]
100
During stop
10
1
0.1
0
50
150
100
200
250
300
Load ratio [%]
Fig 12.1 Electronic thermal relay protection characteristics 1
(2) MR-J2S-200A to MR-J2S-350A
1000
During rotation
100
Operation time [s]
HC-SFS series
HC-RFS series
HC-UFS series
10
During stop
1
0.1
0
50
100
150
200
250
300
Load ratio [%]
Fig 12.2 Electronic thermal relay protection characteristics 2
12 - 1
12. CHARACTERISTICS
(3) MR-J2S-500A MR-J2S-700A
HC-SFS series
HC-RFS series
HC-UFS series
10000
Operation time[s]
1000
During servo lock
During rotation
100
10
1
0
50
100
150
200
250
Load ratio [%]
Fig 12.3 Electronic thermal relay protection characteristics 3
12 - 2
300
12. CHARACTERISTICS
12.2 Power supply equipment capacity and generated loss
(1) Amount of heat generated by the servo amplifier
Table 12.1 indicates servo amplifiers' power supply capacities and losses generated under rated load.
For thermal design of an enclosure, use the values in Table 12.1 in consideration for the worst
operating conditions. The actual amount of generated heat will be intermediate between values at
rated torque and zero torque according to the duty used during operation. When the servo motor is run
at less than the maximum speed, the power supply capacity will be smaller than the value in the
table, but the servo amplifier's generated heat will not change.
Table 12.1 Power supply capacity and generated heat per servo amplifier at rated output
Servo amplifier
MR-J2S-10A(1)
MR-J2S-20A(1)
MR-J2S-40A(1)
MR-J2S-60A
MR-J2S-70A
MR-J2S-100A
MR-J2S-200A
MR-J2S-350A
MR-J2S-500A
MR-J2S-700A
Servo motor
(Note 1)
Power supply
capacity[kVA]
(Note 2)
Servo amplifier-generated heat[W]
Area required for heat dissipation
At rated torque
With servo off
[m2]
[ft2]
HC-KFS053 13
0.3
25
15
0.5
5.4
HC-MFS053
0.3
25
15
0.5
5.4
HC-UFS13
0.3
25
15
0.5
5.4
HC-KFS23
0.5
25
15
0.5
5.4
HC-MFS23
0.5
25
15
0.5
5.4
HC-UFS23
0.5
25
15
0.5
5.4
HC-KFS43
0.9
35
15
0.7
7.5
HC-MFS43
0.9
35
15
0.7
7.5
13
HC-UFS43
0.9
35
15
0.7
7.5
HC-SFS52
1.0
40
15
0.8
8.6
HC-SFS53
1.0
40
15
0.8
8.6
HC-KFS73
1.3
50
15
1.0
10.8
HC-MFS73
1.3
50
15
1.0
10.8
HC-UFS72 73
1.3
50
15
1.0
10.8
HC-SFS81
1.5
50
15
1.0
10.8
1.7
50
15
1.0
10.8
HC-SFS121
2.1
90
20
1.8
19.4
HC-SFS201
3.5
90
20
1.8
19.4
HC-SFS102
103
HC-SFS152
153
2.5
90
20
1.8
19.4
HC-SFS202
203
3.5
90
20
1.8
19.4
HC-RFS103
1.7
50
15
1.0
10.8
HC-RFS153
2.5
90
20
1.8
19.4
HC-UFS152
2.5
90
20
1.8
19.4
HC-SFS301
4.8
120
20
2.7
29.1
29.1
HC-SFS352
5.5
130
20
2.7
HC-RFS203
353
3.5
90
20
1.8
19.4
HC-UFS202
3.5
90
20
1.8
19.4
HC-SFS502
7.5
195
25
3.9
42.0
HC-RFS353
5.5
135
25
2.7
29.1
HC-RFS503
7.5
195
25
3.9
42.0
HC-UFS352
5.5
195
25
3.9
42.0
HC-UFS502
7.5
195
25
3.9
42.0
HC-SFS702
10.0
300
25
6.0
64.6
Note:1. Note that the power supply capacity will vary according to the power supply impedance.
2. Heat generated during regeneration is not included in the servo amplifier-generated heat. To calculate heat generated by
the regenerative brake option, use Equation 13.1 in Section 13.1.1.
12 - 3
12. CHARACTERISTICS
(2) Heat dissipation area for enclosed servo amplifier
The enclosed control box (hereafter called the control box) which will contain the servo amplifier
should be designed to ensure that its temperature rise is within 10 at the ambient temperature of
40 . (With a 5 (41 ) safety margin, the system should operate within a maximum 55 (131 )
limit.) The necessary enclosure heat dissipation area can be calculated by Equation 12.1:
P
............................................................................................................................................. (12.1)
K T
where, A
: Heat dissipation area [m2]
P
: Loss generated in the control box [W]
T : Difference between internal and ambient temperatures [ ]
K : Heat dissipation coefficient [5 to 6]
A
When calculating the heat dissipation area with Equation 12.1, assume that P is the sum of all losses
generated in the enclosure. Refer to Table 12.1 for heat generated by the servo amplifier. "A" indicates
the effective area for heat dissipation, but if the enclosure is directly installed on an insulated wall,
that extra amount must be added to the enclosure's surface area.
The required heat dissipation area will vary wit the conditions in the enclosure. If convection in the
enclosure is poor and heat builds up, effective heat dissipation will not be possible. Therefore,
arrangement of the equipment in the enclosure and the use of a fan should be considered.
Table 12.1 lists the enclosure dissipation area for each servo amplifier when the servo amplifier is
operated at the ambient temperature of 40 (104 ) under rated load.
(Outside)
(Inside)
Air flow
Fig. 12.4 Temperature distribution in enclosure
When air flows along the outer wall of the enclosure, effective heat exchange will be possible, because
the temperature slope inside and outside the enclosure will be steeper.
12 - 4
12. CHARACTERISTICS
12.3 Dynamic brake characteristics
Fig. 12.4 shows the pattern in which the servo motor comes to a stop when the dynamic brake is operated.
Use Equation 12.2 to calculate an approximate coasting distance to a stop. The dynamic brake time
constant varies with the servo motor and machine operation speeds. (Refer to Fig. 12.5)
Emergency stop(EMG)
ON
OFF
Time constant
V0
Machine speed
te
Time
Fig. 12.5 Dynamic brake operation diagram
Lmax
Lmax
Vo
JM
JL
te
JL
V0
te 1
....................................................................................................................... (12.2)
60
JM
: Maximum coasting distance .................................................................................................[mm][in]
: Machine rapid feedrate ......................................................................................... [mm/min][in/min]
: Servo motor inertial moment................................................................................. [kg cm2][oz in2]
: Load inertia moment converted into equivalent value on servo motor shaft..... [kg cm2][oz in2]
: Brake time constant (Fig. 12.5) ...................................................................................................... [s]
: Delay time of control section (Fig. 12.4)......................................................................................... [s]
(There is internal relay delay time of about 30ms.)
12 - 5
Time constant
[ms]
16
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
0
Time constant [s]
12. CHARACTERISTICS
23
43
13
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Speed [r/min]
0.02
0.018
0.016
0.014
0.012
0.01
0.008
0.006
0.004
0.002
0
0
23
73
053
43
13
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Speed [r/min]
a. HC-KFS series
b. HC-MFS series
0.045
0.04
121
0.03
Time constant [s]
Time constant [s]
0.035
201
0.025
0.02
301
0.015
0.01
81
0.005
0
0
50
500
Speed [r/min]
1000
0.04
0.035
Time constant [s]
0.06
353
103
0.02
0
0
50
52
502
0.015
0.01
0.005
0
0
102
152
500
1000 1500
Speed [r/min]
153
500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Speed [r/min]
0.018
0.016
0.014
0.012
0.01
0.008
0.006
103
2000
503
153
0.004
0.002
0
0
353
500
e. HC-SFS3000r/min series
203
1000 1500 2000 2500 3000
Speed [r/min]
f. HC-RFS series
0.07
0.06
73
0.1
0.09
0.08
0.07
0.06
0.05
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.01
0
Time constant [s]
0.05
Time constant [s]
Time constant [s]
203
53
0.04
202
d. HC-SFS2000r/min series
0.12
0.08
352
0.025
0.02
c. HC-SFS1000r/min series
0.1
702
0.03
72
502
352
0.04
0.03
43
0.02
23
13
152
0.01
202
0
0
500
1000 1500
Speed [r/min]
2000
0
50 500 10001500200025003000
Speed [r/min]
g. HC-UFS 2000r/min series
h. HC-UFS3000r/min series
Fig. 12.6 Dynamic brake time constant
12 - 6
12. CHARACTERISTICS
Use the dynamic brake at the load inertia moment indicated in the following table. If the load inertia
moment is higher than this value, the built-in dynamic brake may burn. If there is a possibility that the
load inertia moment may exceed the value, contact Mitsubishi.
Servo amplifier
Load inertia moment ratio [times]
MR-J2S-10A to MR-J2S-200A
MR-J2S-10A1 to MR-J2S-40A1
30
MR-J2S-350A
16
MR-J2S-500A
MR-J2S-700A
15
12.4 Encoder cable flexing life
The flexing life of the cables is shown below. This graph calculated values. Since they are not guaranteed
values, provide a little allowance for these values.
1 108
5 107
a
1 107
a : Long flexing-life encoder cable
MR-JCCBL M-H
MR-JHSCBL M-H
MR-ENCBL M-H
5 106
1 106
b : Standard encoder cable
MR-JCCBL M-L
MR-JHSCBL M-L
Flexing life [times]
5 105
1 105
5 104
1 104
b
5 103
1 103
4
7
10
20
40
70 100
Flexing radius [mm]
12 - 7
200
12. CHARACTERISTICS
MEMO
12 - 8
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
WARNING
Before connecting any option or auxiliary equipment, make sure that the charge
lamp is off more than 10 minutes after power-off, then confirm the voltage with a
tester or the like. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
CAUTION
Use the specified auxiliary equipment and options. Unspecified ones may lead to a
fault or fire.
13.1 Options
13.1.1 Regenerative brake options
CAUTION
The specified combinations of regenerative brake options and servo amplifiers
may only be used. Otherwise, a fire may occur.
(1) Combination and regenerative power
(Note) Regenerative power[W]
Servo amplifier
Built-in regenerative MR-RB032
brake resistor
[40 ]
MR-J2S-10A(1)
MR-RB12
[40 ]
MR-RB32
[40 ]
MR-RB30
[13 ]
MR-RB50
[13 ]
MR-RB31
[6.7 ]
MR-RB51
[6.7 ]
300
500
30
MR-J2S-20A(1)
10
30
100
MR-J2S-40A(1)
10
30
100
MR-J2S-60A
10
30
100
MR-J2S-70A
20
30
100
300
MR-J2S-100A
20
30
100
300
MR-J2S-200A
100
300
500
MR-J2S-350A
100
300
500
MR-J2S-500A
130
300
500
MR-J2S-700A
170
Note: This value is the regenerative power of the resistor and is not the rated power.
(2) Selection of the regenerative brake option
(a) Simple selection method
In horizontal motion applications, select the regenerative brake option as described below:
When the servo motor is run without load in the regenerative mode from the running speed to a
stop, the permissible duty is as indicated in Section 5.1 of the separately available Servo Motor
Instruction Manual.
For the servo motor with a load, the permissible duty changes according to the inertia moment of
the load and can be calculated by the following formula:
Permissible
duty
Permissible duty for servo motor with no load (value indication Section 5.1 in Servo Motor Instruction Manual)
(m 1)
ratedspeed
running speed
where m
2
[times/min]
load inertia moment/servo motor inertia moment
From the permissible duty, find whether the regenerative brake option is required or not.
Permissible duty number of positioning times [times/min]
Select the regenerative brake option out of the combinations in (1) in this section.
13 - 1
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Unbalance torque
Servo motor speed
(b) To make selection according to regenerative energy
Use the following method when regeneration occurs continuously in vertical motion applications or
when it is desired to make an in-depth selection of the regenerative brake option:
a. Regenerative energy calculation
Use the following table to calculate the regenerative energy.
Friction
torque
TF
Up
t1
Tpsa1
t2
Tpsd1
t3
Tpsa2
t4
Tpsd2
1)
( )
TU
Time
Down
Generated torque
M
tf(1 cycle)
No
(Driving)
2)
4)
8)
5)
6)
3)
(Regenerative)
7)
( )
Formulas for calculating torque and energy in operation
Torque applied to servo motor [N m]
Regenerative power
1)
T1
2)
T2
3)
T3
4), 8)
T4
5)
T5
6)
T6
7)
T7
(JL JM) N0
4
9.55 10
TU
1
TU
Tpsa1
TF
TF
(JL JM) N0
4
9.55 10
Energy [J]
E1
E2
1
TU
Tpsd1
TU
(JL JM) N0
4
9.55 10
TU TF
(JL JM) N0
4
9.55 10
Sum total of regenerative energies
1
Tpsa2
E3
TF
TU
TF
Tpsd2
TU
TF
N0 T1 Tpsa1
0.1047 N0 T2 t1
0.1047
N0 T3 Tpsd1
2
E4 0 (No regeneration)
0.1047
E5
N0 T5 Tpsa2
2
E6
1
0.1047
2
E7
0.1047 N0 T6 t3
0.1047
N0 T7 Tpsd2
2
Sum total of negative energies in 1) to 8)
b. Losses of servo motor and servo amplifier in regenerative mode
The following table lists the efficiencies and other data of the servo motor and servo amplifier in
the regenerative mode.
Servo amplifier
MR-J2S-10A(1)
MR-J2S-20A(1)
MR-J2S-40A(1)
MR-J2S-60A
MR-J2S-70A
MR-J2S-100A
MR-J2S-200A
MR-J2S-350A
MR-J2S-500A
MR-J2S-700A
Inverse efficiency[%]
55
70
85
85
80
80
85
85
90
90
Capacitor charging[J]
9
9
11
11
18
18
40
40
45
70
Inverse efficiency ( )
:Efficiency including some efficiencies of the servo motor and servo
amplifier when rated (regenerative) torque is generated at rated speed.
Since the efficiency varies with the speed and generated torque, allow for
about 10%.
Capacitor charging (Ec) :Energy charged into the electrolytic capacitor in the servo amplifier.
13 - 2
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Subtract the capacitor charging from the result of multiplying the sum total of regenerative energies by
the inverse efficiency to calculate the energy consumed by the regenerative brake option.
ER [J]
Es Ec
Calculate the power consumption of the regenerative brake option on the basis of single-cycle operation
period tf [s] to select the necessary regenerative brake option.
PR [W] ER/tf ............................................................................................(13.1)
(3) Connection of the regenerative brake option
Set parameter No.2 according to the open to be used.
Parameter No.0
Selection of regenerative
0: Not used.
2: MR-RB032
3: MR-RB12
4: MR-RB32
5: MR-RB30
6: MR-RB50
8: MR-RB31
9: MR-RB51
13 - 3
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(4) Connection of the regenerative brake option
The regenerative brake option will generate heat of about 100 . Fully examine heat dissipation,
installation position, used cables, etc. before installing the option. For wiring, use flame-resistant
cables and keep them clear of the regenerative brake option body. Always use twisted cables of max.
5m(16.4ft) length for connection with the servo amplifier.
(a) MR-J2S-350A or less
Always remove the wiring from across P-D and fit the regenerative brake option across P-C.
Servo amplifier
Always remove the lead from across P-D.
Regenerative brake option
D
P
P
C
C
G3
(Note) G4
G3 G4: Thermal protector terminals.
Abnormal heating will disconnect G3-G4.
5m (16.4 ft) max.
Note: Make up a sequence which will switch off the magnetic contactor
(MC) when abnormal heating occurs.
(b) MR-J2S-500A MR-J2S-700A
Always remove the wiring (across P-C) of the servo amplifier built-in regenerative brake resistor
and fit the regenerative brake option across P-C.
Servo amplifier
P
C
Always remove wiring (across P-C) of servo
amplifier built-in regenerative brake resistor.
Regenerative brake option
P
C
(Note 2)
5m(16.4ft) or less
G3
G4
G3 G4: Thermal protector terminals.
Abnormal heating will disconnect G3-G4.
Fan (Note 1)
Note 1. When using the MR-RB51, forcibly cool it with a cooling fan (1.0m3/min,
2. Make up a sequence which will switch off the magnetic contactor (MC)
when abnormal heating occurs.
13 - 4
92 or so).
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
When using the regenerative brake resistor option, remove the servo amplifier's built-in
regenerative brake resistor terminals (across P-C), fit them back to back, and secure them to the
frame with the accessory screw as shown below.
Mounting method
Accessory screw
For MR-J2S-500A
For MR-J2S-700A
Accessory screw
Accessory screw
For the MR-RB51 install the cooling fan as shown.
[Unit : mm(in)]
Fan installation screw hole dimensions
2-M3 screw hole
Top
(for fan installation)
Depth 10 or less
(Screw hole already
machined)
82.5
Terminal block
133
(5.24)
Thermal relay
(3.25)
Fan
Bottom
82.5
40 (1.58)
(3.25)
Vertical
installation
Horizontal installation
Installation surface
13 - 5
Recommended fan:
Toyo Denki's TL396A or equivalent
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(5) Outline drawing
(a) MR-RB032 MR-RB12
[Unit: mm (in)]
LA
12 (0.47)
6 (0.23)
6 (0.24) mounting hole
LB
144 (5.67)
5 (0.20)
6 (0.23)
12 (0.47)
G3
G4
P
C
6 (0.23)
TE1
168 (6.61)
156 (6.14)
MR-RB
1.6 (0.06)
20
(0.79)
LD
LC
Regenerative Regenerative Resistance
brake option
power[W]
[ ]
MR-RB032
30
40
MR-RB12
100
40
(b) MR-RB32 MR-RB30 MR-RB31
Variable dimensions
LA
LB
LC
LD
30
15
119
99
(1.18) (0.59) (4.69) (3.9)
40
15
169 149
(1.57) (0.59) (6.69) (5.87)
Terminal
block 10
17
(0.39)
(0.67)
7(0.28)
90
(3.54)
Weight
Regenerative
Resistance
power
[ ]
[kg]
[lb]
[W]
300
40
2.9
6.4
300
13
2.9
6.4
13 - 6
325(12.80)
350(13.78)
125(4.92)
150(5.91)
MR-RB32
MR-RB30
7 14 slot
Terminal
block
100(3.94)
Regenerative
brake option
1.1 2.4
[Unit: mm (in)]
79
(7.05)
318(12.52)
0.5 1.1
(c) MR-RB50 MR-RB51
[Unit: mm (in)]
3.2(0.13)
Weight
[kg] [lb]
2.3(0.09)
200(7.87)
Regenerative
brake option
MR-RB50
17(0.67)
12
(0.47)
7(0.28)
116(4.57)
128(5.04)
Weight
Regenerative
Resistance
power
[ ]
[kg] [lb]
[W]
500
13
5.6 12.3
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.1.2 Brake unit
POINT
The brake unit and resistor unit of other than 200V class are not
applicable to the servo amplifier.
The brake unit and resistor unit of the same capacity must be combined.
The units of different capacities may result in damage.
The brake unit and resistor unit must be installed on a vertical surface in
the vertical direction. If they are installed in the horizontal direction or on
a horizontal surface, a heat dissipation effect reduces.
The temperature of the resistor unit casing rises to higher than 100 . Do
not cause cables and combustibles to make contact with the casing.
The brake unit is the integration of the regenerative control and resistor and is connected to the bus
(across P-N) of the servo amplifier. As compared to the MR-RB regenerative brake option, the brake unit
can return larger power. Hence, use the this brake unit when the MR-RB cannot provide sufficient
regenerative brake capability.
(1) Selection
Permissible Continuous
Max. Instantaneous
Power [kw]
Current [kw]
FR-BR-15K
0.99
16.5
MR-J2S-500A
FR-BR-30K
1.99
33.4
MR-J2S-700A
Brake unit
Resistor unit
FR-BU-15K
FR-BU-30K
Applicable Servo Amplifier
(2) Connection example
Servo amplifier
No-fuse breaker
NFB
Power
supply
3-phase
200 to
230VAC
MC
Servo motor
L1
U
L2
V
L3
W
SM
L11
L21
(Note 2)
P
C
N
P/
N/
PR
PR
P
(Note 1)
(Note 1)
TH1
HA
HB
HC
Alarm
output
THS
FR-BU brake unit
TH2
FR-BR resistor unit
Note 1. Make up the external sequence to switch the power off when an alarm occurs or when the thermal relay is actuated.
2. Always remove the wiring (across P-C) of the servo amplifier built-in resistor.
13 - 7
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
The cables between the servo amplifier and brake unit and between the resistor unit and brake unit
should be as short as possible. The cables longer than 5m(16.404ft) should be twisted. If twisted, the
cables must not be longer than 10m(32.808ft).
The cable size should be equal to or larger than the recommended size. See the brake unit instruction
manual. You cannot connect one set of brake unit to two servo amplifiers or two sets of brake units to
one servo amplifier.
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
Brake unit
P
N
P
N
5m (16.404ft)
or less
Brake unit
Resistor unit
P
PR
P
PR
P
N
5m (16.404ft)
or less
Twist.
P
N
10m (32.808ft)
or less
P
PR
Resistor unit
Twist.
P
PR
10m (32.808ft)
or less
(3) Outside dimensions
(a) Brake unit (FR-BU)
[Unit : mm(in)]
D
F
K
(Note)
E
AA EE
A
BA
B
Operation
display
Control circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
E
C
F
K
Note: Ventilation ports are provided in both side faces and top face. The bottom face is open.
Brake Unit
A
AA
B
BA
C
D
E
EE
K
F
Approx.
Weight [kg(Ib)]
FR-BU-15K
100
(3.937)
60
(2.362)
240
(9.446)
225
(10.039)
128
(5.039)
6
(0.236)
18.5
(0.728)
6
(0.236)
48.5
(1.909)
7.5
(0.295)
2.4
(5.291)
FR-BU-30K
160
(6.299)
90
(3.543)
240
(9.446)
225
(10.039)
128
(5.039)
6
(0.236)
33.5
(1.319)
6
(0.236)
78.5
(3.091)
7.5
(0.295)
3.2
(7.055)
13 - 8
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(b) Resistor unit (FR-BR)
EE
(E)
204
Eye bolt (8.031)
33 (1.299)
C 5
(0.197)
AA 5 (0.197)
FR-BR-55K
Two eye bolts are provided
(as shown below).
40 (1.575)
EE
(E)
(Note)
(F)
Control circuit
terminals
Main circuit
terminals
BB 3 (0.118)
B 5 (0.197)
BA 1 (0.039)
K
2- D
(F)
[Unit : mm(in)]
A 5 (0.197)
Note: Ventilation ports are provided in both side faces and top face. The bottom face is open.
Resistor
Unit
Model
A
AA
FR-BR15K
170
(6.693)
100
(3.937)
FR-BR340
30K
(11.389)
270
(10.63)
C
D
E
EE
K
F
Approx.
Weight
[kg(Ib)]
450
432
410
(17.717) (17.008) (16.142)
220
(8.661)
6
(0.236)
35
(1.378)
6
(0.236)
1.6
(0.063)
20
(0.787)
15
(66.139)
600
582
560
(23.622) (22.913) (22.047)
220
(8.661)
10
(0.394)
35
(1.378)
10
(0.394)
2
(0.079)
20
(0.787)
30
(33.069)
B
BA
BB
13.1.3 Power return converter
(1) Selection
The converters can continuously return 75% of the nominal regenerative power. They are applied to
the servo amplifiers of the MR-J2S-500A and MR-J2S-700A.
converter
Nominal
Regenerative
Continuous energization time [sec]
Power return
Servo Amplifier
Power (kW)
FR-RC15
15
MR-J2S-500A
FR-RC30
30
MR-J2S-700A
13 - 9
500
300
200
100
50
30
20
0
50
75 100
150
Nominal regenerative power (%)
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(2) Connection example
Servo amplifier
L11
L21
NFB
Power factor improving reactor
MC
FR-BAL
L1
Power supply
3-phase
200V or 230VAC
L2
L3
VDD
COM
ALM
RA2
EM1
SG
SG
Always remove
wiring across P-C.
N
N/
P
C
P/
5m(16.4ft) or less
RDY
Ready
A
SE
RDY
output
R/L1
S/L2
B
B
C
C
Alarm
output
T/L3
R
RX
S
SX
Phase detection
terminals
T
TX
Power return converter
FR-RC
FR-RC
B C
Operation ready
RA2
EM1
OFF
ON
MC
MC
SK
13 - 10
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(3) Outside dimensions of the power return converters
[Unit : mm(in)]
Mounting foot (removable)
Mounting foot
movable
E
2- D hole
Rating plate
Display
panel
window
BA
B
Front cover
Cooling fan
K
F
EE
D
AA
C
A
Heat generation area outside mounting dimension
Power return
converter
A
AA
B
BA
C
D
E
EE
K
F
Approx.
Weight [kg(Ib)]
FR-RC-15K
270
200
450
432
195
(10.630) (7.874) (17.717) (17.008) (7.677)
10
(0.394)
10
(0.394)
8
(0.315)
3.2
(0.126)
87
(3.425)
19
(41.888)
FR-RC-30K
340
270
600
582
195
(13.386) (10.630) (23.622) (22.913) (7.677)
10
(0.394)
10
(0.394)
8
(0.315)
3.2
(0.126)
90
(3.543)
31
(68.343)
(4) Mounting hole machining dimensions
When the power return converter is fitted to a totally enclosed type box, mount the heat generating
area of the converter outside the box to provide heat generation measures. At this time, the mounting
hole having the following dimensions is machined in the box.
(AA)
[Unit : mm(in)]
(2- D hole)
Model
b
(BA)
(Mounting hole)
a
13 - 11
A
B
D
AA
BA
FR-RC-15K
260
412
10
200
432
(10.236) (16.220) (0.394) (7.874) (17.009)
FR-RC-30K
330
562
10
270
582
(12.992) (22.126) (0.394) (10.630) (22.913)
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.1.4 Cables and connectors
(1) Cable make-up
The following cables are used for connection with the servo motor and other models. Those indicated
by broken lines in the figure are not options.
Servo amplifier
9)
Operation
panel
CN1A CN1B
Personal
computer
CN2 CN3
14)
Controller
13)
10)
12)
11)
10)
11)
To U, V, W,
19) 20)
HC-KFS
HC-MFS
HC-UFS 3000 r/min
1) 2)
6)
HC-SFS
HC-RFS
HC-UFS 2000r/min
15) 16) 17) 18)
3) 4) 5)
7) 8)
13 - 12
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
No.
Product
Model
Description
Connector: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
(3M or equivalent)
Housing
: 1-172161-9
Connector pin : 170359-1
(AMP or equivalent)
Application
Standard
flexing life
IP20
1)
Standard encoder MR-JCCBL M-L
cable
Refer to (2) in this
section.
2)
Long flexing life
encoder cable
3)
Standard encoder MR-JHSCBL M-L Connector: 10120-3000VE
cable
Refer to (2) in this Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
(3M or equivalent)
section.
4)
Long flexing life
encoder cable
MR-JHSCBL M-H
Refer to (2) in this
section.
5)
IP65-compliant
encoder cable
MR-ENCBL M-H
Refer to (2) in this
section.
Connector: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
(3M or equivalent)
Connector
: MS3106A20-29S (D190)
Cable clamp
: CE3057-12A-3 (D265)
Back shell: CE02-20BS-S
(DDK)
Long flexing
life
IP65
IP67
Not oilresistant.
6)
Encoder
connector set
MR-J2CNM
Connector: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
(3M or equivalent)
Housing : 1-172161-9
Pin
: 170359-1
Cable clamp: MTI-0002
(AMP or equivalent)
IP20
7)
Encoder
connector set
MR-J2CNS
Connector: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
(3M or equivalent)
Connector: MS3106B20-29S
Cable clamp: MS3057-12A
(Japan Aviation Electronics)
IP20
8)
Encoder
connector set
MR-ENCNS
Connector: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
(3M or equivalent)
MR-JCCBL M-H
Refer to (2) in this
section.
Long flexing
life
IP20
Connector: MS3106B20-29S
Cable clamp: MS3057-12A
(Japan Aviation Electronics)
Standard
flexing life
IP20
Long flexing
life
13 - 13
Connector: MS3106A20-29S (D190) IP65
Cable clamp: CE3057-12A-3 (D265) IP67
Back shell: CE02-20BS-S
(DDK)
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
No.
9)
10)
11)
Product
16)
17)
18)
19)
Application
Connector: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
(3M or equivalent)
Junction
terminal block
cable
MR-J2TBL M
Refer to
Section13.1.5.
Connector: HIF3BA-20D-2.54R
(Hirose Electric)
Junction
terminal block
MR-TB20
Refer to Section 13.1.5.
Bus cable
MR-J2HBUS M
Refer to
section13.1.6.
Connector: 10120-6000EL
Shell kit: 10320-3210-000
(3M or equivalent)
Maintenance
junction card
MR-J2CN3TM
Refer to Section 13.1.6.
Communication
cable
MR-CPCATCBL3M Connector: 10120-6000EL
Refer to (3) in this Shell kit: 10320-3210-000
(3M or equivalent)
section.
Power supply
connector set
MR-PWCNS1
Refer to the Servo
Motor Instruction
Manual.
Connector: CE05-6A22-23SD-B-BSS
Cable clamp:CE3057-12A-2 (D265)
(DDK)
Power supply
connector set
MR-PWCNS2
Refer to the Servo
Motor Instruction
Manual.
Connector: CE05-6A24-10SD-B-BSS
Cable clamp: CE3057-16A-2 (D265)
(DDK)
Power supply
connector set
MR-PWCNS2
Refer to the Servo
Motor Instruction
Manual.
Plug: CE05-6A24-10SD-B-BSS
Cable clamp: CE3057-16A-2 (D265)
(DDK)
Brake connector
set
MR-BKCN
Refer to the Servo
Motor Instruction
Manual.
Plug: MS3106A10SL-4S (D190) (DDK)
Cable connector: YS010-5-8 (Daiwa Dengyo)
Power supply
connector set
MR-PWCNK1
Refer to the Servo
Motor Instruction
Manual.
Plug: 5559-04P-210
Terminal: 5558PBT3L (For AWG16)(6 pcs.)
(Molex make)
IP20
MR-PWCNK2
Plug: 5559-06P-210
Terminal: 5558PBT3L (For AWG16)(8 pcs.)
(Molex make)
For motor
with brake
IP20
14)
15)
Description
MR-J2CN1
12)
13)
Model
Control signal
connector set
Power supply
20) connector set
13 - 14
Qty: 2 each
Connector: 10120-6000EL
Shell kit: 10320-3210-000
(3M or equivalent)
For junction
terminal
block
connection
Connector: 10120-6000EL
Shell kit: 10320-3210-000
(3M or equivalent)
For
maintenance
junction
card
connection
Connector: DE-9SF-N
Case: DE-C1-J6-S6
(Japan Aviation Electronics)
For
connection
with PC-ATcompatible
personal
computer
EN
Standardcompliant
IP65 IP67
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(2) Encoder cable
CAUTION
If you have fabricated the encoder cable, connect it correctly.
Otherwise, misoperation or explosion may occur.
POINT
The encoder cable is not oil resistant.
Refer to Section 12.4 for the flexing life of the encoder cable.
Generally use the encoder cable available as our options. If the required length is not found in the
options, fabricate the cable on the customer side.
(a) MR-JCCBL M-L MR-JCCBL M-H
These encoder cables are used with the HC-KFS HC-MFS HC-UFS3000r/min series servo
motors.
1) Model explanation
Model: MR-JCCBL MSymbol
Specifications
L
Standard flexing life
H
Long flexing life
Symbol (Note) Cable length [m(ft)]
2
5
10
20
30
40
50
2 (6.56)
5 (16.4)
10 (32.8)
20 (65.6)
30 (98.4)
40 (131.2)
50 (164.0)
Note: MR-JCCBL M-H has
no 40(131.2) and 50m(164.0ft) sizes.
2) Connection diagram
For the pin assignment on the servo amplifier side, refer to Section 3.3.1.
Encoder cable
supplied to servo motor
Servo amplifier
Encoder connector
Encoder cable
(option or fabricated)
Servo motor
Encoder connector
172161-9 (AMP)
1
CN2
Encoder
50m(164.0ft) max.
MR
4
MD
7
P5
30cm
(0.98ft)
13 - 15
2
3
MRR BAT
5
6
MDR
8
9
LG SHD
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
MR-JCCBL2M-L
MR-JCCBL5M-L
MR-JCCBL2M-H
MR-JCCBL5M-H
Servo amplifier side
Encoder side
P5
LG
P5
LG
P5
LG
19
11
20
12
18
2
MR
MRR
MD
MDR
BT
LG
7
17
6
16
9
1
SD
Plate
MR-JCCBL10M-L
to
MR-JCCBL30M-L
Servo amplifier side
7
8
1
2
4
5
3
9
P5
LG
P5
LG
P5
LG
19
11
20
12
18
2
MR
MRR
MD
MDR
BT
LG
7
17
6
16
9
1
SD
Plate
MR-JCCBL10M-H
to
MR-JCCBL50M-H
Encoder side
Servo amplifier side
7
8
1
2
4
5
3
9
P5
LG
P5
LG
P5
LG
19
11
20
12
18
2
MR
MRR
MD
MDR
BT
LG
7
17
6
16
9
1
SD
Plate
Encoder side
7
8
1
2
4
5
3
9
When fabricating an encoder cable, use the recommended wires given in Section 13.2.1 and the
MR-J2CNM connector set for encoder cable fabrication, and fabricate an encoder cable as shown
in the following wiring diagram. Referring to this wiring diagram, you can fabricate an encoder
cable of up to 50m(164.0ft) length including the length of the encoder cable supplied to the servo
motor.
When the encoder cable is to be fabricated by the customer, the wiring of MD and MDR is not
required.
Refer to Chapter 3 of the servo motor instruction guide and choose the encode side connector
according to the servo motor installation environment.
For use of AWG24
Servo amplifier side
(3M)
Encoder side
P5
LG
P5
LG
P5
LG
19
11
20
12
18
2
MR 7
MRR 17
For use of AWG22
Servo amplifier side
(3M)
Encoder side
7
P5
LG
P5
LG
P5
LG
8
1
2
19
11
20
12
18
2
MR 7
MRR 17
7
8
1
2
BT
LG
9
1
3
BT
LG
9
1
3
SD
Plate
9
SD
Plate
9
13 - 16
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(b) MR-JHSCBL M-L MR-JHSCBL M-H MR-ENCBL M-H
These encoder cables are used with the HC-SFS HC-RFS HC-UFS2000r/min series servo motors.
1) Model explanation
Model: MR-JHSCBL MSymbol
Specifications
L
Standard flexing life
H
Long flexing life
Symbol
Cable length [m(ft)]
2
5
10
20
30
40
50
2 (6.56)
5 (16.4)
10 (32.8)
20 (65.6)
30 (98.4)
40 (131.2)
50 (164.0)
Note: MR-JHSCBL M-L has
no 40(131.2) and 50m(164.0ft) sizes.
Model: MR-ENCBL M-H
Long flexing life
Symbol
Cable length [m(ft)]
2
5
10
20
30
40
50
2 (6.56)
5 (16.4)
10 (32.8)
20 (65.6)
30 (98.4)
40 (131.2)
50 (164.0)
2) Connection diagram
For the pin assignment on the servo amplifier side, refer to Section 3.3.1.
Servo amplifier
Encoder connector
Encoder cable
(Optional or fabricated)
CN2
Encoder connector
Servo motor
L
Encoder
50m(164.0ft) max.
13 - 17
AB
M
N
C
P D
K T
J
S R E
H
F
G
Pin Signal
MD
A
B MDR
C
MR
D MRR
E
F
BAT
G
LG
H
J
Pin Signal
K
L
M
N SHD
P
R
LG
S
P5
T
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
MR-JHSCBL2M-L
MR-JHSCBL5M-L
MR-JHSCBL2M-H
MR-JHSCBL5M-H
MR-ENCBL2M-H
MR-ENCBL5M-H
Servo amplifier side
Encoder side
P5
LG
P5
LG
MR
MRR
P5
LG
BAT
LG
SD
19
11
20
12
7
17
18
2
9
1
Servo amplifier side
S
Plate
MR-JHSCBL10M-H
to
MR-JHSCBL50M-H
MR-ENCBL10M-H
to
MR-ENCBL50M-H
Encoder side Servo amplifier side
Encoder side
MR-JHSCBL10M-L
to
MR-JHSCBL30M-L
19
11
20
12
18
2
S
P5
LG
P5
LG
P5
LG
19
11
20
12
18
2
S
R
C
D
P5
LG
P5
LG
P5
LG
F
G
MR 7
MRR 17
R
C
D
MR 7
MRR 17
R
C
D
BAT 9
LG 1
F
G
BAT 9
LG 1
F
G
SD
N
SD
N
N
(Note) Use of AWG24
(Less than 10m(32.8ft))
Note: AWG28 can be used for 5m(16.4ft) or less.
Plate
Use of AWG22
(10m(32.8ft) to 50m(164.0ft))
Plate
Use of AWG24
(10m(32.8ft) to 50m(164.0ft))
When fabricating an encoder cable, use the recommended wires given in Section 13.2.1 and the
MR-J2CNS connector set for encoder cable fabrication, and fabricate an encoder cable in
accordance with the optional encoder cable wiring diagram given in this section. You can
fabricate an encoder cable of up to 50m(164.0ft) length.
Refer to Chapter 3 of the servo motor instruction guide and choose the encode side connector
according to the servo motor installation environment.
13 - 18
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(3) Communication cable
POINT
This cable may not be used with some personal computers. After fully
examining the signals of the RS-232C connector, refer to this section and
fabricate the cable.
(a) Model definition
Model : MR-CPCATCBL3M
Cable length 3[m](10[ft])
(b) Connection diagram
MR-CPCATCBL3M
Personal computer side
TXD
3
RXD
2
GND
RTS
CTS
5
7
8
DSR
DTR
6
4
D-SUB9 pins
Servo amplifier side
Plate
2
1
12
11
FG
RXD
LG
TXD
LG
Half-pitch 20 pins
When fabricating the cable, refer to the connection diagram in this section.
The following must be observed in fabrication:
1) Always use a shielded, multi-core cable and connect the shield with FG securely.
2) The optional communication cable is 3m(10ft) long. When the cable is fabricated, its maximum
length is 15m(49ft) in offices of good environment with minimal noise.
13 - 19
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.1.5 Junction terminal block (MR-TB20)
POINT
When using the junction terminal block, you cannot use SG of CN1A-20
and CN1B-20. Use SG of CN1A-4 and CN1B-4.
(1) How to use the junction terminal block
Always use the junction terminal block (MR-TB20) with the junction terminal block cable (MRJ2TBL M) as a set. A connection example is shown below:
Servo amplifier
Junction terminal block
MR-TB20
Cable clamp
(AERSBAN-ESET)
CN1A
or
CN1B
Junction terminal
block cable
(MR-J2TBL05M)
Ground the junction terminal block cable on the junction terminal block side with the standard
accessory cable clamp fitting (AERSBAN-ESET). For the use of the cable clamp fitting, refer to Section
13.2.6, (2)(c).
(2) Terminal labels
Among the terminal block labels for the junction terminal block, use the two for the MR-J2S-A(MR-J2A). When changing the input signals in parameters No. 43 to 48, refer to (4) in this section and Section
3.3 and apply the accessory signal seals to the labels.
17
19
18
15
8
9
7
6
SG TLA RES LSP ALM SD
5
2
3
0
16
14
13
TL P15R COM EMG LSN ZSP
VC DO1 TLC PC
4
SD
12
10
11
LG VDD SON
19
6
8
OP LAR INP
7
NG
9
17
18
15
16
SG
5
14
CR
4
2
1
NP P15R LA
0
2) For CN1B
LB COM OPC PG LZR LBR RD
13
12
10
LZ
3
PP
11
LG
1
1) For CN1A
(3) Outline drawing
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in.])
126(4.96)
60(2.36)
7
46.2(1.82)
2- 4.5(0.18)
(0.28)
MITSUBISHI
MR-TB20
50(1.97)
117(4.61)
13 - 20
Terminal screw: M3.5
Applicable cable: Max. 2mm 2
(Crimping terminal width: 7.2mm (0.283 in) max.)
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(4) Junction terminal block cable (MR-J2TBL M)
Model : MR-J2TBL
M
Symbol Cable length[m(ft)]
05
0.5 (1.64)
1
1 (3.28)
Junction terminal block side connector (Hirose Electric)
HIF3BA-20D-2.54R (connector)
Servo amplifier side (CN1A CN1B) connector (3M)
10120-6000EL (connector)
10320-3210-000 (shell kit)
(Note) Symbol
Junction terminal
Position control mode Speed control mode Torque control mode block terminal No.
For CN1A For CN1B For CN1A For CN1B For CN1A For CN1B
10
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
LG
0
VC
NP
VC
VLA
11
PP
VDD
VDD
VDD
1
P15R
DO1
DO1
DO1
P15R
P15R
12
LZ
LZ
SON
LZ
SON
SON
2
LA
LA
TLC
LA
TLC
VLC
13
LB
LB
LB
SP2
SP2
3
SP1
SP1
CR
PC
ST1
RS2
14
COM
COM
TLC
COM
ST2
RS1
4
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
SG
15
P15R
P15R
P15R
OPC
5
TLA
TLA
TC
NG
16
PG
COM
COM
COM
6
OP
OP
OP
RES
RES
RES
17
LZR
LZR
EMG
LZR
EMG
EMG
7
LAR
LAR
LAR
LSP
LSP
18
LBR
LBR
LSN
LBR
LSN
8
SA
INP
ALM
ALM
ALM
19
RD
RD
RD
ZSP
ZSP
ZSP
9
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
SD
Pin
No.
Pin
No.
B1
A1
B2
A2
B3
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
B7
A7
B8
A8
B9
A9
B10
A10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Plate
Note: The labels supplied to the junction terminal block are designed for the position control mode. When using the junction
terminal block in the speed or torque control mode, change the signal abbreviations using the accessory signal seals.
13 - 21
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.1.6 Maintenance junction card (MR-J2CN3TM)
(1) Usage
The maintenance junction card (MR-J2CN3TM) is designed for use when a personal computer and
analog monitor outputs are used at the same time.
Servo amplifier
Maintenance junction card (MR-J2CN3TM)
Bus cable
MR-J2HBUS M
CN3B
CN3
Communication cable
CN3A
CN3C
A1 A2 A3 A4 B4 B3 B2 B1 B5 B6 A5 A6
VDD EM1 DI MBR
SG PE
COM
EMGO
LG LG MO1 MO2
Analog monitor output 2
Not used
Analog monitor output 1
(2) Connection diagram
TE1
B5
CN3A
CN3B
CN3C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Shell
Shell
LG
LG
MO1
MO2
B6
A5
1
A6
3
4
5
A1
A2
10
VDD
COM
EM1
DI
A3
13
14
15
A4
B4
19
20
B3
Shell
B1
MBR
EMGO
SG
PE
B2
Not used
(3) Outline drawing
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in])
CN3A
CN3B
CN3C
A1
A6
B1
75(2.95)
MR-J2CN3TM
2- 5.3(0.21)(mounting hole)
B6
TE1
3(0.12)
88(3.47)
41.5(1.63)
100(3.94)
Weight: 110g(0.24Ib)
13 - 22
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(4) Bus cable (MR-J2HBUS
M)
Model: MR-J2HBUS M
Symbol
Cable length [m(ft)]
05
1
5
0.5 (1.64)
1 (3.28)
5 (16.4)
MR-J2HBUS05M
MR-J2HBUS1M
MR-J2HBUS5M
10120-6000EL (connector)
10320-3210-000 (shell kit)
1
11
2
12
3
13
4
14
5
15
6
16
7
17
8
18
9
19
10
20
1
11
2
12
3
13
4
TD
14
TD*
5
LG
15
LG
6
16
EMG 7
EMG* 17
8
18
BAT 9
19
10
20
LG
LG
RD
RD*
SD
10120-6000EL (connector)
10320-3210-000 (shell kit)
Plate
Plate
13.1.7 Battery (MR-BAT, A6BAT)
Use the battery to build an absolute position detection system.
13 - 23
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.1.8 Servo configurations software
The servo configuration software uses the communication function of the servo amplifier to perform
parameter setting changes, graph display, test operation, etc. on a personal computer.
(1) Specifications
Item
Description
Communication signal
Baudrate [bps]
Conforms to RS-232C.
57600, 38400, 19200, 9600
Batch display, high-speed display, graph display
(Minimum resolution changes with the processing speed of the personal computer.)
Monitor
Alarm
Alarm display, alarm history, data display at alarm occurrence
Diagnostic
External I/O signal display, no-rotation reason display, cumulative power-on time display,
software number display, motor information display, tuning data display, ABS data display,
automatic VC offset display, shaft name setting.
Parameters
Data setting, list display, change list display, detailed information display, turning
Jog operation, positioning operation, motor-less operation, output signal forced output, program
operation in simple language.
Test operation
Advanced function
File operation
Machine analyzer, gain search, machine simulation.
Data read, save, print
Others
Automatic operation, station setting, help display
(2) System configuration
(a) Components
To use this software, the following components are required in addition to the servo amplifier and
servo motor:
Model
(Note 1) Description
(Note 2)
Personal
computer
IBM PC-AT compatible on which Windows 95 or 98 (English) runs
(Pentium133MHz or higher recommended).Memory: 16MB or more, hard disk free space: 20MB or more,
serial port used.
OS
Display
Keyboard
Windows 95/98 (English)
800
600 or more, 256-color or more display which can be used with Windows 95/98 (English).
Which can be connected to the personal computer.
Mouse
Which can be used with Windows 95/98(English). Note that a serial mouse is not used.
Printer
Which can be used with Windows 95/98(English).
Communication
cable
MR-CPCATCBL3M
When this cannot be used, refer to (3) Section 13.1.4 and fabricate.
RS-232C/RS-422
converter
Needed to use the RS-422 multidrop communication function of the servo amplifier.
Note: 1. Windows is a trade mark of Microsoft Corporation.
2. On some personal computers, this software may not run properly.
13 - 24
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(b) Configuration diagram
1) When using RS-232C
Servo amplifier
Personal computer
Communication cable
CN3
CN2
Servo motor
To RS-232C
connector
2) When using RS-422
You can make multidrop connection of up to 32 axes.
Servo amplifier
Personal computer
RS-232C/RS-422
(Note)
converter
Communication cable
CN3
CN2
Servo motor
(Axis 1)
To RS-232C
connector
Servo amplifier
CN3
CN2
Servo motor
(Axis 2)
Servo amplifier
CN3
CN2
(Axis 32)
Note: For cable connection, refer to section 14.1.1.
13 - 25
Servo motor
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.2 Auxiliary equipment
Always use the devices indicated in this section or equivalent. To comply with the EN Standard or UL/CUL Standard, use the products which conform to the corresponding standard.
13.2.1 Recommended wires
(1) Wires for power supply wiring
The following diagram shows the wires used for wiring. Use the wires given in this section or
equivalent.
3) Motor power supply lead
1) Main circuit power supply lead
Servo motor
Servo amplifier
Power supply
L1
U
U
L2
V
V
L3
W
W Motor
L11
6) Brake unit lead or
Return converter
L21
5) Electromagnetic
brake lead
2) Control power supply lead
Brake unit or
Return converter
ElectroB1 magnetic
B2 brake
N
Regenerative brake option
C
Encoder
P
Encoder cable (refer to Section 12.1.4)
4) Regenerative brake option lead
The following table lists wire sizes. The wires used assume that they are 600V vinyl wires and the
wiring distance is 30m(98.4ft) max. If the wiring distance is over 30m(98.4ft), choose the wire size in
consideration of voltage drop.
The alphabets (a, b, c) in the table correspond to the crimping terminals (Table 13.2) used to wire the
servo amplifier. For connection with the terminal block TE2 of the MR-J2S-100A or less, refer to
Section 3.11.
The servo motor side connection method depends on the type and capacity of the servo motor. Refer to
Section 3.8.
Table 13.1 Recommended wires
Servo amplifier
MR-J2S-10A(1)
MR-J2S-20A(1)
MR-J2S-40A(1)
MR-J2S-60A
MR-J2S-70A
MR-J2S-100A
MR-J2S-200A
MR-J2S-350A
MR-J2S-500A
MR-J2S-700A
(Note 1) Wires [mm2]
1) L1
L2
L3
2) L11
L21
1.25 (AWG16)
5.5 (AWG10) : b
8 (AWG8) : c
V
W
4) P
C
5) B1 B2
1.25 (AWG16) : a
2 (AWG14) : a
3.5 (AWG12) : b
3) U
2 (AWG14) : a
3.5 (AWG12) : b
(Note 2)
5.5 (AWG10) : b
5.5 (AWG10) : b
8 (AWG8) : c
2 (AWG14) : a
3.5(AW12) : c
Note: 1. For the crimping terminals and applicable tools, refer to table 13.2:
2. 3.5mm2 for use of the HC-RFS203 servo motor.
13 - 26
1.25 (AWG16)
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Use wires 6) of the following sizes with the brake unit (FR-BU) and power return converter (FR-RC).
Model
Wires[mm2]
FR-BU-15K
FR-BU-30K
FR-BU-55K
FR-RC-15K
3.5(AWG12)
5.5(AWG10)
14(AWG6)
14(AWG6)
Table 13.2 Recommended crimping terminals
Servo amplifier side crimping terminals
Crimping terminal
Applicable tool
Maker name
Symbol
a
b
32959
32968
c
FVD8-5
47387
59239
Body YF-1 E-4
Head YNE-38
Die DH-111 DH-121
AMP
Japan Solderless
Terminal
(2) Wires for cables
When fabricating a cable, use the wire models given in the following table or equivalent:
Table 13.3 Wires for option cables
Type
Length
[m(ft)]
Model
MR-JCCBL
MR-JCCBL
Encoder cable
M-L
M-H
MR-JHSCBL
MR-JHSCBL
MR-ENCBL
M-L
M-H
M-H
Communication
MR-CPCATCBL3M
cable
Bus cable
MR-J2HBUS
M
2 to 10
(6.56 to 32.8)
20 30
(65.6 98.4)
2 5
(6.56 16.4)
10 to 50
(32.8 to 164)
2 5
(6.56 16.4)
10 to 30
(32.8 to 98.4)
2 5
(6.56 16.4)
10 to 50
(32.8 to 164)
2 5
(6.56 16.4)
10 to 50
(32.8 to 164)
Core size Number
[mm2]
of Cores
0.08
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.08
0.3
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.2
3 (9.84)
0.08
0.5 to 5
(1.64 to 16.4)
0.08
12
(6 pairs)
12
(6 pairs)
12
(6 pairs)
14
(7 pairs)
8
(4 pairs)
12
(6 pairs)
8
(4 pairs)
12
(6 pairs)
8
(4 pairs)
12
(6 pairs)
6
(3 pairs)
20
(10 pairs)
Characteristics of one core
Structure
Conductor
[Wires/mm] resistance[ /mm]
Insulation coating
ODd[mm] (Note 1)
(Note 3)
Finishing
OD [mm]
7/0.127
222
0.38
5.6
12/0.18
62
1.2
8.2
40/0.08
105
0.88
7.2
40/0.08
105
0.88
8.0
7/0.127
222
0.38
4.7
12/0.18
62
1.2
8.2
40/0.08
105
0.88
6.5
40/0.08
105
0.88
7.2
40/0.08
105
0.88
6.5
40/0.08
105
0.88
7.2
7/0.127
222
0.38
4.6
7/0.127
222
0.38
6.1
Note 1: d is as shown below:
d
Conductor Insulation sheath
2: Purchased from Toa Electric Industry
3: Standard OD. Max. OD is about 10% greater.
13 - 27
Wire model
UL20276 AWG#28
6pair (BLAC)
UL20276 AWG#22
6pair (BLAC)
(Note 2)
A14B2343 6P
(Note 2)
A14B0238 7P
UL20276 AWG#28
4pair (BLAC)
UL20276 AWG#22
6pair (BLAC)
(Note 2)
A14B2339 4P
(Note 2)
A14B2343 6P
(Note 2)
A14B2339 4P
(Note 2)
A14B2343 6P
UL20276 AWG#28
3pair (BLAC)
UL20276 AWG#28
10pair (CREAM)
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.2.2 No-fuse breakers, fuses, magnetic contactors
Always use one no-fuse breaker and one magnetic contactor with one servo amplifier. When using a fuse
instead of the no-fuse breaker, use the one having the specifications given in this section.
Servo amplifier
No-fuse breaker
MR-J2S-10A(1)
NF30 type 5A
MR-J2S-20A
NF30 type 5A
MR-J2S-40A 20A1 NF30 type 10A
MR-J2S-60A 40A1 NF30 type 15A
MR-J2S-70A
NF30 type 15A
MR-J2S-100A
NF30 type 15A
MR-J2S-200A
NF30 type 20A
MR-J2S-350A
NF30 type 30A
MR-J2S-500A
NF50 type 50A
MR-J2S-700A
NF100 type 75A
Class
Fuse
Current [A]
K5
K5
K5
K5
K5
K5
K5
K5
K5
K5
10
10
15
20
20
25
40
70
125
150
Voltage [V]
Magnetic contactor
S-N10
AC250
S-N18
S-N20
S-N35
S-N50
13.2.3 Power factor improving reactors
The input power factor is improved to be about 90%. For use with a 1-phase power supply, it may be
slightly lower than 90%.
[Unit : mm]
FR-BAL
NFB
3-phase
200 to 230VAC
H 5
W
NFB
Installation screw
C
MC
1-phase
230VAC
D 5
Servo amplifier
R
X
S
Y
T
Z
FR-BAL
D1 5
RX S Y T Z
MC
L1
L2
L3
Servo amplifier
R
X
S
Y
T
Z
L1
L2
L3
W1
FR-BAL
NFB
1-phase
100 to120VAC
Servo amplifier
Model
R
X
S
Y
T
Z
Dimensions [mm (in) ]
W
W1
H
D
D1
Servo amplifier
MC
C
L1
L2
Mounting Terminal
screw size screw size
Weight
[kg (lb)]
MR-J2S-10A(1)/20A
FR-BAL-0.4K
135 (5.31) 120 (4.72) 115 (4.53)
59 (2.32)
45 (1.77)
7.5 (0.29)
M4
M3.5
2.0 (4.4)
MR-J2S-40A/20A1
FR-BAL-0.75K
135 (5.31) 120 (4.72) 115 (4.53)
69 (2.72)
57 (2.24)
7.5 (0.29)
M4
M3.5
2.8 (6.17)
MR-J2S-60A/70A/40A1 FR-BAL-1.5K
160 (6.30) 145 (5.71) 140 (5.51)
71 (2.79)
55 (2.17)
7.5 (0.29)
M4
M3.5
3.7 (8.16)
MR-J2S-100A
160 (6.30) 145 (5.71) 140 (5.51)
91 (3.58)
75 (2.95)
7.5 (0.29)
M4
M3.5
5.6 (12.35)
FR-BAL-2.2K
MR-J2S-200A
FR-BAL-3.7K
220 (8.66) 200 (7.87) 192 (7.56)
90 (3.54)
70 (2.76)
10 (0.39)
M5
M4
8.5 (18.74)
MR-J2S-350A
FR-BAL-7.5K
220 (8.66) 200 (7.87) 194 (7.64)
120 (4.72) 100 (3.94)
10 (0.39)
M5
M5
14.5 (32.0)
MR-J2S-500A
FR-BAL-11K
280 (11.02) 255 (10.04) 220 (8.66)
135 (5.31) 100 (3.94) 12.5 (0.49)
M6
M6
19 (41.9)
MR-J2S-700A
FR-BAL-15K
295 (11.61) 270 (10.62) 275 (10.83) 133 (5.24) 110 (4.33) 12.5 (0.49)
M6
M6
27 (59.5)
13 - 28
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.2.4 Relays
The following relays should be used with the interfaces:
Interface
Selection example
Relay used especially for switching on-off analog input To prevent defective contacts , use a relay for small signal
command and input command (interface DI-1) signals (twin contacts).
(Ex.) Omron : type G2A , MY
Relay used for digital output signals (interface DO-1)
Small relay with 12VDC or 24VDC of 40mA or less
(Ex.) Omron : type MY
13.2.5 Surge absorbers
A surge absorber is required for the electromagnetic brake. Use the following surge absorber or equivalent.
Insulate the wiring as shown in the diagram.
Maximum rating
Static
Maximum
capacity
Varistor voltage
limit voltage
(reference
rating (range) V1mA
Permissible circuit
Surge
Energy
Rated
voltage
immunity
immunity
power
[A]
[J]
[W]
[A]
[V]
[pF]
5
0.4
25
360
300
AC[Vma]
DC[V]
140
180
Note: 1 time
8
(Note)
500/time
value)
[V]
220
(198 to 242)
20 s
(Example) ERZV10D221 (Matsushita Electric Industry)
TNR-10V221K (Nippon chemi-con)
Outline drawing [mm] ( [in] ) (ERZ-C10DK221)
4.7 1.0 (0.19 0.04)
Vinyl tube
30.0 (1.18)
or more
0.8 (0.03)
3.0 (0.12)
or less
16.5
(0.65)
13.5 (0.53)
Crimping terminal
for M4 screw
13.2.6 Noise reduction techniques
Noises are classified into external noises which enter the servo amplifier to cause it to malfunction and
those radiated by the servo amplifier to cause peripheral devices to malfunction. Since the servo amplifier
is an electronic device which handles small signals, the following general noise reduction techniques are
required.
Also, the servo amplifier can be a source of noise as its outputs are chopped by high carrier frequencies. If
peripheral devices malfunction due to noises produced by the servo amplifier, noise suppression measures
must be taken. The measures will vary slightly with the routes of noise transmission.
(1) Noise reduction techniques
(a) General reduction techniques
Avoid laying power lines (input and output cables) and signal cables side by side or do not bundle
them together. Separate power lines from signal cables.
Use shielded, twisted pair cables for connection with the encoder and for control signal
transmission, and connect the shield to the SD terminal.
Ground the servo amplifier, servo motor, etc. together at one point (refer to Section 3.10).
13 - 29
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(b) Reduction techniques for external noises that cause the servo amplifier to malfunction
If there are noise sources (such as a magnetic contactor, an electromagnetic brake, and many
relays which make a large amount of noise) near the servo amplifier and the servo amplifier may
malfunction, the following countermeasures are required.
Provide surge absorbers on the noise sources to suppress noises.
Attach data line filters to the signal cables.
Ground the shields of the encoder connecting cable and the control signal cables with cable clamp
fittings.
(c) Techniques for noises radiated by the servo amplifier that cause peripheral devices to malfunction
Noises produced by the servo amplifier are classified into those radiated from the cables connected
to the servo amplifier and its main circuits (input and output circuits), those induced
electromagnetically or statically by the signal cables of the peripheral devices located near the
main circuit cables, and those transmitted through the power supply cables.
Noises produced
by servo amplifier
Noises transmitted
in the air
Noise radiated directly
from servo amplifier
Route 1)
Noise radiated from the
power supply cable
Route 2)
Noise radiated from
servo motor cable
Route 3)
Magnetic induction
noise
Routes 4) and 5)
Static induction
noise
Route 6)
Noises transmitted
through electric
channels
Noise transmitted through
power supply cable
Route 7)
Noise sneaking from
grounding cable due to
leakage current
Route 8)
5)
7)
7)
1)
Instrument
7)
2)
Receiver
Sensor
power
supply
Servo
amplifier
2)
3)
8)
6)
Sensor
4)
3)
Servo motor
13 - 30
SM
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Noise transmission route
Suppression techniques
1) 2) 3)
When measuring instruments, receivers, sensors, etc. which handle weak signals and may
malfunction due to noise and/or their signal cables are contained in a control box together with the
servo amplifier or run near the servo amplifier, such devices may malfunction due to noises
transmitted through the air. The following techniques are required.
(1) Provide maximum clearance between easily affected devices and the servo amplifier.
(2) Provide maximum clearance between easily affected signal cables and the I/O cables of the servo
amplifier.
(3) Avoid laying the power lines (Input cables of the servo amplifier) and signal cables side by side or
bundling them together.
(4) Insert a line noise filter to the I/O cables or a radio noise filter on the input line.
(5) Use shielded wires for signal and power cables or put cables in separate metal conduits.
4) 5) 6)
When the power lines and the signal cables are laid side by side or bundled together, magnetic
induction noise and static induction noise will be transmitted through the signal cables and
malfunction may occur. The following techniques are required.
(1) Provide maximum clearance between easily affected devices and the servo amplifier.
(2) Provide maximum clearance between easily affected signal cables and the I/O cables of the servo
amplifier.
(3) Avoid laying the power lines (Input cables of the servo amplifier) and signal cables side by side
or bundling them together.
(4) Use shielded wires for signal and power cables or put the cables in separate metal conduits.
7)
When the power supply of peripheral devices is connected to the power supply of the servo
amplifier system, noises produced by the servo amplifier may be transmitted back through the
power supply cable and the devices may malfunction. The following techniques are required.
(1) Insert the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) on the power cables (Input cables) of the servo amplifier.
(2) Insert the line noise filter (FR-BSF01 FR-BLF) on the power cables of the servo amplifier.
8)
When the cables of peripheral devices are connected to the servo amplifier to make a closed loop
circuit, leakage current may flow to malfunction the peripheral devices. If so, malfunction may be
prevented by disconnecting the grounding cable of the peripheral device.
(2) Noise reduction products
(a) Data line filter
Noise can be prevented by installing a data line filter onto the encoder cable, etc.
For example, the ZCAT3035-1330 of TDK and the ESD-SR-25 of Tokin make are available as data
line filters.
As a reference example, the impedance specifications of the ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK) are indicated
below.
This impedances are reference values and not guaranteed values.
10 to 100MHz
100 to 500MHz
80
150
39 1(1.54 0.04)
34 1
(1.34 0.04)
Loop for fixing the
cable band
TDK
Product name
Lot number
Outline drawing (ZCAT3035-1330)
13 - 31
13 1
30 1 (0.51 0.04)
(1.18 0.04)
[Unit: mm]([Unit: in.])
Impedance[ ]
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(b) Surge suppressor
The recommended surge suppressor for installation to an AC relay, AC valve, AC electromagnetic
brake or the like near the servo amplifier is shown below. Use this product or equivalent.
MS
Relay
Surge suppressor
Surge suppressor
Surge suppressor
This distance should be short
(within 20cm(0.79 in.)).
(Ex.) 972A.2003 50411
(Matsuo Electric Co.,Ltd. 200VAC rating)
Outline drawing [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in.])
Rated
voltage
AC[V]
C [ F]
R [Ω]
Test voltage AC[V]
200
0.5
50
(1W)
Across
T-C 1000(1 to 5s)
Vinyl sheath
Blue vinyl cord
Red vinyl cord
10(0.39)or less
10 3
(0.39
0.12)
18 1.5
(0.71 0.06)
6(0.24)
10(0.39)or less
4(0.16)
10 3
(0.39
48 1.5
200(7.87) 0.15)
(1.89 0.06) or more
15 1(0.59 0.04)
200(7.87)
or more
Note that a diode should be installed to a DC relay, DC valve or
the like.
Maximum voltage: Not less than 4 times the drive voltage of
the relay or the like
Maximum current: Not less than twice the drive current of
the relay or the like
31(1.22)
RA
Diode
(c) Cable clamp fitting (AERSBAN -SET)
Generally, the earth of the shielded cable may only be connected to the connector's SD terminal.
However, the effect can be increased by directly connecting the cable to an earth plate as shown
below.
Install the earth plate near the servo amplifier for the encoder cable. Peel part of the cable sheath
to expose the external conductor, and press that part against the earth plate with the cable clamp.
If the cable is thin, clamp several cables in a bunch.
The clamp comes as a set with the earth plate.
Cable
Strip the cable sheath of
the clamped area.
Earth plate
40(1.57)
Cable clamp
(A,B)
cutter
External conductor
cable
Clamp section diagram
13 - 32
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
Outline drawing
[Unit: mm]
([Unit: in.])
Earth plate
Clamp section diagram
2- 5(0.20) hole
installation hole
6
(0.24)
10(0.39)
0.3
0
24
22(0.87)
35(1.38)
Note: Screw hole for grounding. Connect it to the earth plate of the control box.
Type
A
B
C
Accessory fittings
Clamp fitting
L
AERSBAN-DSET
100
(3.94)
86
(3.39)
30
(1.18)
clamp A: 2pcs.
A
70
(2.76)
AERSBAN-ESET
70
(2.76)
56
(2.20)
clamp B: 1pc.
B
45
(1.77)
13 - 33
(0.940)
A
C
35 (1.38)
24
L or less
11(0.43)
(Note)M4 screw
0
0.2
7 (0.28)
(0.940)
B 0.3(0.01)
3 (0.12)
6 (0.24)
30(1.18)
17.5(0.69)
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(d) Line noise filter (FR-BLF, FR-BSF01)
This filter is effective in suppressing noises radiated from the power supply side and output side of
the servo amplifier and also in suppressing high-frequency leakage current (zero-phase current)
especially within 0.5MHz to 5MHz band.
Connection diagram
Outline drawing [Unit: mm] ([Unit: in.])
Wind the 3-phase wires by the equal number of times in the
same direction, and connect the filter to the power supply side
and output side of the servo amplifier.
The effect of the filter on the power supply side is higher as the
number of winds is larger. The number of turns is generally four.
If the wires are too thick to be wound, use two or more filters
and make the total number of turns as mentioned above.
On the output side, the number of turns must be four or less.
Do not wind the grounding wire together with the 3-phase wires.
The filter effect will decrease. Use a separate wire for grounding.
Example 1
NFB
Servo amplifier
L1
L2
Line noise
L3
filter
(Number of turns: 4)
160 (6.30)
180 (7.09)
FR-BSF01(for MR-J2S-200A or less)
110 (4.33)
95 (3.74)
22 (0.87)
Servo amplifier
Power
supply
7 (0.28)
35 (1.38)
130 (5.12)
85 (3.35)
L1
L2
Line noise
L3
filter
Two filters are used
(Total number of turns: 4)
2- 5 (0.20)
65 (2.56)
3 (0.12)
33 (1.3)
65 (2.56)
Example 2 NFB
7 (0.28)
31.5 (1.24)
2.3
(0.09) 80 (3.15)
Power
supply
FR-BLF(MR-J2S-350A) or more
(e) Radio noise filter (FR-BIF)...for the input side only
This filter is effective in suppressing noises radiated from the power supply side of the servo
amplifier especially in 10MHz and lower radio frequency bands. The FR-BIF is designed for the
input only.
Connection diagram
Outline drawing (Unit: mm) ([Unit: in.])
L2
Green
29 (1.14)
42 (1.65)
L3
Red White Blue
Radio noise
filter FR-BIF
58 (2.28)
5 (0.20)
hole
29 (1.14)
44 (1.73)
13 - 34
4 (0.16)
Power
supply
Leakage current: 4mA
About 300(11.81)
Make the connection cables as short as possible.
Grounding is always required.
Servo amplifier
NFB
L1
7 (0.28)
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.2.7 Leakage current breaker
(1) Selection method
High-frequency chopper currents controlled by pulse width modulation flow in the AC servo circuits.
Leakage currents containing harmonic contents are larger than those of the motor which is run with a
commercial power supply.
Select a leakage current breaker according to the following formula, and ground the servo amplifier,
servo motor, etc. securely.
Make the input and output cables as short as possible, and also make the grounding cable as long as
possible (about 30cm (11.8 in)) to minimize leakage currents.
Rated sensitivity current
10 {Ig1 Ign Iga K (Ig2 Igm)} [mA] ..........(13.2)
K: Constant considering the harmonic contents
Cable
Leakage current breaker
NV
Noise
filter
Ig1 Ign
Ig1:
Ig2:
Ign:
Iga:
Igm:
Servo
amplifier
Iga
Leakage current
Ig2
SM
Igm
Models provided with
harmonic and surge
reduction techniques
NV-SF
NV-CF
1
General models
NV-CA
NV-CS
NV-SS
3
Leakage current on the electric channel from the leakage current breaker to the input terminals
of the servo amplifier (Found from Fig. 13.1.)
Leakage current on the electric channel from the output terminals of the servo amplifier to the
servo motor (Found from Fig. 13.1.)
Leakage current when a filter is connected to the input side (4.4mA per one FR-BIF)
Leakage current of the servo amplifier (Found from Table 13.6.)
Leakage current of the servo motor (Found from Table 13.5.)
Table 13.5 Servo motor's
leakage current
example (Igm)
120
[mA]
Cable
K
Mitsubishi
products
Type
100
80
Servo motor
output [kW]
60
0.05 to 0.5
0.1
0.1 to 0.6
0.1
40
0.6 to 1.0
0.1
0.7 to 3.5
0.15
1.2 to 2.2
0.2
20
0
2 3.5
8 1422 38 80 150
5.5
30 60 100
Cable size[mm2]
Leakage
current [mA]
Table 13.6 Servo amplifier's
leakage current
example (Iga)
3 to 3.5
0.3
5
0.5
7
0.7
Servo amplifier
capacity [kW]
5
Leakage
current [mA]
7
2
Table 13.7 Leakage circuit breaker selection example
Rated sensitivity
Fig. 13.1 Leakage current example
(Ig1, Ig2) for CV cable run
in metal conduit
Servo amplifier
current of leakage
circuit breaker [mA]
MR-J2S-10A to MR-J2S-350A
MR-J2S-10A1 to MR-J2S-40A1
13 - 35
15
MR-J2S-500A
30
MR-J2S-700A
50
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
(2) Selection example
Indicated below is an example of selecting a leakage current breaker under the following conditions:
2mm2 5m
2mm2 5m
NV
Servo
amplifier
MR-J2S-60A
Ig1
Iga
SM
Ig2
Servo motor
HC-MFS73
Igm
Use a leakage current breaker generally available.
Find the terms of Equation (13.2) from the diagram:
Ig1 20
5
1000
0.1 [mA]
Ig2 20
5
1000
0.1 [mA]
Ign
0 (not used)
Iga
0.1 [mA]
Igm
0.1 [mA]
Insert these values in Equation (13.2):
Ig
10 {0.1 0 0.1 3 (0.1 0.1)}
8.0 [mA]
According to the result of calculation, use a leakage current breaker having the rated sensitivity
current (Ig) of 8.0[mA] or more. A leakage current breaker having Ig of 15[mA] is used with the NVCA/CS/SS series.
13 - 36
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
13.2.8 EMC filter
For compliance with the EMC Directive of the EN Standard, it is recommended to use the following filter:
(1) Combination with the servo amplifier
Recommended filter
Servo amplifier
MR-J2S-10A to MR-J2S-100A
MR-J2S-10A1 to MR-J2S-40A1
MR-J2S-200A
MR-J2S-350A
Model
Leakage current [mA]
SF1252
38
Weight [kg]([lb])
0.75 (1.65)
SF1253
57
1.37 (1.65)
MR-J2S-500A
(Note) HF-3040A-TM
1.5
5.5 (12.13)
MR-J2S-700A
(Note) HF-3050A-TM
1.5
6.7 (14.77)
Note : Soshin Electric
(2) Connection example
EMC filter
(Note 1) Power supply
3-phase
200 to 230V AC,
1-phase
230VAC or
1-phase
100 to120VAC
NFB
LINE
Servo amplifier
LOAD
L1
L1
L1
L2
L2
L2
L3
L3
L3
(Note 2)
L11
L21
Note: 1. For 1-phase 230VAC power supply, connect the power supply to L1,L2 and leave L3 open.
There is no L3 for 1-phase 100 to 120VAC power supply.
2. Connect when the power supply has earth.
(3) Outline drawing
[Unit: mm(in)]
SF1252
SF1253
6.0(0.236)
L1'
L2'
L3'
LOAD
(output side)
8.5
(0.335)
LINE
LINE
(input side)
156.0(6.142)
140.0(5.512)
168.0(6.614)
156.0(6.142)
140.0(5.512)
LINE
LOAD
L1
L2
L3
LINE
(input side)
LABEL
LABEL
168.0(6.614)
L1
L2
L3
6.0(0.236)
209.5(8.248)
LOAD
149.5(5.886)
L1'
L2'
L3'
16.0(0.63)
LOAD
(output side)
8.5
(0.335)
42.0
(1.654)
13 - 37
23.0(0.906)
49.0
(1.929)
13. OPTIONS AND AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT
HF3040-TM HF-3050A-TM
K
L
G
F
E
D
L
M
C
J
C
H
B
A
Model
Dimensions [mm(in)]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
HF3040A-TM
260
(10.23)
210
(8.27)
85
(3.35)
155
(6.10)
140
(5.51)
125
(4.92)
44
(1.73)
140
(5.51)
70
(2.76)
HF3050A-TM
290
(11.42)
240
(9.45)
100
(3.94)
190
(7.48)
175
(6.89)
160
(6.30)
44
(1.73)
170
(5.51)
100
(3.94)
13 - 38
K
R3.25,
length 8
L
M
M5
M4
M6
M4
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
This servo amplifier has the RS-422 and RS-232C serial communication functions. These functions can be
used to perform servo operation, parameter changing, monitor function, etc.
However, the RS-422 and RS-232C communication functions cannot be used together. Select between RS422 and RS-232C with parameter No.16. (Refer to Section 14.2.2.)
14.1 Configuration
14.1.1 RS-422 configuration
(1) Outline
Up to 32 axes of servo amplifiers from stations 0 to 31 can be operated on the same bus.
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
MITSUBISHI
Controller such as
personal computer
CHARGE
CHARGE
To CN3
RS-232C/
RS-422
converter
Axis 1 (Station 0)
CHARGE
To CN3
To CN3
Axis 32 (Station 31)
Axis 2 (Station 1)
RS-422
Unavailable as option.
To be prepared by customer.
(2) Cable connection diagram
Wire as shown below:
(Note 3) 30m(98.4ft) max.
(Note 1)
Axis 2 servo amplifier
CN3 connector
Plate SD
(Note 1)
Axis 1 servo amplifier
CN3 connector
Plate SD
9 SDP
9 SDP
19
19 SDN
5 RDP
5 RDP
RS-422
output unit
SDN
(Note 1)
Axis 32 (last axis)
servo amplifier
CN3 connector
Plate SD
9 SDP
19 SDN
5 RDP
15 RDN
15
RDN
15 RDN
10 TRE
10
TRE
10 TRE (Note 2)
11 LG
11
LG
11 LG
1 LG
1 LG
1 LG
RDP
RDN
SDP
SDN
GND
GND
Note: 1. Connector set MR-J2CN1(3M or equivalent)
Connector: 10120-3000VE
Shell kit: 10320-52F0-008
2. In the last axis, connect TRE and RDN.
3. 30m max. in environment of little noise.
14 - 1
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.1.2 RS-232C configuration
(1) Outline
A single axis of servo amplifier is operated.
Servo amplifier
MITSUBISHI
CHARGE
To CN3
RS-232C
Controller such as
personal computer
(2) Cable connection diagram
Wire as shown below. The communication cable for connection with the personal computer (MRCPCATCBL3M) is available. (Refer to Section 13.1.4.)
Personal computer
connector D-SUB25 (socket)
(Note 3)
(Note 2) 15m(49.2ft) max.
(Note 1)
Servo amplifier
CN3 connector
Plate FG
TXD
3
2
RXD
1
GND
TXD
GND
RXD
2
12
GND
5
11
RTS
7
CTS
8
DSR
6
DTR
4
Note: 1. 3M's CN3 connector
Connector: 10120-6000EL
Shell kit: 10320-3210-000
2. 15m(49.2ft) max. in environment of little noise. However, this distance should be 3m(9.84ft)
max. for use at 38400bps or more baudrate.
3. For PC-AT compatible controller.
14 - 2
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.2 Communication specifications
14.2.1 Communication overview
This servo amplifier is designed to send a reply on receipt of an instruction. The device which gives this
instruction (e.g. personal computer) is called a master station and the device which sends a reply in
response to the instruction (servo amplifier) is called a slave station. When fetching data successively, the
master station repeatedly commands the slave station to send data.
Item
Description
Baudrate
Transfer code
Transfer protocol
9600/19200/38400/57600 asynchronous system
Start bit
: 1 bit
Data bit
: 8 bits
Parity bit
: 1 bit (even)
Stop bit
: 1 bit
Character system, half-duplex communication system
(LSB)
Start
0
(MSB)
1
2
3
4
5
Data
1 frame (11bits)
14 - 3
6
7
Parity
Stop
Next
start
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.2.2 Parameter setting
When the RS-422/RS-232C communication function is used to operate the servo, set the communication
specifications of the servo amplifier in the corresponding parameters.
After setting the values of these parameters, they are made valid by switching power off once, then on
again.
(1) Serial communication baudrate
Choose the communication speed. Match this value to the communication speed of the sending end
(master station).
Parameter No. 16
Communication baudrate
0: 9600[bps]
1: 19200[bps]
2: 38400[bps]
3: 57600[bps]
(2) Serial communication selection
Select the RS-422 or RS-232C communication standard. RS-422 and RS-232C cannot be used together.
Parameter No. 16
Serial communication standard selection
0: RS-232C used
1: RS-422 used
(3) Serial communication response delay time
Set the time from when the servo amplifier (slave station) receives communication data to when it
sends back data. Set "0" to send back data in less than 800 s or "1" to send back data in 800 s or more.
Parameter No. 16
Serial communication response delay time
0: Invalid
1: Valid, reply sent in 800 s or more
(4) Station number setting
Set the station number of the servo amplifier in parameter No. 15. The setting range is stations 0 to 31.
(5) Protocol station number selection
When communication is made without setting station numbers to servo amplifiers as in the MR-J2-A
servo amplifiers, choose "no station numbers" in parameter No. 53. The communication protocol will
be free of station numbers.
Parameter No. 53
Protocol station number selection
0: With station numbers
1: No station numbers
14 - 4
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.3 Protocol
POINT
Whether station number setting will be made or not must be selected if
the RS-232C communication function is used. Note that choosing "no
station numbers" in parameter No. 53 will make the communication
protocol free of station numbers as in the MR-J2-A servo amplifiers.
Since up to 32 axes may be connected to the bus, add a station number or group to the command, data
No., etc. to determine the destination servo amplifier of data communication. Set the station number to
each servo amplifier using the parameter and set the group to each station using the communication
command. Transmission data is valid for the servo amplifier of the specified station number or group.
When "*" is set as the station number added to the transmission data, the transmission data is made
valid for all servo amplifiers connected. However, when return data is required from the servo amplifier
in response to the transmission data, set "0" to the station number of the servo amplifier which must
provide the return data.
Servo side
(Slave station)
10 frames (data)
S
T
X
Data
No.
Data*
E
T
X
Check
sum
Station number
or
group
S
T
X
Station number
or
group
Error code
Controller side
(Master station)
S
O
H
Command
(1) Transmission of data from the controller to the servo
E
T
X
Check
sum
6 frames
Positive response: Error code A
Negative response: Error code other than A
14 - 5
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
(2) Transmission of data request from the controller to the servo
S
O
H
S
T
X
Data
No.
E
T
X
Check
sum
Station number
or
group
S
T
X
Station number
or
group
Servo side
(Slave station)
Error code
Controller side
(Master station)
Command
10 frames
Data*
6 frames (data)
(3) Recovery of communication status by time-out
Controller side
(Master station)
EOT causes the servo to return to
the receive neutral status.
E
O
T
Servo side
(Slave station)
(4) Data frames
The data length depends on the command.
Data
4 frames
or
Data
or 12 frames or 16 frames
8 frames
14 - 6
E
T
X
Check
sum
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.4 Character codes
(1) Control codes
Code name
Hexadecimal
Personal computer terminal key operation
Description
(ASCII code)
(General)
SOH
01H
start of head
ctrl
A
STX
02H
start of text
ctrl
B
ETX
03H
end of text
ctrl
C
EOT
04H
end of transmission
ctrl
D
(2) Codes for data
JIS8 unit codes are used.
b8 to
b5
b8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
b7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
b6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
b5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C
b4
b3
b2
b1
0
0
0
0
0
NUL
DLE
Space
0
@
P
`
p
0
0
0
1
1
SOH
DC1
!
1
A
Q
a
q
0
0
1
0
2
STX
DC2
“
2
B
R
b
r
0
0
1
1
3
ETX
DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
0
1
0
0
4
$
4
D
T
d
t
0
1
0
1
5
%
5
E
U
e
u
0
1
1
0
6
&
6
F
V
f
v
0
1
1
1
7
‘
7
G
W
g
w
1
0
0
0
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
1
0
0
1
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
1
0
1
0
10
:
J
Z
j
z
1
0
1
1
11
;
K
[
k
{
1
1
0
0
12
l
|
1
1
0
1
13
1
1
1
0
14
.
1
1
1
1
15
/
R
,
L
M
]
m
}
N
^
n

O
_
o
DEL
?
(3) Station numbers
You may set 32 station numbers from station 0 to station 31 and the JIS8 unit codes are used to
specify the stations.
Station number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
JIS8 code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
Station number
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
JIS8 code
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
For example, "30H" is transmitted in hexadecimal for the station number of "0" (axis 1).
(4) Group
Group
a
b
c
d
e
f
JIS8 code
a
b
c
d
e
f
All group
For example, "61H" is transmitted in hexadecimal for group a.
14 - 7
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.5 Error codes
Error codes are used in the following cases and an error code of single-code length is transmitted.
On receipt of data from the master station, the slave station sends the error code corresponding to that
data to the master station.
The error code sent in upper case indicates that the servo is normal and the one in lower case indicates
that an alarm occurred.
Error code
Servo normal
Servo alarm
Error name
Description
[A]
[a]
Normal operation
Data transmitted was processed properly.
[B]
[b]
Parity error
Parity error occurred in the transmitted data.
[C]
[c]
Checksum error
Checksum error occurred in the transmitted data.
[D]
[d]
Character error
Character not existing in the specifications was
transmitted.
[E]
[e]
Command error
Command not existing in the specifications was
transmitted.
[F]
[f]
Data No. error
Data No. not existing in the specifications was
transmitted.
Remarks
Positive response
Negative response
14.6 Checksum
Checksum range
Station number
or
group
STX or
SOH
ETX
Check
Checksum range
The check sum is a JIS8-coded hexadecimal representing the lower two digits of the sum of JIS8-coded
hexadecimal numbers up to ETX, with the exception of the first control code (STX or S0H).
(Example)
S
T
X
[0] [A] [1] [2] [5] [F]
E
T
X
[5] [2]
02H 30H 41H 31H 32H 35H 46H 03H
30H 41H 31H 32H 35H 46H 03H
152H
Lower 2 digits 52 is sent after conversion into ASCII code [5][2].
14 - 8
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.7 Time-out operation
The master station transmits EOT when the slave station does not start reply operation (STX is not
received) 300[ms] after the master station has ended communication operation. 100[ms] after that, the
master station retransmits the message. Time-out occurs if the slave station does not answer after the
master station has performed the above operation three times. (Communication error)
100ms
*Time-out
300ms
300ms
Message
E
O
T
Message
Message
Controller
(Master station)
100ms
300ms
E
O
T
Message
100ms
300ms
E
O
T
Servo
(Slave station)
14.8 Retry operation
Servo
(Slave station)
S
T
X
Station number
or
group
*Communication error
Message
Message
Controller
(Master station)
Message
When a fault occurs in communication between the master and slave stations, the error code in the
response data from the slave station is a negative response code ([B] to [F], [b] to [f]). In this case, the
master station retransmits the message which was sent at the occurrence of the fault (Retry operation). A
communication error occurs if the above operation is repeated and results in the error three or more
consecutive times.
S
T
X
Station number
or
group
S
T
X
Station number
or
group
Similarly, when the master station detects a fault (e.g. checksum, parity) in the response data from the
slave station, the master station retransmits the message which was sent at the occurrence of the fault. A
communication error occurs if the retry operation is performed three times.
14 - 9
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.9 Initialization
After the slave station is switched on, it cannot reply to communication until the internal initialization
processing terminates. Hence, at power-on, ordinary communication should be started after:
(1) 1s or more time has elapsed after the slave station is switched on; and
(2) Making sure that normal communication can be made by reading the parameter or other data which
does not pose any safety problems.
14.10 Communication procedure example
The following example reads the set value of parameter No.2 "function selection 1" from the servo
amplifier of station 0:
Data item
Value
Description
Station number
Command
Data No.
0
05
02
Servo amplifier station 0
Read command
Parameter No.2
Axis No. Command
Data No.
Start
Data [0] 0 5
Data make-up
STX
02
ETX
[0][0][5] STX [0][2] ETX
Checksum 30H 30H 35H 02H 30H 32H 03H FCH
Checksum calculation and
addition
Transmission data
Addition of SOH to make
up transmission data
SOH
05
STX
02
ETX
F C 46H 43H
Master station
slave station
Master station
slave station
Master station
slave station
Data transmission
Data receive
No
Is there receive data?
Yes
No
300ms elapsed?
Yes
3 consecutive times?
Yes
No
Other than error code
[A] [a]?
3 consecutive times?
Yes
No
No
Yes
100ms after EOT transmission
Error processing
Receive data analysis
Error processing
End
14 - 10
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.11 Command and data No. list
14.11.1 Read commands
(1) Status display (Command [0][1])
Command
Data No.
Description
Display item
[0][1]
[8][0]
[0][1]
[8][1]
[0][1]
[8][2]
droop pulses
12
[0][1]
[8][3]
cumulative command pulses
12
[0][1]
[8][4]
command pulse frequency
12
[0][1]
[8][5]
analog speed command voltage
analog speed limit voltage
12
[0][1]
[8][6]
analog torque command voltage
analog torque limit voltage
12
Status display data value and
processing information
Frame length
cumulative feedback pulses
12
servo motor speed
12
[0][1]
[8][7]
regenerative load ratio
12
[0][1]
[8][8]
effective load ratio
12
[0][1]
[8][9]
peak load ratio
12
[0][1]
[8][A]
Instantaneous torque
12
[0][1]
[8][B]
within one-revolution position
12
[0][1]
[8][C]
ABS counter
12
[0][1]
[8][D]
load inertia moment ratio
12
[0][1]
[8][E]
Bus voltage
12
(2) Parameter (Command [0][5])
Command
Data No.
Description
Frame length
[0][5]
[0][0] to
[5][4]
Current value of each parameter
The decimal equivalent of the data No. value (hexadecimal) corresponds
to the parameter number.
8
(3) External I/O signals (Command [1][2])
Command
Data No.
Description
Frame length
[1][2]
[4][0]
External input pin statuses
8
[1][2]
[C][0]
External output pin statuses
8
(4) Alarm history (Command [3][3])
Command
Data No.
Description
Alarm occurrence sequence
[3][3]
[1][0]
most recent alarm
4
[3][3]
[1][1]
first alarm in past
4
[3][3]
[1][2]
second alarm in past
4
[3][3]
[1][3]
third alarm in past
4
Alarm number in alarm history
Frame length
[3][3]
[1][4]
fourth alarm in past
4
[3][3]
[1][5]
fifth alarm in past
4
[3][3]
[2][0]
most recent alarm
8
[3][3]
[2][1]
[3][3]
[2][2]
Alarm occurrence time in alarm
history
first alarm in past
8
second alarm in past
8
[3][3]
[2][3]
third alarm in past
8
[3][3]
[2][4]
fourth alarm in past
8
[3][3]
[2][5]
fifth alarm in past
8
14 - 11
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
(5) Current alarm (Command [0][2] [3][5])
Command
[0][2]
Data No.
[0][0]
Current alarm number
Command
Data No.
[3][5]
[3][5]
[8][0]
[8][1]
[3][5]
[3][5]
[8][2]
[8][3]
[3][5]
[8][4]
[3][5]
[8][5]
[3][5]
[8][6]
[3][5]
[3][5]
[3][5]
Description
Description
Frame length
4
Display item
Status display data value and
processing information at alarm
occurrence
Frame length
cumulative feedback pulses
servo motor speed
12
12
droop pulses
cumulative command pulses
12
12
command pulse frequency
analog speed command voltage
analog speed limit voltage
12
12
[8][7]
analog torque command voltage
analog torque limit voltage
regenerative load ratio
12
[8][8]
[8][9]
effective load ratio
peak load ratio
12
12
[3][5]
[3][5]
[8][A]
[8][B]
Instantaneous torque
within one-revolution position
12
12
[3][5]
[3][5]
[8][C]
[8][D]
ABS counter
load inertia moment ratio
12
12
[3][5]
[8][E]
Bus voltage
12
12
(6) Group setting (Command [1][F])
Command
[1][F]
Data No.
[0][0]
Description
Reading of group setting value
Frame length
4
Data No.
[9][0]
[9][1]
[7][0]
Description
Servo motor end pulse unit absolute position
Command unit absolute position
Software version
Frame length
8
8
16
(7) Others
Command
[0][2]
[0][2]
[0][2]
14.11.2 Write commands
(1) Status display (Command [8][1])
Command
[8][1]
Data No.
[0][0]
Description
Status display data clear
Setting range
1EA5
Frame length
4
Setting range
Frame length
(2) Parameter (Command [8][4])
Command
Data No.
[8][4]
[0][0] to
[5][4]
Description
Each parameter write
The decimal equivalent of the data No. value
(hexadecimal) corresponds to the parameter
number.
Depends on the
parameter.
8
(3) Alarm history (Command [8][2])
Command
Data No.
[8][2]
[2][0]
Description
Alarm history clear
Setting range
1EA5
Frame length
4
(4) Current alarm (Command [8][2])
Command
[8][2]
Data No.
[0][0]
Description
Alarm reset
14 - 12
Setting range
1EA5
Frame length
4
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
(5) Operation mode selection (Command [8][B])
Command
Data No.
[8][B]
[0][0]
Description
Operation mode changing
Setting range
Frame length
0000 to 0004
4
Setting range
Frame length
0000: Exit from test operation mode
0001: Jog operation
0002: Positioning operation
0003: Motor-less operation
0004: Output signal (DO) forced output
(6) External input signal disable (Command [9][0])
Command
Data No.
[9][0]
[0][0]
Description
Turns off the external input signals (DI), external analog
1EA5
4
1EA5
4
1EA5
4
1EA5
4
input signals and pulse train inputs with the exception of
EMG, LSP and LSN, independently of the external ON/OFF
statuses.
[9][0]
[0][3]
Changes the external output signals (DO) into the value of
command [8][B] or command [A][0]
[9][0]
[1][0]
data No. [0][1].
Enables the disabled external input signals (DI), external
analog input signals and pulse train inputs with the
exception of EMG, LSP and LSN.
[9][0]
[1][3]
Enables the disabled external output signals (DO).
(7) Data for test operation mode (Command [9][2] [A][0])
Command
Data No.
Description
[9][2]
[0][0]
Input signal for test operation
8
[9][2]
[A][0]
Forced output from signal pin
8
Command
Data No.
[A][0]
[1][0]
Description
Setting range
Frame length
Setting range
Frame length
0000 to 7FFF
4
Writes the acceleration/deceleration time constant of the test
00000000 to
8
operation mode (jog operation, positioning operation).
7FFFFFFF
Writes the speed of the test operation mode (jog operation,
positioning operation).
[A][0]
[1][1]
[A][0]
[1][2]
Clears the acceleration/deceleration time constant of the test
1EA5
4
[A][0]
[1][3]
Writes the moving distance (in pulses) of the test operation
80000000 to
8
[A][0]
[1][5]
mode (jog operation, positioning operation).
7FFFFFFF
operation mode (jog operation, positioning operation).
Temporary stop command of the test operation mode (jog
1EA5
4
Setting range
Frame length
operation, positioning operation)
(8) Group setting (Command [9][F])
Command
Data No.
[9][F]
[0][0]
Description
Setting of group
4
14 - 13
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12 Detailed explanations of commands
14.12.1 Data processing
When the master station transmits a command data No. or a command data No. data to a slave
station, the servo amplifier returns a reply or data according to the purpose.
When numerical values are represented in these send data and receive data, they are represented in
decimal, hexadecimal, etc.
Therefore, data must be processed according to the application.
Since whether data must be processed or not and how to process data depend on the monitoring,
parameters, etc., follow the detailed explanation of the corresponding command.
The following methods are how to process send and receive data when reading and writing data.
(1) Processing the read data
When the display type is 0, the eight-character data is converted from hexadecimal to decimal and a
decimal point is placed according to the decimal point position information.
When the display type is 1, the eight-character data is used unchanged.
The following example indicates how to process the receive data "003000000929" given to show.
The receive data is as follows.
0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 2 9
Data 32-bit length (hexadecimal representation)
(Data conversion is required as indicated in the display type)
Display type
0: Data must be converted into decimal.
1: Data is used unchanged in hexadecimal.
Decimal point position
0: No decimal point
1: First least significant digit (normally not used)
2: Second least significant digit
3: Third least significant digit
4: Forth least significant digit
5: Fifth least significant digit
6: Sixth least significant digit
Since the display type is "0" in this case, the hexadecimal data is converted into decimal.
00000929H 2345
As the decimal point position is "3", a decimal point is placed in the third least significant digit.
Hence, "23.45" is displayed.
14 - 14
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
(2) Writing the processed data
When the data to be written is handled as decimal, the decimal point position must be specified. If it is
not specified, the data cannot be written. When the data is handled as hexadecimal, specify "0" as the
decimal point position.
The data to be sent is the following value.
0
Data is transferred in hexadecimal.
Decimal point position
0: No decimal point
1: First least significant digit
2: Second least significant digit
3: Third least significant digit
4: Forth least significant digit
5: Fifth least significant digit
By way of example, here is described how to process the set data when a value of "15.5" is sent.
Since the decimal point position is the second digit, the decimal point position data is "2".
As the data to be sent is hexadecimal, the decimal data is converted into hexadecimal.
155 9B
Hence, "0200009B" is transmitted.
14 - 15
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.2 Status display
(1) Status display data read
When the master station transmits the data No. (refer to the following table for assignment) to the
slave station, the slave station sends back the data value and data processing information.
1) Transmission
Transmit command [0][1] and the data No. corresponding to the status display item to be read.
Refer to Section 14.11.1.
2) Reply
The slave station sends back the status display data requested.
0 0
Data 32 bits long (represented in hexadecimal)
(Data conversion into display type is required)
Display type
0: Used unchanged in hexadecimal
1: Conversion into decimal required
Decimal point position
0: No decimal point
1: Lower first digit (usually not used)
2: Lower second digit
3: Lower third digit
4: Lower fourth digit
5: Lower fifth digit
6: Lower sixth digit
(2) Status display data clear
The cumulative feedback pulse data of the status display is cleared. Send this command immediately
after reading the status display item. The data of the status display item transmitted is cleared to zero.
Command
Data No.
Data
[8][1]
[0][0]
1EA5
For example, after sending command [0][1] and data No. [8][0] and receiving the status display data,
send command [8][1], data No. [0][0] and data [1EA5] to clear the cumulative feedback pulse value to
zero.
14 - 16
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.3 Parameter
(1) Parameter read
Read the parameter setting.
1) Transmission
Transmit command [0][5] and the data No. corresponding to the parameter No.
The data No. is expressed in hexadecimal equivalent of the data No. value corresponds to the
parameter number.
Command
Data No.
[0][5]
[0][0] to
[5][4]
2) Reply
The slave station sends back the data and processing information of the requested parameter No.
Data is transferred in hexadecimal.
Decimal point position
0: No decimal point
1: Lower first digit
2: Lower second digit
3: Lower third digit
4: Lower fourth digit
5: Lower fifth digit
0
Display type
0: Used unchanged in hexadecimal
1: Conversion into decimal required
Parameter write type
0: Valid after write
1: Valid when power is switched on again after write
Read enable/disable
0: Read enable
1: Read disable
Enable/disable information changes according to the setting of parameter No.19 "parameter
write inhibit". When the enable/disable setting is read disable, ignore the parameter data part
and process it as unreadable.
14 - 17
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
(2) Parameter write
POINT
The number of parameter write times is restricted to 1,000,000 times.
Write the parameter setting.
Write the value within the setting range. Refer to Section 5.1 for the setting range.
Transmit command [8][4], the data No., and the set data.
The data No. is expressed in hexadecimal. The decimal equivalent of the data No. value corresponds to
the parameter number.
When the data to be written is handled as decimal, the decimal point position must be specified. If it
is not specified, data cannot be written. When the data is handled as hexadecimal, specify 0 as the
decimal point position.
Write the data after making sure that it is within the upper/lower limit value range given in Section
5.1.2. Read the parameter data to be written, confirm the decimal point position, and create
transmission data to prevent error occurrence. On completion of write, read the same parameter
data to verify that data has been written correctly.
Command
Data No.
[8][4]
[0][0] to
[5][4]
Set data
See below.
Data is transferred in hexadecimal.
Decimal point position
0: No decimal point
1: Lower first digit
2: Lower second digit
3: Lower third digit
4: Lower forth digit
5: Lower fifth digit
Write mode
0: Write to EEP-ROM
3: Write to RAM
When using communication to change parameter values frequently,
set "3" here and change data on RAM in the servo amplifier.
Frequent change to EEP-ROM data may cause the permissible write
times (1 million times) of EEP-ROM to be exceeded, leading to a failure.
14 - 18
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.4 External I/O pin statuses (DIO diagnosis)
(1) External input pin status read
Read the ON/OFF statuses of the external input pins.
(a) Transmission
Transmit command [1][2] and data No. [4][0].
Command
Data No.
[1][2]
[4][0]
(b) Reply
The ON/OFF statuses of the input pins are sent back.
b31
b1 b0
1: ON
0: OFF
Command of each bit is transmitted to the master
station as hexadecimal data.
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
External input pin
CN1B-16
CN1B-17
CN1B-15
CN1B-5
CN1B-14
CN1A-8
CN1B-7
CN1B-8
bit
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
External input pin
CN1B-9
bit
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
External input pin
bit
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
External input pin
bit
External output pin
(2) External output pin status read
Read the ON/OFF statuses of the external output pins.
(a) Transmission
Transmit command [1][2] and data No. [C][0].
Command Data No.
[1][2]
[C][0]
(b) Reply
The slave station sends back the ON/OFF statuses of the output pins.
b31
b1 b0
1: ON
0: OFF
Command of each bit is transmitted to the master
station as hexadecimal data.
bit
External output pin
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CN1A-19
CN1A-18
CN1B-19
CN1B-6
CN1B-4
CN1B-18
CN1A-14
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
External output pin
bit
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
14 - 19
External output pin
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.5 Disable/enable of external I/O signals (DIO)
Inputs can be disabled independently of the external I/O signal ON/OFF. When inputs are disabled, the
input signals are recognized as follows. Among the external input signals, EMG, LSP and LSN cannot be
disabled.
Signal
External input signals (DI)
External analog input signals
Pulse train inputs
Status
OFF
0V
None
(1) Disabling/enabling the external input signals (DI), external analog input signals and pulse train
inputs with the exception of EMG, LSP and LSN.
Transmit the following communication commands:
(a) Disable
Command
Data No.
Data
[9][0]
[0][0]
1EA5
Command
Data No.
Data
[9][0]
[1][0]
1EA5
(b) Enable
(2) Disabling/enabling the external output signals (DO)
Transmit the following communication commands:
(a) Disable
Command
Data No.
Data
[9][0]
[0][3]
1EA5
Command
Data No.
Data
[9][0]
[1][3]
1EA5
(b) Enable
14 - 20
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.6 External input signal ON/OFF (test operation)
Each input signal can be turned on/off for test operation. Turn off the external input signals.
Send command [9] [2], data No. [0] [0] and data.
Command
Data No.
[9][2]
[0][0]
Set data
See below
b31
b1 b0
1: ON
0: OFF
Command of each bit is transmitted to the slave
station as hexadecimal data.
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Signal abbreviation
SON
LSP
LSN
TL
PC
RES
CR
bit
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal abbreviation
ST1
ST2
bit
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
14 - 21
Signal abbreviation
bit
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Signal abbreviation
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.7 Test operation mode
(1) Instructions for test operation mode
The test operation mode must be executed in the following procedure. If communication is interrupted
for longer than 0.5s during test operation, the servo amplifier causes the motor to be decelerated to a
stop and servo-locked. To prevent this, continue communication without a break, e.g. monitor the
status display.
(a) Execution of test operation
1) Turn off all external input signals.
2) Disable the external input signals.
Command
Data No.
Data
[9][0]
[0][0]
1EA5
3) Choose the test operation mode.
Command
Data No.
[8][B]
[8][B]
[8][B]
[8][B]
[8][B]
[0][0]
[0][0]
[0][0]
[0][0]
[0][0]
Transmission data Selection of test operation mode
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
Test operation mode cancel
Jog operation
Positioning operation
Motor-less operation
DO forced output
4) Set the data needed for test operation.
5) Start.
6) Continue communication using the status display or other command.
(b) Termination of test operation
To terminate the test operation mode, complete the corresponding operation and:
1) Clear the test operation acceleration/deceleration time constant.
Command
Data No.
Data
[A][0]
[1][2]
1EA5
2) Cancel the test operation mode.
Command
Data No.
Data
[8][B]
[0][0]
0000
3) Enable the disabled external input signals.
Command
Data No.
Data
[9][0]
[1][0]
1EA5
14 - 22
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
(2) Jog operation
Transmit the following communication commands:
(a) Setting of jog operation data
Item
Command
Data No.
Data
Speed
Acceleration/decelerati
on time constant
[A][0]
[A][0]
[1][0]
[1][1]
Write the speed [r/min] in hexadecimal.
Write the acceleration/deceleration time constant
[ms] in hexadecimal.
(b) Start
Turn on the external input signals SON and ST1/ST2 by using command [9][2]
Item
Command
Data No.
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
[9][2]
[9][2]
[0][0]
[0][0]
data No. [0][0].
Data
00000801: Turns on SON and ST1.
00001001: Turns on SON and ST2.
(3) Positioning operation
Transmit the following communication commands:
(a) Setting of positioning operation data
Item
Command
Data No.
Data
Speed
Acceleration/decelerat
ion time constant
Moving distance
[A][0]
[A][0]
[1][0]
[1][1]
[A][0]
[1][3]
Write the speed [r/min] in hexadecimal.
Write the acceleration/deceleration time constant
[ms] in hexadecimal.
Write the moving distance [pulse] in
hexadecimal.
(b) Start
Turn on the external input signals SON and ST1/ST2 by using command [9][2]
Item
Forward rotation start
Reverse rotation start
Command
[9][2]
[9][2]
data No. [0][0].
Data No.
Data
[0][0]
00000801: Turns on SON and ST1.
[0][0]
00001001: Turns on SON and ST2.
(c) Temporary stop
A temporary stop can be made during positioning operation.
Command
Data No.
Data
[A][0]
[1][5]
1EA5
Retransmit the same communication commands as at the start time to resume operation.
To stop positioning operation after a temporary stop, retransmit the temporary stop communication
command. The remaining moving distance is then cleared.
14 - 23
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.8 Output signal pin ON/OFF output signal (DO) forced output
In the test operation mode, the output signal pins can be turned on/off independently of the servo status.
Using command [9][0], disable the output signals in advance.
(1) Choosing DO forced output in test operation mode
Transmit command [8][B] data No. [0][0] data "0004" to choose DO forced output.
0 0 0 4
Selection of test operation mode
4: DO forced output (output signal forced output)
(2) External output signal ON/OFF
Transmit the following communication commands:
Command
Data No.
Setting data
[9][2]
[A][0]
See below.
b31
b1 b0
1: ON
0: OFF
Command of each bit is sent to the slave station in hexadecimal.
bit
External output pin
bit
0
CN1A-19
8
16
24
1
CN1A-18
9
17
25
2
CN1B-19
10
18
26
3
CN1B-6
11
19
27
4
CN1B-4
12
20
28
5
CN1B-18
13
21
29
6
CN1A-14
14
22
30
15
23
31
7
External output pin
bit
14 - 24
External output pin
bit
External output pin
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.9 Alarm history
(1) Alarm No. read
Read the alarm No. which occurred in the past. The alarm numbers and occurrence times of No. 0 (last
alarm) to No. 5 (sixth alarm in the past) are read.
(a) Transmission
Send command [3][3] and data No. [1][0] to [1][5]. Refer to Section 14.11.1.
(b) Reply
The alarm No. corresponding to the data No. is provided.
0 0
Alarm No. is transferred in decimal.
For example, “0032” means AL.32 and “00FF” means AL._ (no alarm).
(2) Alarm occurrence time read
Read the occurrence time of alarm which occurred in the past.
The alarm occurrence time corresponding to the data No. is provided in terms of the total time
beginning with operation start, with the minute unit omitted.
(a) Transmission
Send command [3][3] and data No. [2][0] to [2][5].
Refer to Section 14.11.1.
(b) Reply
The alarm occurrence time is transferred in decimal.
Hexadecimal must be converted into decimal.
For example, data “01F5” means that the alarm occurred in 501 hours after start of operation.
(3) Alarm history clear
Erase the alarm history.
Send command [8][2] and data No. [2][0].
Command
Data No.
Data
[8][2]
[2][0]
1EA5
14 - 25
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.10 Current alarm
(1) Current alarm read
Read the alarm No. which is occurring currently.
(a) Transmission
Send command [0][2] and data No. [0][0].
Command
Data No.
[0][2]
[0][0]
(b) Reply
The slave station sends back the alarm currently occurring.
0 0
Alarm No. is transferred in decimal.
For example, “0032” means AL.32 and “00FF” means AL._ (no alarm).
(2) Read of the status display at alarm occurrence
Read the status display data at alarm occurrence. When the data No. corresponding to the status
display item is transmitted, the data value and data processing information are sent back.
(a) Transmission
Send command [3][5] and any of data No. [8][0] to [8][E] corresponding to the status display item to
be read. Refer to Section 14.11.1.
(b) Reply
The slave station sends back the requested status display data at alarm occurrence.
0 0
Data 32 bits long (represented in hexadecimal)
(Data conversion into display type is required)
Display type
0: Conversion into decimal required
1: Used unchanged in hexadecimal
Decimal point position
0: No decimal point
1: Lower first digit (usually not used)
2: Lower second digit
3: Lower third digit
4: Lower fourth digit
5: Lower fifth digit
6: Lower sixth digit
(3) Current alarm clear
As by the entry of the RES signal, reset the servo amplifier alarm to make the servo amplifier ready to
operate. After removing the cause of the alarm, reset the alarm with no command entered.
Command
[8][2]
Data No.
[0][0]
Data
1EA5
14 - 26
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
14.12.11 Other commands
(1) Servo motor end pulse unit absolute position
Read the absolute position in the servo motor end pulse unit.
Note that overflow will occur in the position of 16384 or more revolutions from the home position.
(a) Transmission
Send command [0][2] and data No. [9][0].
Command
Data No.
[0][2]
[9][0]
(b) Reply
The slave station sends back the requested servo motor end pulses.
Absolute value is sent back in hexadecimal in
the servo motor end pulse unit.
(Must be converted into decimal)
For example, data "000186A0" is 100000 [pulse] in the motor end pulse unit.
(2) Command unit absolute position
Read the absolute position in the command unit.
(a) Transmission
Send command [0][2] and data No. [9][1].
Command
Data No.
[0][2]
[9][1]
(b) Reply
The slave station sends back the requested command pulses.
Absolute value is sent back in hexadecimal in the
command unit.
(Must be converted into decimal)
For example, data "000186A0" is 100000 [pulse] in the command unit.
(3) Software version
Reads the software version of the servo amplifier.
(a) Transmission
Send command [0][2] and data No.[7][0].
Command
Data No.
[0][2]
[7][0]
(b) Reply
The slave station returns the software version requested.
Space
Software version (15 digits)
14 - 27
14. COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
MEMO
14 - 28
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
CAUTION
If an absolute position erase alarm (AL.25) has occurred, always perform home
position setting again. Not doing so can cause runaway.
15.1 Outline
15.1.1 Features
For normal operation, as shown below, the encoder consists of a detector designed to detect a position
within one revolution and a cumulative revolution counter designed to detect the number of revolutions.
The absolute position detection system always detects the absolute position of the machine and keeps it
battery-backed, independently of whether the general-purpose programming controller power is on or off.
Therefore, once the home position is defined at the time of machine installation, home position return is
not needed when power is switched on thereafter.
If a power failure or a fault occurs, restoration is easy.
Also, the absolute position data, which is battery-backed by the super capacitor in the encoder, can be
retained within the specified period (cumulative revolution counter value retaining time) if the cable is
unplugged or broken.
General purpose programmable
controller
Positioning module
Current
position
data
Changing the
current position
data
I/O module
Input
Output
Home position data
EEPROM memory
LSO
1XO
Backed up in the
case of power failure
Current
position
data
LS
1X
Detecting the Detecting the
number of
position within
revolutions
one revolution
Position control
Speed control
CPU
Servo amplifier
Pulse train
(command)
Battery MR-BAT
Servo motor
1 pulse/rev Accumulative
revolution counter
Super capacitor
High speed serial
communication
Within-one-revolution counter
A, B, Z phase signals
(Position detector)
15.1.2 Restrictions
The absolute position detection system cannot be configured under the following conditions. Test
operation cannot be performed in the absolute position detection system, either. To perform test
operation, choose incremental in parameter No.1.
(1) Speed control mode, torque control mode.
(2) Control switch-over mode (position/speed, speed/torque, torque/speed).
(3) Stroke-less coordinate system, e.g. rotary shaft, infinitely long positioning.
(4) Changing of electronic gear after home position setting.
(5) Use of alarm code output.
15 - 1
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.2 Specifications
(1) Specification list
Item
Description
System
Electronic battery backup system
1 piece of lithium battery ( primary battery, nominal
Battery
3.6V)
Type: MR-BAT or A6BAT
Maximum revolution range
Home position
(Note 1) Maximum speed at power failure
500r/min
(Note 2) Battery backup time
Approx. 10,000 hours (battery life with power off)
(Note 3) Data holding time during battery
32767 rev.
2 hours at delivery, 1 hour in 5 years after delivery
replacement
Battery storage period
5 years from date of manufacture
Note: 1. Maximum speed available when the shaft is rotated by external force at the time of power failure or the
like.
2. Time to hold data by a battery with power off. It is recommended to replace the battery in three years
independently of whether power is kept on or off.
3. Period during which data can be held by the super capacitor in the encoder after power-off, with the
battery voltage low or the battery removed, or during which data can be held with the encoder cable
disconnected.
Battery replacement should be finished within this period.
(2) Configuration
Positioning module
I/O module
AD71 AD71S2 AD71S7
A1SD71S2 A1SD71S7
AX40 41 42
AD75
AY40 41 42
A1SD75
FX-1PG FX-1GM
FX(E)-20GM FX-10GM
Programmable controller
AD75
FX2-32MT
Servo amplifier
etc.
CN1A
CN2
I/O
CN1B
CON1
Servo motor
Battery (MR-BAT)
(3) Parameter setting
" in parameter No.1 to make the absolute position detection system valid.
Set " 1
Parameter No. 1
1
Selection of absolute position detection system
0: Incremental system
1: Absolute position detection system
15 - 2
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.3 Battery installation procedure
Before starting battery installation procedure, make sure that the charge lamp is off
more than 10 minutes after power-off. Then, confirm that the voltage is safe in the
tester or the like. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
WARNING
POINT
The internal circuits of the servo amplifier may be damaged by static electricity.
Always take the following precautions:
Ground human body and work bench.
Do not touch the conductive areas, such as connector pins and electrical
parts, directly by hand.
(1) Open the operation window. (When the model used is the MR-J2S-200A MR-J2S-350A or more, also
remove the front cover.)
(2) Install the battery in the battery holder.
(3) Install the battery connector into CON1 until it clicks.
Battery connector
Battery connector
Operation window
CON1
CON1
Battery
Battery
Battery holder
Battery holder
For MR-J2S-200A MR-J2S-350A
For MR-J2S-100A or less
Battery connector
CON1
Battery holder
Battery
For MR-J2S-500A MR-J2S-700A
15 - 3
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.4 Standard connection diagram
Servo amplifier
(Note 2) Stroke end in forward rotation
Stroke end in reverse rotation
External torque control
Reset
EMG (Note 1)
Electromagnetic
brake output
Emergency stop
Servo-on
Output
ABS transmission
mode
ABS request
ABS bit 0
ABS bit 1
Send data ready
RA2
Reset
Input
VDD
COM
LSP
LSN
TL
RES
SG
CN1B-3
CN1B-13
CN1B-16
CN1B-17
CN1B-7 (Note 3)
CN1B-14
CN1B-10
EMG CN1B-15
SON CN1B-5
ABSM CN1B-8
ABSR CN1B-9
DO1 CN1B-4
ZSP CN1B-19
TLC CN1B-6
I/O module
Near-zero point signal
Stop signal
Dog
Stop
Power supply (24V)
Positioning
module
Ready
Zero-point
signal
Clear
Command
pulses
(for opencollector type)
Upper limit setting
SG CN1A-10
VDD
RD
P15R
OP
CR
SG
CN1B-3
CN1A-19
CN1A-4
CN1A-14
CN1A-8
CN1A-20
PP
PG
NP
NG
CN1A-3
CN1A-13
CN1A-2
CN1A-12
P15R CN1B-11
TLA CN1B-12
LG CN1B-1
SD
Plate
Torque limit
10V/max.torque
Note: 1. Always install the emergency stop switch.
2. For operation, always short the forward/reverse rotation stroke end (LSN/LSP) with SG.
3. When using the torque limit signal (TL), set "
4" in parameter No.46 to assign TL to
pin CN1B-7.
15 - 4
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.5 Signal explanation
When the absolute position data is transferred, the signals of connector CN1 change as described in this
section. They return to the previous status on completion of data transfer. The other signals are as
described in Section 3.3.2.
For the I/O interfaces (symbols in the I/O Category column in the table), refer to Section 3.6.
Signal name
ABS transfer
mode
ABS request
Code
ABSM
ABSR
Pin No.
(Note)
CN1B-8
Function/Application
I/O
Control
category
mode
While ABSM is shorted by connection to SG, the servo
amplifier is in the ABS transfer mode, and the functions
DI-1
of ZSP, TLC, and D01 are as indicated in this table.
(Note)
ABSR-SG are shorted to request the ABS data in the
CN1B-9
ABS transfer mode.
DI-1
Indicates the lower bit of the ABS data (2 bits) which is
sent from the servo to the programmable controller in
ABS bit 0
D01
CN1B-4 the ABS transfer mode.
DO-1
If there is a signal, the circuit between D01 and SG is
P
closed.
(Position
Indicates the upper bit of the ABS data (2 bits) which is
control)
sent from the servo to the programmable controller in
ABS bit 1
ZSP
CN1B-19 the ABS transfer mode.
DO-1
If there is a signal, the circuit between ZSP and SG is
closed.
Indicates that the data to be sent is being prepared in
Send data ready
TLC
CN1B-6 the ABS transfer mode. At the completion for the ready
DO-1
state, the circuit between TLC and SG is closed.
Home position
setting
When CR-SG are shorted, the position control counter is
CR
CN1A-8 cleared and the home position data is stored into the
DI-1
non-volatile memory (backup memory).
Note: When "Used in absolute position detection system" is selected in parameter No. 1, pin CN1B-8
acts as the ABS transfer mode (ABSM) signal and pin CN1B-9 as the ABS request (ABSR) signal.
They do not return to the original signals if data transfer ends.
15 - 5
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.6 Startup procedure
(1) Battery installation.
Refer to Section 15.3 installation of absolute position backup battery.
(2) Parameter setting
Set "1
"in parameter No. 1 of the servo amplifier and switch power off, then on.
(3) Resetting of absolute position erase alarm (AL.25)
After connecting the encoder cable, the absolute position erase alarm (AL.25) occurs at first power-on.
Leave the alarm as it is for a few minutes, then switch power off, then on to reset the alarm.
(4) Confirmation of absolute position data transfer
When the servo-on signal is turned on, the absolute position data is transferred to the programmable
controller. When the ABS data is transferred properly:
(a) The ready output (RD) turns on.
(b) The programmable controller/ABS data ready contact (M3 for A1SD71, M99 for 1PG) turns on.
(c) The servo configuration software ABS data display window (refer to Section 15.9) and
programmable controller side ABS data registers (D3, D4 for A1SD71, D106, D107 for 1PG) show
the same value (at the home position address of 0).
If any warning such as ABS time-out warning (AL.E5) or programmable controller side transfer
error occurs, refer to Section 15.10 or Chapter 10 and take corrective action.
(5) Home position setting
The home position must be set if:
(a) System setup is performed;
(b) The servo amplifier has been changed;
(c) The servo motor has been changed; or
(d) The absolute position erase alarm (AL.25) occurred.
In the absolute position system, the absolute position coordinates are made up by making home
position setting at the time of system setup.
The motor shaft may misoperate if positioning operation is performed without home position setting.
Always make home position setting before starting operation.
For the home position setting method and types, refer to Section 15.7.3.
15 - 6
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.7 Absolute position data transfer protocol
POINT
After switching on the ABS transfer mode (ABSM), turn on the servo-on
signal (SON). When the ABS transfer mode is off, turning on the servo-on
signal (SON) does not switch on the base circuit.
15.7.1 Data transfer procedure
Each time the SON signal is turned ON (when the power is switched ON for example), the programmable
controller reads the position data (present position) of the servo amplifier.
Time-out monitoring is performed by the programmable controller.
Servo amplifier
Programmable controller
Every time the SON is
turned ON, the ABS transfer
mode signal is turned ON
to set the data to be
transmitted.
ABS transfer mode ON
DI0 allocation change
Send data ready ON
Watch dog timer
Reading 2 bits
Shift and addition
Repeated to configure 32-bit data
Send data ready OFF
16 times
<Sumcheck data>
The data is read in units of
2 bits; the read data is written
to the lowest bits, and the
register is shifted right until
6-bit data is configured.
Repeated to configure 6-bit data
Transmission data set
3 times
A sum check is executed
for the received 32-bit data.
After making sure that
there are no errors in the data,
the current position is set.
End processing
ABS request ON
Start processing
SON ON
<Current position data>
The data is read in units of
2 bits; the read data is written
to the lowest bits, and the
register is shifted right until
32-bit data is configured.
ABS request OFF
Send data ready ON
ABS request ON
Transmission data set
Send data ready OFF
Watch dog timer
Reading 2 bits
Shift and addition
ABS request OFF
Send data ready ON
Setting the current
position
ABS transfer mode OFF
DI0 allocation change
Sum check
TLC (send data ready) OFF
15 - 7
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.7.2 Transfer method
The sequence in which the base circuit is turned ON (servo-on) when it is in the OFF state due to the
servo-on signal (SON) going OFF, an emergency stop, or alarm, is explained below. In the absolute
position detection system, every time the servo-on (SON) signal is turned on, the ABS transfer mode
(ABSM) signal should always be turned on to read the current position in the servo amplifier to the
controller. The servo amplifier transmits to the controller the current position latched when the ABS
transfer mode (ABSM) signal switches from OFF to ON. At the same time, this data is set as a position
command value inside the servo amplifier. Unless the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is turned ON,
the base circuit cannot be turned ON.
(1) At power-on
(a) Timing chart
Power
supply
ON
OFF
If SON is turned ON before ABSM is input
Servo-on
(SON)
ON
OFF
ON
4)
ABS transfer mode
(ABSM)
OFF
ABS request
(ABSR)
Send data ready
(TLC)
ON
2), 3)
During transfer of ABS
During transfer of ABS
(Note)
(Note)
(Note)
(Note)
OFF
ON
OFF
(Note)
Transmission
(ABS) data
D01:bit1
ZSP:bit2
(Note)
ABS data
ABS data
80[ms]
80[ms]
ON
Base circuit
OFF
Ready
(RD)
ON
OFF
1)
Operation
enabled
Note: For details, refer to (1) (b) in this section.
15 - 8
Operation
enabled
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
1) The ready signal (RD) is turned ON when the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is turned OFF
after transmission of the ABS data.
While the ready signal (RD) is ON, the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) input is not accepted.
2) Even if the servo-on (SON) signal is turned ON before the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is
turned ON, the base circuit is not turned ON until the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is
turned ON.
If a servo alarm has occurred, the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is not received.
The ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) allows data transmission even while a servo warning is
occurring.
3) If the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is turned OFF during the ABS transfer mode, the ABS
transfer mode is interrupted and the time-out error (AL.E5) occurs.
4) The functions of output signals such as ZSP, TLC, D01, and INP change depending on the
ON/OFF state of the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM).
Note that if the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is turned ON for a purpose other than ABS
data transmission, the output signals will be assigned the functions of ABS data transmission.
Symbol
Pin No.
Output signal
ABS transfer mode (ABSM): OFF
ABS transfer mode (ABSM): ON
CN1B-4
Positioning completion
ABS data bit 0
ZSP
CN1B-19
Zero speed
ABS data bit 1
TLC
CN1B-6
During torque limit control
Send data ready
CN1A-18
Positioning completion
ABS data bit 0
(Note)
D01
(Note)
INP
Note: CN1B-4 and CN1A-18 output the same signals. (To enter the positioning completion
signal into INPS of the AD75, connect CN1A-18.)
15 - 9
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(b) Detailed description of absolute position data transfer
Servo-on
(programmable
controller)
Servo-on
(SON)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(Note)
ABS transfer mode
(ABSM)
ABS request
(ABSR)
Send data ready
(TLC)
ON
7)
1)
During transfer of ABS
OFF
3)
ON
5)
OFF
ON
2)
4)
6)
OFF
Transmission (ABS) data
Lower
2 bits
Check sum
Upper 2 bits
Note: If the servo-on signal (SON) is not turned ON within 1 second after the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM)
is turned ON, an SON time-out warning (AL.EA) occurs. This warning, however, does not interrupt data
transmission. It is automatically cleared when the servo-on (SON) signal is turned ON.
1) The programmable controller turns ON the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) and servo-on
signals (SON) at the leading edge of the internal servo-on signal.
2) In response to the ABS transfer mode signal, the servo detects and calculates the absolute
position and turns ON the send data ready (TLC) signal to notify the programmable controller
that the servo is ready for data transmission.
3) After acknowledging that the ready to send (TLC) signal has been turned ON, the
programmable controller turns ABS request (ABSR) ON.
4) In response to ABS request (ABSR), the servo outputs the lower 2 bits of the ABS data and the
ready to send (TLC) signal in the OFF state.
5) After acknowledging that the ready to send (TLC) signal has been turned OFF, which implies
that 2 bits of the ABS data have been transmitted, the programmable controller reads the lower
2 bits of the ABS data and then turns OFF the ABS request (ABSR).
6) The servo turns ON the ready to send (TLC) so that it can respond to the next request.
Steps 3) to 6) are repeated until 32-bit data and the 6-bit check sum have been transmitted.
7) After receiving of the check sum, the programmable controller turns the ABS transfer mode
signal (ABSM) OFF.
If the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is turned OFF during data transmission, the ABS
transfer mode is interrupted.
15 - 10
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(c) Checksum
The check sum is the code which is used by the programmable controller to check for errors in the
received ABS data. The 6-bit check sum is transmitted following the 32-bit ABS data.
At the programmable controller, calculate the sum of the received ABS data using the ladder
program and compare it with the check sum code sent from the servo.
The method of calculating the check sum is shown. Every time the programmable controller
receives 2 bits of ABS data, it adds the data to obtain the sum of the received data. The check sum
is 6-bit data.
Negative data is available for the FX-1PG and unavailable for the A1SD71.
Example: ABS data:
10 (FFFFFFF6H)
10 b
01 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
11 b
101101 b
<Appendix>
Decimal
10
FFFF FFF6
Hexadecimal
Binary
1111 1111 1111
0110
When the binary data of each 2bits of the
ABS data is added up, "10 1101b " is obtained.
Therefore, the check sum of " 10" (ABS data) is "2Db"
15 - 11
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(2) Transmission error
(a) Time-out warning(AL.E5)
In the ABS transfer mode, the time-out processing shown below is executed at the servo. If a timeout error occurs, an ABS time-out warning (AL.E5) is output.
The ABS time-out warning (AL.E5) is cleared when the ABS transfer mode (ABSM) changes from
OFF to ON.
1) ABS request OFF-time time-out check (applied to 32-bit ABS data in 2-bit units check sum)
If the ABS request signal is not turned ON by the programmable controller within 5s after the
send data ready signal is turned ON, this is regarded as a transmission error and the ABS timeout warning (AL.E5) is output.
ON
ABS transfer mode
OFF
5s
ON
ABS request
OFF
Signal is not turned ON
ON
Send data ready
OFF
Yes
AL.E5 warning
No
2) ABS request ON-time time-out check (applied to 32-bit ABS data in 2-bit units check sum)
If the ABS request signal is not turned OFF by the programmable controller within 5s after the
send data ready signal is turned OFF, this is regarded as the transmission error and the ABS
time-out warning (AL.E5) is output.
ON
ABS transfer mode
OFF
5s
ON
ABS request
OFF
Signal is not turned OFF
ON
Send data ready
OFF
Yes
AL.E5 warning
No
15 - 12
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
3) ABS transfer mode finish-time time-out check
If the ABS transfer mode signal is not turned OFF within 5s after the last ready to send signal
(19th signal for ABS data transmission) is turned ON, it is regarded as the transmission error
and the ABS time-out warning (AL.E5) is output.
5s
ON
ABS transfer mode
OFF
Signal is not turned OFF
1
ON
2
3
4
18
19
ABS request
OFF
ON
Send data ready
1
OFF
2
3
4
18
19
Yes
AL.E5 warning
No
(b) Check sum error
If the check sum error occurs, the programmable controller should retry transmission of the ABS
data.
Using the ladder check program, turn OFF the ABS transfer mode (ABSM) and servo-on (SON)
signals once. Turn them ON again after an OFF time of longer than 20 ms.
If the ABS data transmission fails to end normally even after retry, regard this situation as an
ABS check sum error and execute error processing.
The start command should be interlocked with the ABS data ready signal to disable positioning
operation when an check sum error occurs.
20ms
or more
20ms
or more
20ms
or more
Retry 1
Retry 2
ON
Servo-on
OFF
ON
ABS transfer mode
OFF
ON
ABS request
OFF
ON
Send data ready
OFF
Yes
ABS check sum error
No
15 - 13
Retry 3
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(3) At the time of alarm reset
If an alarm occurs, turn OFF the servo-on (SON) signal by detecting the alarm output (ALM).
If an alarm has occurred, the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) cannot be accepted.
In the reset state, the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) can be input.
Servo-on
(SON)
Reset
(RES)
ABS transfer mode
(ABSM)
ABS request
(ABSR)
Send data ready
(TLC)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
During transfer of ABS
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Transmission
(ABS) data
ABS data
80[ms]
ON
Base circuit
OFF
Alarm output
(ALM)
Ready
(RD)
ON
OFF
ON
Operation
enabled
OFF
Occurrence of alarm
15 - 14
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(4) At the time of emergency stop reset
(a) If the power is switched ON in the emergency stop state
The emergency stop state can be reset while the ABS data is being transferred.
If the emergency stop state is reset while the ABS data is transmitted, the base circuit is turned
ON 80[ms] after resetting. If the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is OFF when the base circuit is
turned ON, the ready signal (RD) is turned ON 20[ms] after the turning ON of the base circuit. If
the ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is ON when the base circuit is turned ON, it is turned OFF
and then the ready signal (RD) is turned ON. The ABS data can be transmitted after the
emergency stop state is reset.
The current position in the servo amplifier is updated even during an emergency stop. When servoon (SON) and ABS transfer mode (ABSM) are turned ON during an emergency stop as shown
below, the servo amplifier transmits to the controller the current position latched when the ABS
transfer mode (ABSM) switches from OFF to ON, and at the same time, the servo amplifier sets
this data as a position command value. However, since the base circuit is OFF during an
emergency stop, the servo-lock status is not encountered. Therefore, if the servo motor is rotated by
external force or the like after the ABS transfer mode (ABSM) is turned ON, this travel is
accumulated in the servo amplifier as droop pulses. If the emergency stop is cleared in this status,
the base circuit turns ON and the motor returns to the original position rapidly to compensate for
the droop pulses. To avoid this status, reread the ABS data before clearing the emergency stop.
Power
supply
ON
OFF
Servo-on
(SON)
Emergency stop
(EMG)
ABS transfer mode
(ABSM)
ABS request
(ABSR)
Send data ready
(TLC)
ON
OFF
Reset
ON
OFF
ON
During transfer of ABS
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ABS data
Send (ABS) data
80[ms]
ON
Base circuit
OFF
20[ms]
Ready
(RD)
ON
Operation
enabled
OFF
15 - 15
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(b) If emergency stop is activated during servo-on
The ABS transfer mode signal (ABSM) is permissible while in the emergency stop state. In this
case, the base circuit and the ready signal (RD) are turned ON after the emergency stop state is
reset.
Servo-on
(SON)
Emergency stop
(EMG)
ABS transfer mode
(ABSM)
ABS request
(ABSR)
Send data ready
(TLC)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
During transfer of ABS
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ABS data
Send (ABS) data
80[ms]
ON
Base circuit
OFF
Ready
(RD)
ON
Operation
enabled
OFF
15 - 16
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.7.3 Home position setting
(1) Dog type home position return
Preset a home position return creep speed at which the machine will not be given impact. On detection
of a zero pulse, the home position setting signal (CR) is turned from off to on. At the same time, the
servo amplifier clears the droop pulses, comes to a sudden stop, and stores the stop position into the
non-volatile memory as the home position ABS data.
The home position setting signal should be turned on after it has been confirmed that the in-position
(D01 or INP) is on. If this condition is not satisfied, the home position setting warning (AL.96) will
occur, but that warning will be reset automatically by making home position return correctly.
The number of home position setting times is limited to 1,000,000 times.
Servo Motor
Near-zero point dog
Dog signal
(DOG)
Completion of
positioning
(D01 or INP)
Home position
setting (CR)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
20 [ms] or more
Home position
ABS data
20 [ms] or more
Update
15 - 17
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(2) Data set type home position return
Move the machine to the position where the home position is to be set by performing manual operation
such as jog operation to turn the motor shaft more than one revolution. When the home position
setting signal (CR) is on for longer than 20ms, the stop position is stored into the non-volatile memory
as the home position ABS data.
The home position setting signal should be turned on after it has been confirmed that the in-position
(D01 or INP) is on. If this condition is not satisfied, the home position setting warning (AL.96) will
occur, but that warning will be reset automatically by making home position return correctly.
The number of home position setting times is limited to 1,000,000 times.
Manual feed (JOG, etc.)
(more than 1 revolution
of the motor shaft)
Servo Motor
Completion of
positioning
(D01 or INP)
Home position
setting (CR)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
20 [ms] or more
Home position
ABS data
Update
15 - 18
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.7.4 Use of servo motor with electromagnetic brake
The timing charts at power on/off and servo-on (SON) on/off are given below.
Preset "
1 " in parameter No. 1 to make the electromagnetic brake interlock signal (MBR) usable.
When the ABS transfer mode is ON, the electromagnetic brake interlock (MBR) is used as the ABS data
bit 1.
Hence, make up an external sequence which will cause the electromagnetic brake torque to be generated
by the ABS mode (ABSM) and electromagnetic brake interlock signals.
Power
supply
ON
OFF
Servo-on
(SON)
ABS transfer mode
(ABSM)
ABS request
(ABSR)
Send data ready
(TLC)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
During transmission
of ABS
During transmission
of ABS
ABS data
ABS data
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Send (ABS) data
80 [ms]
80 [ms]
ON
Base circuit
OFF
20 [ms]
Ready
(RD)
20 [ms]
ON
OFF
Tb
Electromagnetic
brake (MBR)
Electromagnetic
brake torque
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
15 - 19
Tb
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.7.5 How to process the absolute position data at detection of stroke end
The servo amplifier stops the acceptance of the command pulse when stroke end (LSP LSN) is detected,
clears the droop pulses to 0 at the same time, and stops the servo motor rapidly.
At this time, the programmable controller keeps outputting the command pulse. Since this causes a
discrepancy between the absolute position data of the servo amplifier and the programmable controller, a
difference will occur between the position data of the servo amplifier and that of the programmable
controller.
To prevent this difference in position data from occurring, do as described below. When the servo
amplifier has detected the stroke end, perform jog operation or the like to clear the stroke end. After that,
switch the servo-on signal off once, then on again, or switch the power off once, then on again. This causes
the absolute position data of the servo amplifier to be transferred to the programmable controller,
restoring the normal data.
15 - 20
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.8 Examples of use
15.8.1 MELSEC-A1S (A1SD71)
(1) Instructions
The absolute coordinate system (programmable controller coordinate system) of the A1SD71 (AD71)
only covers the range in which the address increases (positive coordinate values) on moving away from
the machine home position (the position reached in the home position return operation). Therefore, if
the motor enters the range where the coordinate value is negative due to the load torque or a fall on a
vertical axis when the power is turned ON/OFF at a point near the machine home position, the system
fails to detect the absolute position. To prevent this problem, it is necessary to set the home position
(operation home position) for positioning in addition to the machine home position.
(a) The home position should be set in the direction in which the position address of the programmable
controller coordinate system increases on moving away from machine home position, as illustrated
below. Note that the home position for positioning must be more than one revolution of the servo
motor shaft from the machine home position.
If the address of the machine home position is changed to any value other than "0", the home
position should be set in the direction in which the position address increases on moving away from
the machine home position (machine home position after changing the home position address) and
at a point removed from the machine home position by more than one revolution of the motor shaft.
Machine home position
Programmable
controller coordinate
system
ABS
coordinate
system
20000
Home position
(operation home position)
50000
0 10000
0
50000
Direction in which
address increases
Home position
Programmable
controller coordinate
system
50000
ABS
coordinate
system
50000
Direction in which
address increases
More than 1 revolution
of motor shaft
Machine home
position
10000 0
0
20000
More than 1 revolution
of motor shaft
a) If revolution direction parameter (Pr. 14) 0
b) If revolution direction parameter (Pr. 14) 1
(b) In the range where the address decreases on moving away from the machine home position, do not
turn the power supply to the programmable controller or the servo amplifier, the servo-on
pushbutton switch, or the PC-RESET switch, ON/OFF. If any of these operations are attempted,
the ABS coordinate error (Y4B) is output since the absolute position cannot be detected.
Machine home position
Programmable
controller coordinate
system
ABS
20000
coordinate
ABS coordinate
system
value error occurs
if power is turned
on within this range
Home position
0 10000
0
Home position
50000
50000
Direction in which
address increases
Programmable
controller coordinate 50000
system
ABS
coordinate
system
10000 0
50000
Direction in which
address increases
Absolute position data can be
detected
Absolute position data can be
detected
a) If revolution direction parameter (Pr. 14) 0
Machine
home position
0
20000
ABS coordinate
value error occurs
if power is turned
on within this range
b) If revolution direction parameter (Pr. 14) 1
15 - 21
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
If the address of the machine home position is changed to any coordinate value other than "0", the
programmable controller coordinate system will be as illustrated below.
The power should be turned ON/OFF in the range in which the address increases on moving away
from the home position.
Machine home position Home position
Programmable
controller coordinate
20000 30000
0
system
ABS
coordinate
system
20000
0
Machine home position Home position
Programmable
controller coordinate
30000 20000
70000
0
system
70000
ABS
coordinate
system
50000
Direction in which
address increases
50000
Direction in which
address increases
Absolute position data can be detected
20000
Absolute position data can be detected
ABS coordinate value error occurs if
power is turned on within this range
* Home position address changed to "2000"
a) If revolution direction parameter (Pr. 14)
0
ABS coordinate value error occurs if
power is turned on within this range
* Home position address changed to "2000"
0
b) If revolution direction parameter (Pr. 14) 1
(c) In a positioning program, the address of the positioning point should be determined by adding the
home position address to the target position address.
Example) After home position return, execute positioning at 1) to 3).
1) Positioning at position address 80000
(PC coordinate 140000)
2) Positioning at position address 130000
(PC coordinate 190000)
3) Positioning at position address 0
(PC coordinate 60000)
1)
(80000 60000)
ABS coordinate
error region
Programmable
controller
coordinate
system
ABS coordinate
system
Machine home position Home position (operation home
position)
0 10000
50000
50000 60000
100000
0
2)
(130000 60000)
150000
50000
(0 60000)
3)
Stroke limit
* Home position address changed to "50000"
Mechanical limit
If revolution direction parameter (Pr. 14) 0
15 - 22
Direction in which
address increases
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(d) Slot arrangement
The sequence programs presented in this section show I/O numbers (X, Y) assuming the
arrangement of modules on the main base unit is as illustrated below. A1SD71 is mounted at I/O
slots 0 and 1, a 16-point input module at slot 2, and 16-point output module at slot 3. If the actual
arrangement of the modules differs from this arrangement, change the X and Y numbers
accordingly.
The numbers of the devices (M, D, T, etc.) used in the program can be changed as required.
I/O slot No.
0
A1S
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
A1SD71
Power
CPU
supply
16-point output module
16-point input module
[Numbers used] X, X0-X, Y2F
Example arrangement of modules
(e) Points
1) The A1SD71 has 48 I/O points and occupies 2 slots. For I/O allocation using the GPP function,
follow the instructions given below.
First slot: Vacant slot 16 points
Second slot: Special function module 32 points
2) To execute the FROM/TO instruction for the A1SD71, use the head I/O number of the second
slot.
X30 to X3F
Y40 to Y4F
A1SD71
16-point input
module
16-point output
module
A1S
CPU
Note: The program example given
in (3) in this section is for 1-axis
control. Slot allocations are as
illustrated to the left. To use the
system for 2-axis control,
increase the number of I/O
points.
X,Y000 X,Y010
to
to
X,Y00F X,Y02F
I/O numbers to be set
with FROM/TO instruction
Therefore, the I/O number to be set with the FROM/TO instruction is head I/O number allocated
to the A1SD71 010H.
3) By setting "0 point of vacant slot" for the first slot of the A1SD71 in the "I/O allocation" of the
GPP function, the 16 points in the first slot can be saved.
In this case, the I/O number to be set with the FROM/TO instruction is the same number as the
head I/O number allocated to the A1SD71.
A1S
CPU
X,Y000
to
X,Y00F
A1SD71
I/O numbers to be set with FROM/TO instruction
15 - 23
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(2) Connection diagram
Servo amplifier
General purpose
programmable controller
CN1B
A1S62P
24
24G
FG
LG
Power
supply
VDD
COM
SG
SG
3
13
10
20
DO1
ZSP
TLC
ALM
EMG
4
19
6
18
15
SON
ABSM
ABSR
RES
5
8
9
14
INPUT
AC100/200
A1SCPU
A1SX40
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
ABS bit 0/Completion of positioning
ABS bit 1/Zero speed
Send data ready/Torque limit control
Trouble
Alarm reset
Emergency stop
Servo-on
Home position return
Operation mode I
Operation mode II
Position start
Position stop
(Note 3)
JOG
JOG
COM
NC
NC
A1SY40
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Servo-on
ABS transfer mode
ABS request
Alarm reset
RA2
Electromagnetic
brake output
(Note 4)
COM1
8
9
A
B
(Note 2)
COM2
A1SD71-S2
(Note 1)
DOG
STOP
6B
6A
Power supply 5A
RDY
5B
9A
PGO
9B
12A
CLEAR
12B
Power supply 17A
PULSE- 15A
F
15B
PULSE- 16A
R
16B
CN1A
RD
P15R
OP
CR
SG
OPC
PP
SG
NP
SD
19
4
14
8
10
11
3
20
2
Plate
Note: 1. To be connected for dog type home position setting. The connection in Note 2 is not required.
2. To be connected for data set type home position setting. The connection in Note 1 is not required.
3. This circuit is for reference only.
4. The electromagnetic brake output should be controlled by connecting the programmable controller output to a relay.
15 - 24
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(3) Sequence program example
(a) Conditions
This sample program is an ABS sequence program example for a single axis (X axis).
To transmit the ABS data using the OFF-to-ON change of the servo-on signal as the trigger.
1) When the servo-ON signal and the GND of the power supply are shorted, the ABS data is
transmitted when the power to the servo amplifier power is turned ON, or at the leading edge of
the RUN signal after a PC reset operation (PC-RESET). The ABS data is also transmitted when
an alarm is reset, or when the emergency stop state is reset.
2) If a check sum discrepancy is detected in the transmitted data, ABS data transmission is retried
up to three times. If the check sum discrepancy is still detected after retrying, the ABS check
sum error is generated (Y4A ON).
3) The following time periods are measured and if the ON/OFF state does not change within the
specified time, the ABS communication error is generated (Y4A ON).
ON period of ABS transfer mode (Y41)
ON period of ABS request (Y42)
OFF period of ready to send ABS data (X32).
4) If the relationship between the polarity ( ) of the received ABS data and the setting value for
parameter No. 14 (rotating direction) of A1SD71 (AD71) involves negative coordinate values,
which cannot be handled by the A1SD71 (AD71), the ABS coordinate error is generated (Y4B
ON).
(b) Device list
X30
X31
X32
X33
X34
X35
X36
X37
X38
X39
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D100
D101
T0
T1
T2
T3
T10 (Note 1)
T200
X input contact
ABS bit 0 / completion of positioning
ABS bit 1 / zero speed
Send ABS data ready / torque limit control
Servo alarm
Error reset
Servo emergency stop
Servo-on
Home position return start
Operation mode I
Operation mode II
D register
ABS data transmission counter
Check sum transmission counter
Check sum addition counter
ABS data: Lower 16 bits
ABS data: Upper 16 bits
ABS data 2-bit receiving buffer
Check data in case of check sum error
Retry frequency
Forward rotation direction
Home position address: Lower 16 bits
Home position address: Upper 16 bits
Received shift data: Lower 16 bits
Received shift data: Upper 16 bits
T timer
ABS transfer mode timer
ABS request response timer
Retry wait timer
Ready to send response timer
Clear signal ON timer
Transmitted data read 10ms delay timer
Y40
Y41
Y42
Y43
X44 (Note 2)
Y45 (Note 1)
Y48
Y49
Y4A
Y4B
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M20 (Note 1)
M21 (Note 2)
C0
C1
C2
Note 1: Necessary when data set type home position return is executed.
2: Necessary in the event of electromagnetic brake output.
15 - 25
Y output contact
Servo-on
ABS transfer mode
ABS request
Alarm reset
Electromagnetic brake output
Clear
Servo alarm
ABS communication error
ABS check sum error
ABS coordinate error
M contact
ABS data transmission start
Sum check completion
Sum check discrepancy
ABS data ready
Transmission data read enabled
Check sum 2 bits read completion
ABS 2 bits read completion
ABS 2 bits request
Servo-on request
Servo alarm
ABS data transmission retry start pulse
Retry flag setting
Retry flag reset
PLS processing command
Clear signal ON timer request
Data set type home position return request
C counter
ABS data receive frequency counter
Check sum receive frequency counter
Retry counter
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(c) ABS data transfer program for X axis
This sequence program example assumes the following conditions:
Parameters of the A1SD71-S2 (AD71) positioning module
1) Unit setting
: 3 pulse (PLS)
2) Travel per pulse : 1 1 pulse
To select the unit other than the pulse, conversion into the unit of the feed command value per
pulse is required. Hence, add the following program to the area marked Note in the sequence
program.
<Additional program>
D*P K
D3 D3
Item
mm
inch
degree
Unit setting
0
1
2
Travel per pulse
0.1 to 1.0 to
Unit of travel
10.0
0.00001 0.0001
to
m/PLS
Constant K for
conversion into
unit of travel
1 to
10 to
to
0.001
100
1 to
10 to
3
0.00001 0.0001
to
to
inch/PLS
pulse
0.001
to
to
degree/PLS
100
1 to
10 to
PLS
100
None
Reference
For 1 m/PLS, set constant K to 10
For 5 m/PLS, set constant K to 50
When the unit setting is pulse, the additional program is not required.
M9038
TOP
Initial
pulse
ON
K1
A1SD71 error reset
D7
Setting retry count (3 times)
A0
Loading received shift data
SET
M8
Servo-on request
RST
M3
Resetting ready to send
RST
M8
Resetting servo-on request
RST
C0
Resetting ABS transfer
counter at servo OFF
RST
C1
Resetting checksum transfer
counter at servo OFF
Y40
Servo-on output
M0
ABS I/F start
H0001 K201 K1
MOV
K3
Initial setting
M9039
DMOV D100
PC RUN
X36
Servo-on PB
X36
Servo-on
PB
M8
M9
M11
Servo-on
request
Error
flag
Retry flag
setting
PLS
1
(To be continued)
15 - 26
1
Servo-on control
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
1
(Continued from preceding page)
1
M8
PLS
M12
Setting retry flag
RST
C2
Resetting retry counter
Y43
Alarm reset output
M9
Error flag output
RST
M3
Resetting ready to send
RST
M8
Resetting servo-on request
Y48
Servo alarm
Servo-on request
M12
ABS data
transmission
retry control
Retry flag reset request
X34
M9
Error reset Error flag
PB
Y43
Alarm reset
X35
Emergency
stop PB
X33
Servo alarm
detection, alarm
reset control
Servo alarm
M0
ABS data
transfer
start
MOV
K16
D0
Initializing ABS data transfer
counter
MOV
K3
D1
Initializing check sum transfer
counter
MOV
K0
D2
Initializing check sum register
MOV
K0
D5
Initializing ABS data register
DMOV K0
D9
Initializing ABS data register
DMOV K0
A0
Initializing ABS data register
RST
Y4B
Resetting error for ABS
coordinate
RST
C0
Resetting ABS transfer
counter
RST
C1
Resetting check sum transfer
counter
Y41
ABS transfer mode
ABS transfer
mode
Initial setting
M0
ABS data transfer
start
Y41
C1
2
ABS Checksum
transfer counter
mode
ABS transfer
mode control
(To be continued)
15 - 27
2
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
2
(Continued from preceding page)
C0
C1
Y41
DMOVP A0
D3
Saving ABS 32-bit data
MOVP K0
A0
Clearing register
FROMP H0001 K7872 D8
K1
*1 Reading X-axis rotating
direction parameter
WAND H0004
D8
Rotation direction parameter
mask
WAND H8000
A1
ABS data sign mask
PLS
M13
PLS processing command
NEG
D4
Reversing polarity of upper
16 bits
K1
D4
Subtraction for upper 16 bits
Counter Check sum ABS
counter
transfer
mode
M13
2
Rotation direction
judgment
D8 K4
PLS processing
command
K0
M4
NEG
D3
Reversing polarity of lower
16 bits
K1
D4
Lower 16 bits 0
D4 1 D4
K1X30
D5
Reading 4 bits
WAND H0003
D5
Masking 2 bits
WOR D5
A0
Adding 2 bits
K2
Right rotation of A0 2 bits
D1
C1
Counting check sum data
reception frequency
D3
Detecting absolute
position polarity
and A1SD71
rotating direction
Reversing polarity of
absolute position
C0
MOV
Read
ABS data
enabled counter
FOR
PLS
3
(To be continued)
15 - 28
Completion of reading, 2 bits
of check sum
M5
3
Reading checksum
6 bits
(2 bit 3 times)
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
3
(Continued from preceding page)
M4
3
C0
K1X30
D5
Reading 4 bits
WAND H0003
D5
Masking 2 bits
WOR D5
A0
Adding 2 bits
DROR
K2
Right rotation of A0 2 bits
D2
D2
Adding check sum
D0
C0
Counting frequency of ABS
data reception
MOV
Read
ABS data
enabled counter
D5
PLS
M6
Completion of reading: 2 bits
of ABS data
RORP
K10
Right rotation of A0 10 bits
A0
Masking check sum
M1
Sum check OK
Reading ABS data
32 bits
(2 bits 16 times)
C1
Check
sum
counter
WAND H003F
D2
A0
Detecting ABS data
check sum error
D2
M2
Sum check NG
D6
Sum check memory
Y4A
ABS check sum error
RST
Y42
Resetting ABS request
PLS
M7
ABS 2 bits request
A0
MOV
A0
C2
Retry counter
M6
ABS 2 bits read
completion
M5
Check sum 2 bits read completion
Y41
X32
ABS transfer Send data
mode
ready
M7
ABS request
control
SET
Y42
Setting ABS request
K1
T200
10ms delay timer
ABS 2 bits request
Y42
ABS
request
Y42
X32
Send data ready
X32
T200
Transmission data read
enabled
M4
10ms delay timer
4
(To be continued)
15 - 29
4
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
4
(Continued from preceding page)
4
M1
DFROP H0001 K7912 D9
K1
*1 A1SD71: reading home
position address
Check sum OK
(Note)
D
M1
K0
D*P
K
D3
D3
Inserting constant K for conversion Restoring absolute
into the unit of feed per pulse
position data
D P
D3
D9
D3
Adding home position address
to absolute position
SET
Y4B
Setting ABS coordinate error
D3
K1
*1 X-axis: Present position
change ABS data "ready"
D3
Y4B
DTOP H0001 K41
Check
sum OK
Y49
ABS coordinate error
SET
M3
ABS data "ready"
RST
Y41
Resetting ABS transfer mode
K50
T0
ABS transfer mode timer (5s)
Detecting ABS
coordinate error
Writing ABS data
to A1SD71
X36
ABS commu- Servo-on PB
nication error
Y41
ABS transfer mode
Y41
ABS transfer
mode
Y41
ABS transfer
mode
Y42
K10
T1
ABS request response timer
(1s)
K10
T3
Ready to send response
timer (1s)
Y49
ABS communication error
ABS request
X32
Send data ready
ABS communication
error detecting
T0
ABS transfer NG
T1
ABS request NG
T3
Send data ready NG
5
(To be continued)
5
Note: When the unit setting parameter value of the AD71 positioning module is changed from "3" (pulse) to "0" (mm),
the unit is 0.1 m for the input value. To change the unit to 1 m, and this program to multiple the feed value
by 10.
15 - 30
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
5
(Continued from preceding page)
5
M2
PLS
M10
ABS transfer retry start pulse
SET
M11
Setting retry flag
D7
C2
Retry counter
Check sum NG
M10
C2
Retry start Retry
pulse
counter
M11
ABS transfer
retry control
K1
T2
Retry wait timer (100ms)
M11
Resetting retry flag
D100
Saving received shift data
Retry flag set
T2
RST
Retry wait timer
M9039
DMOV A0
PC RUN
END
POINT
When absolute position data is received at power ON, for example, if a
negative coordinate position which cannot be handled by the A1SD71 is
detected, the ABS coordinate error (Y4B ON) is generated. If this error is
generated, move the axis into the positive coordinate zone in JOG operation.
Then, turn OFF the servo-on pushbutton switch and turn it ON again.
15 - 31
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(d) X-axis control program
This precludes execution of the X-axis start program while M3 (ready to send the ABS data) is
OFF.
Positioning X-axis start
mode
command M3
X-axis start program
Ready to
send the
ABS date
When M3 (ready to send the ABS data)
is turned ON, the X-axis start command
executes the X-axis start program.
(e) Dog type home position return
For an example of a program for the dog type home position return operation, refer to the home
position return program presented in the User's Manual for A1SD71.
(f) Data set type home position return
After jogging the machine to the position where the home position (e.g.500) is to be set, choose the
home position return mode set the home position with the home position return start (PB ON).
After switching power on, rotate the servo motor more than 1 revolution before starting home
position return.
Do not turn ON the clear signal (Y45) for an operation other than home position return. Turning it
ON in other circumstances will cause position shift.
M9039
Home position return mode
PC RUN
Home position
return mode Y41
X30
Y2D
PC ready
M20
Clear signal ON timer request
K1
T10
Clear signal 100ms ON timer
SET
M21
Setting data set type home position return request
RST
M21
Resetting data set type home position return request
Y45
Clear signal ON
D9
Setting X-axis home position address "500"
(Note 1)
in the data register
DTOP H0001 K7912 D9
K1
*1:Changing X-axis home position address
DFROP H0001 K7912 D9
K1
DTOP H0001 K41
K1
X37
PLS
M20
(Note 1)
ABS
Positioning Home position
transfer completion return start PB
mode
Clear signal ON
timer request
M21
Data set type home
position return request
T10
Clear signal 100ms ON timer
M21
Data set type home
position return request
DMOVP K500
D9
(Note 2)
*1:Changing X-axis present position data
Note 1: If data of the home position address parameter is not written by using an A6GPP programming tol, etc. before
starting a program for data set type home position return, the circuits indicated by Note 1 are necessary and the
circuit indicated by Note 2 is not necessary.
2: Contrary to Note 1 above, if the home position address is written in the home position address parameter.
the circuit indicated by Note 3 is necessary and the circuits indicated by Note 1 are not necerssary.
15 - 32
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(g) Electromagnetic brake output
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the servo
motor must be at a stop.
Set "1 1 "in parameter No. 1 of the servo amplifier to choose the electromagnetic brake interlock
signal.
Y41
X31
Y44
Electromagnetic brake output
ABS
Brake (MBR)
transfer
mode
(h) Positioning completion
To create the status information for servo positioning completion.
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the servo
motor must be at a stop.
Y41
X30
M
Completion of servo positioning
ABS transfer Positioning
mode
completion
Y41
ABS transfer
mode
(i) Zero speed
To create the status information for servo zero speed
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the servo
motor must be at a stop.
Y41
X31
M
Servo zero speed
ABS transfer Zero
mode
speed
Y41
ABS transfer
mode
(j) Torque limiting
To create the status information for the servo torque limiting mode
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the torque
limiting must be off.
Y41
X32
M
ABS transfer Torque limiting
mode
mode
15 - 33
Servo torque limiting mode
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(4) Sequence program - 2-axis control
The following program is a reference example for creation of an ABS sequence program for the second
axis (Y axis) using a single A1SD71 module. Create a program for the third axis in a similar manner.
(a) Y-axis program
Refer to the X-axis ABS sequence program and create the Y-axis program.
Assign the X inputs, Y outputs, D registers, M contacts, T timers and C counters of the Y axis so
that they do not overlap those of the X axis.
The buffer memory addresses of the A1SD71 differ between the X and Y axes. The instructions
marked *1 in the program of Section 15.8.1 (3), (c) should be changed as indicated below for use
with the Y axis:
[FROMP H0001 K7872 D8 K1]
[DFROP H0001 K7912 D9 K1]
[DTOP H0001 K41 D3 K1]
[FROMP H0001 K7892 D8 K1]
[DFROP H0001 K7922 D9 K1]
[DTOP H0001 K341 D3 K1]
[Program configuration]
X-axis ABS sequence program
(Program in Section 15.8.1 (3), (f))
Y-axis ABS sequence program
(Refer to the X-axis program and write the Y-axis
program)
(b) Data set type home position return
Arrange the data set type home position return programs given in Section 15.8.1 (3), (f) in series to
control two axes.
Refer to the X-axis data set type home position return program and create the Y-axis program.
Assign the X inputs, Y outputs, D registers, M contacts and T timers of the Y axis so that they do
not overlap those of the X axis.
The buffer memory addresses of the A1SD75 differ between the X and Y axes. The instructions
marked *1 in the program of Section 15.8.1 (3), (f) should be changed as indicated below for use
with the Y axis:
[DTOP H0001 K7912 D9 K1]
[DTOP H0001 K41 D9 K1]
[DTOP H0001 K7922 D9 K1]
[DTOP H0001 K341 D9 K1]
[Program configuration]
X-axis data set type home position return program
(Program in Section 15.8.1 (3), (f))
Y-axis data set type home position return program
(Refer to the X-axis program and write the Y-axis
program)
15 - 34
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.8.2 MELSEC FX(2N)-32MT (FX(2N)-1PG)
(1) Connection diagram
(a) FX-32MT (FX-1PG)
Servo amplifier
FX-32MT
L
24V
COM
RUN
3.3k
Power supply
CN1B
N
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
SG
PC-RUN
ABS bit 0/Completion of positioning
ABS bit 1/Zero speed
DO1 4
ZSP 19
TLC 6
ALM 18
Send data ready/Torque limit control
Alarm
Servo ready
Alarm reset
Emergency stop
Servo-on
10
RD
CN1A
19
JOG( )
JOG( )
Position start
Position stop
Home position return start
1PG error reset
COM1
EMG 15
SON 5
ABSM 8
ABSR 9
RES 14
Servo-on
ABS transfer mode
ABS request
Alarm reset
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
COM2
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
COM3
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
24
SG
FX-1PG
3.3k
SG
S/S
DOG
RA2
Servo alarm
ABS communication
error
ABS check sum error
Electromagnetic
brake output
(Note 3)
(Note 2)
COM 13
DOG
24V
STOP
3.3k
VH
VL
FPO
FP
COM0
3.3k
VDD 3
SD
(Note 1)
OPC
PP
SG
NP
Pulse train for forward rotation
Pulse train for reverse rotation
RP
RPO
COM1
CLR
PGO
PGO
CN1A
11
3
20
2
SG
CR
10
8
P15R 4
OP 14
SD Plate
Clear
Z-phase pulse
15V
SD
Note 1: To be connected for the dog type home position setting. At this time, do not connect the portions marked (Note 2).
2: To be connected for the data set type home position setting. At this time, do not connect the portions marked (Note 1).
3: The electromagnetic brake interlock signal should be controlled by connecting the programmable controller output to a relay.
15 - 35
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(b) FX2N-32MT (FX2N-1PG)
Servo amplifier
FX2N-32MT
L
24V
Power supply
N
SG
COM
3.3k
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
ABS bit 0/Completion of positioning
ABS bit 1/Zero speed
DO1 4
ZSP 19
TLC 6
ALM 18
Send data ready/Torque limit control
Alarm
Servo ready
Alarm reset
Emergency stop
Servo-on
CN1B
10
RD
CN1A
19
JOG( )
JOG( )
Position start
Position stop
Home position return start
1PG error reset
EMG 15
SON 5
ABSM 8
ABSR 9
RES 14
COM1
Servo-on
ABS transfer mode
ABS request
Alarm reset
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
COM2
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
COM3
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
24
RA2
Servo alarm
ABS communication
error
ABS check sum error
Electromagnetic
brake output
(Note 3)
(Note 2)
COM 13
FX2N-1PG
3.3k
S/S
DOG
SD
DOG
24V
STOP
VIN
VDD
(Note 1)
3.3k
FP
COM0
3.3k
OPC
PP
SG
NP
Pulse train for forward rotation
Pulse train for reverse rotation
RP
COM1
CLR
PGO
PGO
3
CN1A
11
3
20
12
SG
CR
10
8
P15R 4
OP 14
SD Plate
Clear
Z-phase pulse
15V
SD
Note 1: To be connected for the dog type home position setting. At this time, do not connect the portions marked (Note 2).
2: To be connected for the data set type home position setting. At this time, do not connect the portions marked
(Note 1).
3: The electromagnetic brake interlock signal should be controlled by connecting the programmable controller
output to a relay.
15 - 36
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(2) Sequence program example
(a) Conditions
1) Operation pattern
ABS data transfer is made as soon as the servo-on pushbutton is turned on. After that,
positioning operation is performed as shown below:
Home position
3)
300000
1)
300000
0
address
2)
After the completion of ABS data transmission, JOG operation is possible using the JOG or
JOG pushbutton switch.
After the completion of ABS data transmission, dog type home position return is possible using
the home position return pushbutton switch.
2) Buffer memory assignment
For BFM#26 and later, refer to the FX2(N)-1PG User's Manual.
BMF No.
Upper 16 Lower 16
bits
bits
#2
#5
#8
#10
#14
#18
#20
#22
#24
-
#0
#1
#3
#4
#6
#7
#9
#11
#12
#13
#15
#16
#17
#19
#21
#23
#25
Name and symbol
Pulse rate
A
Feed rate
B
Parameter
Max. speed
Vmax
Bias speed
Vbia
JOG operation
Vjog
Home position return speed (high speed)
VRT
Home position return speed (creep)
VCL
Home position return zero-point signal count N
Home position address
HP
Acceleration/deceleration time
Ta
Not usable
Target address (I)
P(I)
Operation speed (I)
V(I)
Target address (II)
P(II)
Operation speed (II)
V(II)
Operation command
Set value
2000
1000
H0000
100000PPS
0PPS
10000PPS
50000PPS
1000PPS
2 pulses
0
200ms
0
100000
0
10
H0000
Remark
Command unit: Pulses
Initial value: 10
Initial value: 100
Initial value: 10
3) Instructions
When the servo-on pushbutton switch and the GND of the power supply are shorted, the ABS
data is transmitted when the servo amplifier power is turned ON, or at the leading edge of the
RUN signal after a PC reset operation (PC-RESET). The ABS data is also transmitted when an
alarm is reset, or when the emergency stop state is reset.
If check sum discrepancy is detected in the transmitted data, the ABS data transmission is
retried up to three times. If the check sum discrepancy is still detected after retrying, the ABS
check sum error is generated (Y12 ON).
The following time periods are measured and if the ON/OFF state does not change within the
specified time, the ABS communication error is generated (Y11 ON).
ON period of ABS transfer mode (Y1)
ON period of ABS request (Y2)
OFF period of ready to send the ABS data (X2).
15 - 37
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(b) Device list
X input contact
Y output contact
X0
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
ABS bit 0 / completion of positioning
ABS bit 1 / zero speed
Send ABS data ready/ torque limit control
Servo alarm
Alarm reset PB
Servo emergency stop
Servo-on PB
Servo ready
JOG ( ) PB
JOG (−) PB
Position start PB
Position stop PB
Home position return start PB
1PG error reset
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
ABS data: Lower 16 bits
ABS data: Upper 16 bits
Check sum addition counter
Check data in case of check sum error
Transmission retry count in check sum
discrepancy
Home position address: Lower 16 bits
Home position address: Upper 16 bits
1PG present position address: Lower 16 bits
1PG present position address: Upper 16 bits
Y0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4 (Note 2)
Y5 (Note 1)
Y10
Y11
Y12
Servo-on
ABS transfer mode
ABS request
Alarm reset
Electromagnetic brake output
Clear
Servo alarm
ABS communication error
ABS check sum error
M0
M1
M2
M3
M4
Error flag
ABS data transmission start
Retry command
ABS data read
Spare
M5
M6
M10
M11
M12
M13
M20
Servo-on request
Retry flag
D register
D24
D25
D106
D107
M contact
ABS data 2 bit receiving buffer
ABS data 32 bit buffer
M51
M52
Check sum 6 bit buffer
M57
M58
M59
T timer
T200
T201
T202
T203
T204
T210 (Note 1)
Retry wait timer
ABS transfer mode timer
ABS request response timer
Ready to send response timer
ABS data waiting timer
Clear signal ON timer
For checksum comparison
M62
Sum check discrepancy (greater)
M63
M64
M70 (Note 1)
M71 (Note 1)
M99
Sum check discrepancy
Sum check discrepancy (less)
Clear signal ON timer request
Data set type home position return request
ABS data ready
C counter
C0
C1
C2
Note 1: Necessary when data set type home position return is executed.
2: Necessary in the event of electromagnetic brake output.
15 - 38
All data reception frequency counter (19 times)
Check sum reception frequency counter
ABS data reception frequency counter (16 times)
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(c) ABS data transfer program for X-axis
M8002
DMOV K0
D24
Setting home position address
to 0
K1
Setting 1PG pulse command
unit
Initial
pulse
1
TO
K0
K3
K0
DTO
K0
K4
K100000 K1
1PG max. speed: 100 kpps
DTO
K0
K7
K10000
K1
1PG Jog speed: 10 kpps
DTO
K0
K9
K50000
K1
1PG home position return
speed: 50 kpps
TO
K0
K11
K1000
K1
1PG creep speed: 1 kpps
TO
K0
K12
K2
K1
1PG home position return
zero-point count: twice
DTO
K0
K13
D24
K1
1PG home position address
setting
TO
K0
K15
K200
K1
1PG acceleration/deceleration
time: 200ms
DTO
K0
K19
K100000 K1
1PG operation speed:
100kpps
DMOV K300000 D100
Position move account 1:
300000 pulses
DMOV K 250000 D102
Position move account 2:
250000 pulses
DMOV K0
D104
Position move account 3:
0 pulses
DMOV K0
Z
Clearing index registers V, Z
DMOV K4
D4
Setting "4 times" for check
sum error transmission
frequency
(To be continued)
15 - 39
1
Initial setting
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(Continued from preceding page) 1
1
X6
M6
Servo-on
PB
M5
Retry
M5
Servo-on request
Y0
Servo-on output
PLS
M1
ABS data transmission start
RST
C1
Clearing retry counter
RST
M99
Resetting ready to send ABS
data
RST
M5
Resetting servo-on request
RST
Y1
Resetting ABS transfer mode
RST
Y2
Resetting ABS request
RST
M6
Resetting retry flag
ZRST M62
M64
Resetting check sum
judgement
ZRST C0
C2
Resetting communication
counter
SET
Y12
Servo-on ABS check
request
error
M0
Error
flag
Y11
ABS
communication
error
M1
X6
M6
ABS
Retry
transmission
start
Servo-on PB
Y12
2
(To be continued) 2
15 - 40
Servo-on and
retry control
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(Continued from preceding page) 2
2
X4
M0
Alarm
reset PB
Y3
Error flag
Y3
Alarm reset output
C1
Clearing retry counter
ZRST M0
M64
Clearing ABS data receiving
area
ZRST D0
D3
Clearing ABS receive data
buffer
RST
C2
Resetting ABS data reception
counter
RST
C0
Resetting all data reception
counter
M0
Error flag output
Y10
Servo alarm output
RST
Y1
Resetting ABS transfer mode
RST
Y2
Resetting ABS request
RST
M99
Resetting ready to send
RST
M5
Resetting servo-on request
RST
M6
Resetting retry flag
SET
Y1
ABS transfer mode ON
ZRST M10
M64
Clearing ABS data reception
area
ZRST D0
D2
Clearing ABS receiver data
buffer
RST
C2
Resetting ABS data reception
counter
RST
C0
Resetting all data reception
counter
RST
Alarm reset
X5
Emergency stop PB
Servo alarm
detection, alarm
reset control
X3
Servo alarm
M1
ABS data
transmission start
3
(To be continued)
15 - 41
3
ABS transfer
mode
Initial setting
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(Continued from preceding page)
3
Y1
ABS
transfer
mode
3
X2
PLS
M3
Resetting ABS data
SET
Y2
ABS request ON
ABS data 32 bits
(2 bits 16 times)
K1
T204
ABS data waiting timer 10ms
Check sum 6 bits
(2 bits 3 times)
Send data ready
M3
ABS data read
Y2
X2
ABS
Send data
request ready
T204
WANDP K1X0
H0003
K1M10
Masking ABS data 2 bits
K38
K2
Right shift (2 bits) of ABS data
D2
Check sum addition
ABS data waiting timer
SFTR M10
M20
C2
ADDP
K1M10 D2
K16
C2
Updating ABS data reception
counter
K19
C0
Updating all data reception
counter
RST
Y2
Resetting ABS request
RST
Y1
Resetting ABS transfer mode
WANDP H003F D2
D2
Masking check sum 6 bits
CMPP
M62
Comparison of check sum
C0
All data reception counter
K2M52 D2
C1
Y12
ABS data check sum error
M2
Retry command
K10
T200
Setting retry wait timer: 100ms
Retry counter
M62
C1
PLS
Retry
counter
M64
MOV
4
K2M52
D3
Storing check sum value in the
case of check sum error
SET
M6
Retry flag ON
RST
M5
Resetting servo-on request
(To be continued)
15 - 42
4
Detection of ABS
check sum error,
retry control
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
4
(Continued from preceding page)
4
M63
D0
ABS data
D24
D0
Adding 1PG home position
address
D0
K1
ABS data
SET
M99
Setting ABS data ready
ZRST M62
M64
Clearing check sum judging
area
RST
M6
Resetting retry flag
RST
Y1
Detecting ABS
communication error
RST
Y2
Resetting ABS request
K500
T201
ABS transfer mode 5s timer
DMOVP K8M20
Check
sum
match
DADDP D0
DTOP K0
Y11
K26
X6
ABS
Servo-on
communiPB
cation error
Y1
D0, D1
1PG
Writing absolute
position data to
1PG
ABS transfer mode
Y1
Y2
ABS transfer ABS request
mode
Y1
X2
K100
T202
ABS request response
1s timer
K100
T203
Ready to send response
1s timer
Y11
ABS communication error
D4
C1
Counting retry frequency
ABS transfer Send data ready
mode
T201
Detecting ABS
communication
error
ABS transmission NG
T202
ABS request NG
T203
Send data ready NG
M2
Retry command
T200
M6
Retry
wait
timer
Retry
ABS transfer
retry control
SET
5
M5
(To be continued) 5
15 - 43
Setting servo-on request
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(Continued from preceding page) 5
5
M8000
M109
Normally
OFF
M110
M111
1PG control
command
(not used)
M112
M102
M103
X7
X12
M99
Position
start PB
X10
ABS data
ready
M120
Start command pulse
M104
1PG JOG command
M105
1PG JOG command
M106
1PG home position return
start
D100Z
K1
Setting motion distance
SET
108
1PG start
DINC
Z
DINC
Z
PLS
Servo
ready
JOG
X11
Operation
command
control
JOG
(Note)
X7
X14
Servo ready Home position return PB
M120
DTO
K0
K17
Position
start
command
pulse
Index processing
DCMP Z
K6
M121
Position
command
control
M122
DMOV K0
Z
INDX 6
X12
M101
1PG stop command
M100
1PG error reset
Position
stop PB
M0
Error flag
X16
1PG error reset
6
(To be continued) 6
Note: Program example for the dog type home position return. For the data set type home position return, refer to the
program example in (2), (d) in this section.
15 - 44
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
6
(Continued from preceding page) 6
M8000
K0
K25
K4M100
K1
FX2 1PG
Transmission of control signals
FROM K0
K28
K3M200
K1
1PG FX2
Transmission of status
DFROMK0
K26
D106
K1
RST
M108
1PG FX2
Transmission of present
position D106, D107
1PG
Resetting start command
TO
Normally
ON
M200
END
(d) Data set type home position return
After jogging the machine to the position where the home position (e.g.500) is to be set, choose the
home position return mode set the home position with the home position return start (PBON).
After switching power on, rotate the servo motor more than 1 revolution before starting home
position return.
Do not turn ON the clear signal (Y5) for an operation other than home position return. Turning it
ON in other circumstances will cause position shift.
Y1
X0
X14
M70
Clear signal ON timer request
K10
T210
Clear signal 100ms ON timer
SET
M71
Setting data set type home position return request
RST
M71
Resetting data set type home position return request
Y5
Clear signal ON
DMOVP K500
D24
Setting X-axis home position address "500"
in the data register
DTOP K0
K13
D24
K1
Changing X-axis home position address
DTOP K0
K26
D24
K1
Changing X-axis present position data
PLS
ABS transfer Positioning Home position
mode
completion return start PB
M70
Clear signal ON
timer request
M71
Date set type home position return request
T210
Clear signal 100ms ON timer
M71
Data set type
home position
return request
15 - 45
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(e) Electromagnetic brake output
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the servo
motor must be at a stop.
Set "1 1 " in parameter No. 1 of the servo amplifier to choose the electromagnetic brake interlock
signal.
Y1
X1
Y4
Electromagnetic brake output
ABS transfer Brake (MBR)
mode
(f) Positioning completion
To create the status information for servo positioning completion.
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the servo
motor must be at a stop.
Y1
X0
M
Completion of servo positioning
ABS transfer Positioning
mode
completion
Y1
ABS transfer
mode
(g) Zero speed
To create the status information for servo zero speed.
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the servo
motor must be at a stop.
Y1
X1
M
Servo zero speed
ABS transfer Zero speed
mode
Y1
ABS transfer
mode
(h) Torque limiting
To create the status information for the servo torque limiting mode.
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the torque
limiting must be off.
Y1
X2
M
ABS transfer Torque limiting mode
mode
15 - 46
Servo torque limiting mode
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.8.3 MELSEC A1SD75(AD75)
(1) Connection diagram
Servo amplifier
A1S62P
24
24G
FG
600mA
LG
Power
supply
VDD
COM
SG
SG
CN1B
3
13
10
20
DO1
ZSP
TLC
ALM
4
19
6
18
EMG
15
LSP
LSN
16
17
SON
ABSM
ABSR
RES
5
8
9
14
COM
RD
INP
CN1A
9
19
18
INPUT
AC100/200
A1SCPU
A1SX40
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
COM
ABS data bit 0/Positioning completion
ABS data bit 1/zero speed
Readying to send data/Torque limiting
Trouble
Alarm reset
Emergency stop
Servo-on
Home position return
Upper limit
Operation mode I
8 Operation mode II
9 Position start
A
Position stop
B
JOG
C
JOG
D
E
F
Lower limit
(Note 3)
Operation
mode
II
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON Positioning
COM
NC
NC
A1SY40
Operating
status
I
OFF
OFF
JOG
Home
position
return
Servo-on
ABS transfer mode
ABS request
Alarm reset
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
RA2
Electromagnetic
brake output
(Note 4)
COM1
8
9
A
B
Servo alarm
ABS communication error
ABS checksum error
COM2
(Note 1)
Proximity signal
A1SD75-P
DOG
PLS
RLS
STOP
CHG
START
COMMON
COMMON
(Note 2)
11
12
13
14
15
16
35
36
RDY
INPS
7
8
COMMON 26
CLEAR 5
(Note 2)
COMMON 23
24
25
PULSE- 21
F
3
PULSE- 22
R
4
PLS COM 19
PLS COM 20
Servo ready
Positioning completion
PGO
(Note 6)
(Note 5)
(Note 6)
15 - 47
CR
SG
SG
LZ
LZR
PG
PP
NG
NP
LG
SD
8
10
20
5
15
13
3
12
2
1
Plate
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
Note 1: For the dog type home position return. Need not be connected for the data set type home position return.
2: If the servo motor provided with the zero point signal is started, the A1SD75(AD75) will output the deviation counter clear
signal. Therefore, do not connect the clear signal of the MR-J2-A to the A1SD75(AD75) but connect it to the output module of
the programmable controller.
3: This circuit is provided for your reference.
4: The electromagnetic brake output should be controlled via a relay connected to the programmable controller output.
5: Use the differential line driver system for pulse input. Do not use the open collector system.
6: To reinforce noise suppression, connect LG and pulse output COM.
15 - 48
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(2) Sequence program example
(a) Conditions
1) When the servo-on signal and power supply GND are shorted, the ABS data is transmitted at
power-on of the servo amplifier or on the leading edge of the RUN signal after a PC reset
operation (PC-RESET). The ABS data is also transmitted when an alarm is reset or when an
emergency stop is reset.
2) If a checksum mismatch is detected in the transmitted data, data transmission is retried up to
three times. If the checksum mismatch still persists after the retries, the ABS checksum error
occurs (Y3A ON).
3) The following time periods are measured. If the ON/OFF state does not change within the
specified time, the ABS communication error occurs change within the specified time, the ABS
communication error occurs (Y3A ON):
ON period of ABS transfer mode (Y31)
ON period of ABS request (Y32)
OFF period of reading to send ABS data (X22)
(b) Device list
X input contact
ABS bit 0 / positioning completion
ABS bit 1 / zero speed
Reading to send ABS data / limiting torque
Servo alarm
Alarm reset
Servo emergency stop
Servo-on
Home position return start
2)
Operation mode I
Operation mode II
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
X25
X26
X27
X28
X29
1)
D register
ABS data transmission counter
Checksum transmission counter
Checksum addition register
ABS data: Lower 16 bits
ABS data: Upper 16 bits
ABS data 2-bit receiving buffer
Check data in case of checksum error 4)
Number of retries
Forward rotation direction
Home position address: Lower 16 bits
Home position address: Upper 16 bits
Drive unit ready data
Home position return completion data
Received shift data: Lower 16 bits
Received shift data: Upper 16 bits
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D110
D111
3)
Y30
Y31
Y32
Y33
X34 (Note 2)
Y35 (Note 1)
Y38
Y39
Y3A
Y output contact
Servo-on
ABS transfer mode
ABS request
Alarm reset
Electromagnetic brake output
Clear
Servo alarm
ABS communication error
ABS checksum error
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M20 (Note 1)
M contact
ABS data transmission start
Sum check completion
Sum check mismatch
ABS data ready
Transmission data read enabled
Checksum 2 bits read completion
ABS 2 bits read completion
ABS 2 bits request
Servo-on request
Servo alarm
ABS data transmission retry start pulse
Retry flag set
Retry flag reset
PLS processing command
Clear signal ON timer request
M24
Data set type home position return request
Home position return processing
instruction
Current position change processing
instruction
Current position change flag
C0
C1
C2
C counter
ABS data receive times counter
Checksum receive times counter
Retry counter
M21 (Note 1)
M22
T0
T1
T2
T3
T10 (Note 1)
T timer
ABS transmission mode timer
ABS request response timer
Retry wait timer
ABS data send reading response timer
Clear signal ON timer
T200
Transmitted data read 10ms delay timer
M23
Note: 1.Required for data set type home position return.
2.Required for electromagnetic brake output.
15 - 49
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(c) ABS data transfer program for X axis
This sequence program example assumes the following conditions:
Parameters of the A1SD75-P1 (AD75-P1) positioning module
1) Unit setting
:3 pulse (PLS)
2) Travel per pulse :1 1 pulse
To select the unit other than the pulse, conversion into the unit of the feed value per pulse is
required. Hence, add the following program to the area marked (Note) in the sequence program:
<Additional program>
D*PK
D3 D3
Item
mm
inch
degree
pulse
Unit setting
0
1
2
3
Travel per pulse
0.1 to 1 to
Unit of travel
Constant K for
conversion into unit of
travel
10 to
100
0.00001 0.0001
to
m/PLS
1 to
10 to
100
to
to
0.001
to
0.01
to
0.00001 0.0001
to
inch/PLS
1000
1 to
10 to 100 to 1000
1 to
to
0.001 0.01
to
to
degree/PLS
PLS
100
to
1000 None
10 to
Reference
For 1 m/PLS, set constant K to 10
For 5 m/PLS, set constant K to 50
The additional program is not required for the unit setting is PLS.
5)
M101
MOV
K0
K3
Y30
Output signal reset
K1
A1SD75 error reset
Error reset
completion
TO
H0000 K1151 K1
MOV
Initial
6) setting
Setting the number of retries
(to 3 times)
K3
D7
SET
M101
Error reset completion flag
A0
Loading received shift data
M9039
DMOV D110
PC RUN
1
(To be continued) 1
15 - 50
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
1
(Continued from preceding page) 1
X26
SET
M13
Servo-on request
Servo-on
PB
FROM H0000 K816
7)
K1
Reading A1SD75 1-axis RDY
signal
D11
Masking RDY signal
M23
Current position change
processing instruction
PLS
M24
Current position change flag
RST
M8
Resetting ready
RST
M13
Resetting servo-on request
RST
C0
Resetting ABS transmission
counter at servo OFF
RST
C1
Resetting checksum
transmission counter at servo
OFF
Y30
Servo-on output
PLS
M5
ABS interface start
PLS
M17
Setting retry flag
D11
WAND H0001
M23
D11 K1
Processing instruction RDY signal ON judgment
X26
Servo-on
PB
M13
M14
M16
Servo-on
request
Error
flag
Retry flag
set
Servo-on
control
M13
Servo-on
request
M17
ABS transfer
retry control
C2
Resetting retry counter
Y33
Alarm reset output
M14
Error flag output
RST
M8
Resetting ready
RST
M13
Resetting servo-on request
Y38
Servo alarm
RST
Retry flag
reset request
X24
M14
Error reset Error flag
PB
Y33
Alarm reset
X25
Emergency stop PB
X23
Servo alarm
2
(To be continued) 2
15 - 51
Servo alarm
detection,
alarm reset
control
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(Continued from preceding page) 2
2
M5
MOV
K16
D0
Initializing ABS data
transmission counter
MOV
K3
D1
Initializing checksum
transmission counter
MOV
K0
D2
Initializing checksum register
MOV
K0
D5
Initializing ABS data register
ABS data
transfer
start
ABS transfer mode
initial setting
DMOV K0
D9
Initializing ABS data register
DMOV K0
A0
Initializing ABS data register
RST
C0
Resetting ABS transmission
counter
RST
C1
Resetting checksum
transmission counter
Y31
ABS transfer mode
M5
ABS data
transfer start
Y31
ABS transfer mode
control
C1
ABS transfer Checksum counter
mode
C0
C1
Y31
Counter
DMOVPA0
D3
Saving ABS 32-bit data
MOVP K0
A0
Clearing register
K1
*1 Reading x-axis rotation
direction parameter
WAND H0001
D8
Masking rotation direction
parameter
WAND H8000
A1
Masking ABS data sign
PLS
M18
PLS processing command
NEG
D4
Reversing polarity of upper
16 bits
K1
D4
Decrementing upper 16 bits
by 1
Sum
ABS transfer
counter mode
FROMPH0000 K5
M18
Rotation direction
judgment
D8
D8
Absolute position
polarity,A1SD75
rotation direction
setting detection
9)
10)
K1
PLS
processing
command
K0
3
8)
D3
NEG
D3
Reversing polarity of lower
16 bits
K1
D4
Lower 16 bits 0
D4 1 D4
(To be continued) 3
15 - 52
Reversing absolute
position polarity
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
3
11)
(Continued from preceding page) 3
M9
C0
K1X20
D5
Reading 4 bits
WAND H0003
D5
Masking 2 bits
WOR
D5
A0
Adding 2 bits
ROR
K2
Right rotation of A0 2 bits
D1
C1
Counting the number of
checksum data
MOV
Read
ABS data
enabled counter
M9
Reading checksum
6bits
(2 bits 3 times)
PLS
M10
Completion of reading
checksum 2 bits
K1X20
D5
Reading 4 bits
WAND H0003
D5
Masking 2 bits
WOR
D5
A0
Adding 2 bits
DROR
K2
Right rotation of A0 2 bits
D2
D2
Adding checksum
D0
C0
Counting the number of ABS
data
C0
MOV
Read
ABS data
enabled counter
D5
PLS
M11
Completion of reading ABS
2 bits data
RORP
K10
Right rotation of A0 10 bits
A0
Masking sum check
M6
Sum check OK
11)
Reading ABS data
32 bits
(2 bits 16 times)
C1
Checksum
counter
WAND H003F
D2
A0
Detecting ABS
checksum error
D2
A0
MOV
A0
M7
Sum check NG
D6
Sum check memory
Y3A
ABS checksum error
C2
Retry counter
4
(To be continued) 4
15 - 53
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(Continued from preceding page) 4
4
M11
RST
Y32
ABS request reset
PLS
M12
ABS 2 bits request
ABS 2 bits
completion
M10
Checksum 2 bits completion
Y31
X22
ABS transfer Ready to send
mode
ABS data
M12
ABS request
control
SET
Y32
ABS request set
K1
T200
10ms delay timer
ABS 2 bits request
Y32
X22
ABS request
Y32
Ready to send ABS data
X22
T200
M9
10ms delay timer
M6
DFROP H0000 K0072 D9
K1
*1: Reading A1SD75 home
position address
Checksum
OK
(Note)
Transmitted data read enabled
12)
D*P
K
D3
D3
Inserting constant K for conversion
into the unit of feed per pulse
D P
D3
D9
D3
Adding home position address
to absolute position
7)
M6
Y3B
13)
M24
SET
M8
Checksum ABS
Change
OK
coordinate flag
error
Y10
X1
Positioning Start comstart
pletion
Restoring absolute
position data.
ABS data ready
14)
DTOP H0000 K1154 D3
K1
*1: Changing X-axis current
position
TO
K1
*1: Writing No. 9003 data for
changing current value
SET
Y10
Positioning start
RST
Y10
Switching start signal off on
completion of positioning
H0000 K1150 K9003
X4
BUSY
Writing absolute
position data to
A1SD75
XA
Error detection
5
(To be continued) 5
15)
Note: When the unit setting parameter value of the AD75 positioning module is changed from "3" (pulse) to "0" (mm), the
unit is 0.1 m for the input value. To set the unit to 1 m, add this program to multiple the feed value by 10.
15 - 54
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(Continued from preceding page) 5
5
Y39
X26
RST
ABS communi- Servo-on PB
cation error
Y31
Y31
Resetting ABS transfer mode
K50
T0
ABS transfer mode 5s timer
ABS transfer mode
Y31
Y32
K10
T1
ABS request response
1s timer
K10
T3
ABS data send ready
response 1s timer
Y39
ABS communication error
PLS
M15
ABS transfer retry start pulse
SET
M16
Setting retry flag
D7
C2
Retry counter
ABS transfer ABS request
mode
Y31
X22
ABS transfer Ready to send
mode
ABS data
T0
Detecting ABS
communication
error
ABS transfer NG
T1
ABS request NG
T3
Readying to send ABS data NG
M7
Sum check NG
M15
C2
Retry start
Retry
counter
M16
ABS transfer
retry control
K1
T2
Retry waiting timer (100ms)
M16
Resetting retry flag
D110
Saving received shift data
Retry flag set
T2
RST
Retry waiting timer
M9039
DMOV A0
PC RUN
END
15 - 55
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(d) X-axis program
Do not execute the X-axis program while the ABS ready (M8) is off.
Positioning X-axis start
mode
command
(Note)
M8
X-axis start program
Ready to
send ABS
data
When "M8" (ready to send ABS data) switches on,
the X-axis start program is executed by the X-axis
start command.
(e) Dog type home position return
Refer to the home position return program in the A1SD75 User’s Manual.
Note that this program requires a program which outputs the clear signal (Y35) after completion of
home position return.
Add the following program:
16)
Home position return
start command
FROM H0000 K817
D12
WAND K0016
K1
Reading 1-axis home position return
completion signal
D12
Masking home position return completion
M22
Home position return processing instruction
Y35
Switching clear signal on
M22
Processing
instruction
D12 K16
Home position return
completion judgment
15 - 56
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(f) Data set type home position return
After jogging the machine to the position where the home position (e.g. 500) is to be set, choose the
home position return mode and set the home position with the home position return start (PBON).
After switching power on, rotate the servo motor more than 1 revolution before starting home
position return.
Do not turn ON the clear signal (Y35) for an operation other than home position return. Turning it
on in other circumstances will cause position shift.
M9039
PC RUN
Home position
return mode Y31
X20
Y1D
Programmable controller ready
M20
Clear signal ON timer request
K1
T10
Clear signal 100ms ON timer
SET
M21
Setting data set type home position return request
RST
M21
Resetting data set type home position return
request
Y35
Switch clear signal on
D9
Setting X-axis home position address 500
in data register
X27
PLS
ABS transfer Positioning
mode
completion
Home position
return start PB
M20
Clear signal ON
timer request
M21
Data set type home position return request
T10
Clear signal 100ms ON timer
M21
Data set type home position
return request
DMOVP K500
17)
(Note 1)
DTOP
(Note 2)
Y10
X1
Positioning
start
Start
completion
*1: Changing X-axis home position address
H0000 K72
D9
K1
DFROP H0000 K72
D9
K1
DTOP
H0000 K1154 D9
K1
*1: Changing X-axis current value
TO
H0000 K1150 K9003
K1
*1: Writing positioning data No. 9003
SET
Y10
Starting positioning
RST
Y10
Switching BUSY signal off to switch start
signal off.
X4
BUSY
18)
XA
Error detection
19)
Note 1: If the data of the home position address parameter is not written from the A7PHP programming tool or the like
before starting the data set type home position return program, this sequence circuit (Note 1) is required and
the sequence circuit (Note 2) is not required.
2: Contrary to above 2, if the home position address is written in the home position address parameter,
the sequence circuit (Note1) is not required but this sequence circuit (Note 1) is required.
15 - 57
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(g) Electromagnetic brake output
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the servo
motor must be at a stop.
Set "1 1 " in parameter No. 1 of the servo amplifier to choose the electromagnetic brake interlock
signal.
Y31
X21
Y34
Electromagnetic brake output
ABS transfer Brake (MBR)
mode
(h) Positioning completion
To create the status information for servo positioning completion.
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the servo
motor must be at a stop.
Y31
X20
M
Servo positioning completion
ABS transfer Positioning
mode
completion
Y31
ABS transfer
mode
(i) Zero speed
To create the status information for servo zero speed.
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the servo
motor must be at a stop.
Y31
X21
M
Servo zero speed
ABS transfer Zero
mode
speed
Y31
ABS transfer
mode
(j) Torque limiting
To create the status information for the servo torque limiting mode.
During ABS data transfer (for several seconds after the servo-on signal is turned on), the torque
limiting must be off.
Y31
X22
M
ABS transfer Torque limiting
mode
mode
15 - 58
Servo torque limiting mode
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(3) Sequence program - 2-axis control
The following program is a reference example for creation of an ABS sequence program for the second
axis (Y axis) using a single A1SD75 module. Create a program for the third axis in a similar manner.
(a) Y-axis program
Refer to the X-axis ABS sequence program and create the Y-axis program.
Assign the X inputs, Y outputs, D registers, M contacts, T timers and C counters of the Y axis so
that they do not overlap those of the X axis.
The buffer memory addresses of the A1SD75 differ between the X and Y axes. The instructions
marked *1 in the program of Section 15.8.3 (2), (c) should be changed as indicated below for use
with the Y axis:
[FROMP H0000 K5
K1]
[FROMP H0000 K155 D8
K1]
[DFROP H0000 K0072 D9 K1]
[DFROP H0000 K222 D9
K1]
[DTOP H0000 K1154 D3
[DTOP
H0000 K1204 D3
K1]
[TO
H0000 K1200 K9003 K1]
[TO
D8
K1]
H0000 K1150 K9003 K1]
[Program configuration]
20)
X-axis ABS sequence program
(Program in Section 15.8.3 (2) (c))
Y-axis ABS sequence program
(Refer to the X-axis program and write the Y-axis
program)
(b) Data set type home position return
Arrange the data set type home position return programs given in Section 15.8.3 (2), (f) in series to
control two axes.
Refer to the X-axis data set type home position return program and create the Y-axis program.
Assign the X inputs, Y outputs, D registers, M contacts and T timers of the Y axis so that they do
not overlap those of the X axis.
The buffer memory addresses of the A1SD75 differ between the X and Y axes. The instructions
marked *1 in the program of Section 15.8.3 (2), (f) should be changed as indicated below for use
with the Y axis:
[DTOP H0000 K72
D9
[DTOP H0000 K1154 D9
[TO
K1]
K1]
H0000 K1150 K9003 K1]
[DTOP H0000 K222
D9
K1]
[DTOP H0000 K1204 D3
K1]
[TO H0000 K1200 K9003 K1]
[Program configuration]
20)
X-axis data set type home position return program
(Program in Section 15.8.3 (2) (f))
Y-axis data set type home position return program
(Refer to the X-axis program and write the Y-axis
program)
15 - 59
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(4) Differences between A1SD75 (AD75) and A1SD71 (AD71)
The sequence programs shown in (2) of this section differ from those for the A1SD71 (AD71) in the
following portions. 1) to 20) in the following sentences indicate the numbers in the programs given in
(2) of this section.
(a) Devices used
Since the A1SD75 (AD75) is a one-slot module which occupies 32 I/O points, the I/O devices are
different, as indicated by 1) and 2), from those of the two-slot A1SD71 which occupies 48 point. The
A1SD75 (AD75) uses the devices indicated in the following table, and its D registers and M
contacts are different as indicated by 3) and 4).
Device name
Devices
Axis 3
Output
internal relay
:Data at ON
:Stored data
X4
X5
X6
BUSY
BUSY(running)
XA
XB
XC
Error detection
Error detection
Y10
Y11
Y12
Positioning start
Start being requested
AD75 ready
Not ready/ WDT error
Y13
Y14
Y1C
Axis stop
Stop being requested
Y16
Y18
Y1A
Forward rotation jog start
Forward rotation being started
Y17
Y19
Y1B
Reverse rotation jog start
Reverse rotation being started
Y1D
Programmable controller ready
Programmable controller CPU
normal
M0
Parameter setting completion flag
Setting complete
M1
Flash ROM registration processing
flag
Processing
M2
Axis error reset requesting flag
Requesting
M100
M3
M4
AD75 normal flag
AD75 normal
M101
Initial error reset completion flag
Error reset complete
M102
All BUSY signal OFF flag
All BUSY signal OFF
M103
AD75 operable flag
Operable
D100
Data register
Bit device
Data register
Axis 2
X0
Input
Application
Axis 1
D101
D102
D103
Flash ROM registration results
Registration results
Axis error code
Error code
D104
D105
D106
Axis warning code
Warning code
D107
D108
D109
Axis error reset results
Axis error reset results
(b) ABS sequence program example
1) Initial setting
To reset the error of the A1SD75, the program 5) is added to reset all output signals at start-up.
The axis error reset buffer memory address is changed from 201 to 1154 (axis 1) and the slot
number from H0001 (slot number 1) to H0000 (slot number 2) 6).
2) Absolute position polarity, A1SD75 rotation direction setting detection
The slot number and buffer memory of the X-axis rotation direction parameter reading area are
changed from [FROMP H0001 K7872 D8 K1] to [FROMP H0000 K5 D8 K1] 8).
The rotation direction parameter masking area is changed from [WAND H0004 D8] to [WAND
H0001 D8] 9).
3) Reversing absolute position polarity
The rotation direction judging area is changed from [= D8 K4] to [= D8 K1] 10).
4) Reading checksum 6 bits, reading ABS data 32 bits
The 4 bits reading area is changed from [MOV K1 X30D5] to [MOV K1X20 D5] 11).
5) Restoring absolute position data
The slot number and buffer address of the A1SD75 home position address reading area are
changed from [DFROP H0001 K7912 D9 K1] to [DFROP H0000 K72 D9 K1] 12)
15 - 60
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
6) Writing absolute position data to A1SD75
The slot number and buffer address of the X-axis current value changing area are changed from
[DTOP H0001 K41 D3 K1] to [DTOP H0000 K1154 D3 K1] 14). When the current value is changed
in the A1SD75, the current feed value is changed at the start of positioning data No.9003.
Therefore, the starting program for positioning data No.9003 15) is added.
7) X-axis data set type home position return program
The slot numbers and buffer addresses of the X-axis home position address changing area are
changed from [DTOP H0001 K7912 D9 K1] to [DTOP H0000 K72 D9 K1] and from [DFROP
H0001 K7912 D9 K1] to [DFROP H0000 K72 D9 K1] 17).
The slot number and buffer address of the X-axis current value changing area are changed from
[DTOP H0001 K41 D3 K1] to [DTOP H0000 K1154 D3 K1] 18). When the current value is changed
in the A1SD75, the current feed value is changed at the start of positioning data No.9003.
Therefore, the starting program for positioning data No.9003 19) is added.
8) Y-axis sequence program, Y-axis data set type home position return program.
The slot numbers and buffer addresses are changed as indicated by 20).
9) Writing absolute position data to AD75
The A1SD75 (AD75) allows the current position to be changed only when the ready signal of the
Servo amplifier is on. Therefore, if the CPU scan is fast, the program for A1SD71 may change
the current position before the ready signal switches on. 7) is added because the current position
must be changed after it has been confirmed that the drive unit ready signal of the A1SD75
(D75) has switched on/off.
10) ABS coordinate error detection
As the A1SD75 (AD75) can handle the negative-polarity coordinate position that the A1SD71
could not handle, the program for ABS coordinate error detection is deleted. 13)
11) Dog type home position return program
Due to the changes in wiring described in (4), (a), 4) of this section, the program for
outputting the clear signal (Y35) after completion of a home position return is required. 16)
15 - 61
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.9 Confirmation of absolute position detection data
You can confirm the absolute position data with servo configuration software (MRZJW3-SETUP121E).
Choose "Diagnostics" and "Absolute Encoder Data" to open the absolute position data display screen.
(1) Choosing "Diagnostics" in the menu opens the sub-menu as shown below:
(2) By choosing "Absolute Encoder Data" in the sub-menu, the absolute encoder data display window
appears.
(3) Press the "Close" button to close the absolute encoder data display window.
15 - 62
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
15.10 Absolute position data transfer errors
15.10.1 Corrective actions
(1) Error list
The number within parentheses in the table indicates the output coil or input contact number of the
A1SD71 (AD71).
Name
(Note)
ABS
communication
error
ABS data
check sum
error
ABS
coordinate
error
Servo alarm
Output coil
AD71 1PG
Y49
Y4A
Cause
Y11 1. The ABS data transfer mode
signal (Y41) is not completed
within 5s.
2. The ready to send signal
(X32) is not turned OFF
within 1s after the ABS data
request signal (Y42) is turned
ON.
3. The ready to send signal
(X32) remains OFF for longer
than 1s.
Y12
ABS data sumcheck resulted
in mismatch four times
consecutively.
The motor position is in the
negative coordinate value
range when the servo is
turned ON or when power
supply is turned ON.
Y4B
Y48
Description
Y10
Alarm occurred in the servo
amplifier.
1. Wiring for ABS transfer mode
signal, ABS data request
signal, or ready to send signal
is disconnected or connected to
the SG terminal.
2. PC ladder program wrong.
3. Faulty PLC output or input
module.
4. Faulty printed board in the
servo amplifier.
5. Power supply to the servo
amplifier is OFF.
1. Wiring for the ABS data
signal (ABS bit 0 (PF), bit 1
(ZSP)) is disconnected or
connected to the SG terminal.
2. PC ladder program wrong.
3. Faulty PLC input module.
4. Faulty printed board in the
servo amplifier.
1. The servo is turned ON or the
power supply is turned ON
near the machine home
position or in the zone in
which addresses decrease.
2. The machine falls on a
vertical axis when the servo
signal is turned ON/OFF.
1. Emergency stop (EMG) of the
servo amplifier was turned
off.
2. Trouble (ALM) of the servo
amplifier was turned on.
Note: Refer to (2) in this section for details of error occurrence definitions.
15 - 63
Action
Correct the wiring.
Correct the ladder.
Change the input or output
module.
Change the amplifier
Turn on the power to the servo
amplifier.
Correct the wiring.
Correct the ladder.
Change the input module.
Change the amplifier.
1. Reconsider the position
where the servo is turned
ON.
2. Set the home position for
positioning apart from the
machine home position.
Change the electromagnetic
brake operation sequence.
After ensuring safety, turn
EMG on.
Refer to Section 10.2.2 and take
action.
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(2) ABS communication error
(a) The OFF period of the send data ready signal output from the servo amplifier is checked.
If the OFF period is 1s or longer, this is regarded as a transfer fault and the ABS communication
error is generated.
The ABS communication error occurs if the ABS time-out warning (AL.E5) is generated at the
servo amplifier due to an ABS request ON time time-out.
ON
ABS transfer mode
OFF
1s
ON
ABS request
OFF
ON
Send data ready
OFF
The signal does not come ON
ABS communication
error
YES
NO
(b) The time required for the ABS transfer mode signal to go OFF after it has been turned ON (ABS
transfer time) is checked.
If the ABS transfer time is longer than 5s, this is communication error occurs if the ABS time-out
warning (AL.E5) is generated at the servo amplifier due to an ABS transfer mode completion time
time-out.
5s
ON
ABS transfer mode
The signal does not go OFF
OFF
1
2
3
4
18
19
ON
ABS request
OFF
ON
Send data ready
1
2
OFF
ABS communication
error
YES
NO
15 - 64
3
4
18
19
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
(c) To detect the ABS time-out warning (AL.E5) at the servo amplifier, the time required for the ABS
request signal to go OFF after it has been turned ON (ABS request time) is checked. If the ABS
request remains ON for longer than 1s, it is regarded that an fault relating to the ABS request
signal or the send data ready signal has occurred, and the ABS communication error is generated.
The ABS communication error occurs if the ABS time-out warning (AL.E5) is generated at the
servo amplifier due to an ABS request OFF time time-out.
ON
ABS transfer mode
OFF
1s
ON
ABS request
OFF
The signal does
not go OFF
ON
Send data ready
OFF
YES
ABS communication
error
NO
15.10.2 Error resetting conditions
Always remove the cause of the error before resetting the error.
Name
Output coil
Servo status
Resetting condition
AD71
1PG
ABS communication error
Y49
Y11
Ready (RD) signal off
Reset when servo-on PB (X36)
signal turns off.
ABS checksum error
Y4A
Y12
Ready (RD) signal on
For AD71
Reset when servo-on PB (X36)
signal turns from off to on.
For FX-1PG
Reset when servo-on PB (X36)
signal turns off.
ABS coordinate error
Y4B
Servo alarm
Y48
Y10
Ready (RD) signal on
Reset when servo-on PB (X36)
signal turns from off to on after a
motion to ( ) coordinate is made by
jog operation.
Ready (RD) signal on
Reset when alarm reset PB turns
on or power switches from off to on.
15 - 65
15. ABSOLUTE POSITION DETECTION SYSTEM
MEMO
15 - 66
Appendix
App 1. Signal arrangement recording sheets
(1) Position control mode
CN1A
11
1
2
NP
4
P15R
6
LA
8
LG
3
PP
5
LZ
7
LB
12
NG
14
OP
16
LAR
18
COM
SG
OPC
1
2
13
PG
15
LZR
4
DO1
VDD
11
12
TLA
14
16
7
LSP
18
8
P15R
13
COM
15
5
6
17
LBR
LG
3
19
9
10
CN1B
EMG
17
LSN
19
9
20
10
20
SG
SG
SG
(2) Speed control mode
CN1A
1
2
LG
11
12
3
6
LA
8
5
13
LZ
7
LB
OP
16
LAR
18
COM
SG
VC
4
15
LZR
DO1
17
LBR
LG
11
12
3
VDD
7
COM
15
16
LSP
18
8
P15R
13
14
5
6
19
9
10
1
2
14
4
P15R
CN1B
EMG
17
LSN
19
9
20
10
20
SG
SG
SG
(3) Torque control mode
CN1A
1
2
LG
11
12
3
4
P15R
6
LA
8
5
13
LZ
7
LB
OP
16
LAR
18
SG
COM
1
2
14
VLA
4
15
LZR
DO1
17
LBR
LG
3
VDD
11
12
TC
14
5
6
P15R
13
COM
15
16
7
8
19
9
10
CN1B
EMG
17
18
9
19
20
10
20
SG
SG
SG
App - 1
Command
pulse
PP, NP
Command
pulse frequency
App - 2
Cumulative
feedback pulse
CMX
CDV
Electronic gear
Cumulative
command pulses
Position
control
Load inertia
moment ratio
Auto
tuning section
Droop pulse
Differential
M
Within
one-revolution
ABS counter
ABS counter
PWM
Peak hold
Effective
value calculation
Absolute
position
detection
encoder
Servo
motor
Bus voltage
Peak
load ratio
Effective
load ratio
Current
control
low
Within onerevolution position high
Speed
control
Present
position
calculation
Speed
feedback
Servo
motor speed
Instantaneous
torque
Appendix
App 2. Status display block diagram
REVISIONS
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print data
*Manual number
Revision
Nov.,1999
SH(NA)030006-A
First edition
Sep.,2000
SH(NA)030006-B
Addition of single-phase 100VAC specifications
Compatible Servo Configuration software model name change
Compliance with EC Directives 1: Review of sentence
Section 1.2: Review of function block diagram
Section 1.3: Moving of servo amplifier standard specifications
Review of torque limit description in position control mode
Review of torque limit description in speed control mode
Deletion of torque linearity in torque limit mode
Addition of speed limit in torque control mode
Section 3.1.1 (1): Addition of encoder Z-phase pulse connection
Addition of Note for use of junction terminal block
Section 3.1.1 (2): Addition of Note for increased noise immunity
Section 3.1.2: Addition of Note for input of negative voltage
Section 3.1.3: Addition of Note for input of negative voltage
Section 3.3.1 (2): Review of Note
Section 3.4.1 (4): Addition of description about electronic gear switching
Section 3.4.3 (1)(a): Review of description for low voltage
Section 3.5: Change in timing chart
Section 3.5 3): Review of description
Section 3.6.2 (7): Review of connection
Section 3.9: Review of POINT
Section 3.9 (3)(b),(c): Change in timing chart
Section 3.9 (3)(d),(e): Addition
Section 5.1.2 (2): Deletion of description as to parameter No. 22 TC, TLA
Addition of parameter No. 27 setting example
Correction of parameter No. 35 setting range
Review of parameter No. 47, 48 sentences
Section 5.2.5: Correction of operation pattern diagram
Section 6.2.2: Review of within one-revolution position sentence
Section 6.3: Review of automatic VC offset description
Section 6.6 (2)(a): Review of Note
Section 6.8: Review of PL sentence
Chapter 7: Addition of POINT
Section 7.3.2 (1), (2): Review of sentence makeup
Section 7.4: Addition
Section 8.1.1: Addition
Section 8.3.2: Addition
Section 10.1.1 (1): Addition of Investigation item at power-on
Section 10.1.2: Addition of Investigation item at power-on
Addition of Investigation item at on of ST1 or ST2
Section 10.1.3: Addition of Investigation item at power-on
Addition of Investigation item at on of ST1 or ST2
Section 10.2: Addition of POINT
Section 10.2.2: Review of Cause of AL.10
Deletion of Cause 4 of AL.16
Review of Cause and Action of AL.24
Addition of description to AL.25
Print data
*Manual number
Sep.,2000
SH(NA)030006-B
Feb.,2001
SH(NA)030006-C
Revision
Section 10.2.2: Addition of description to AL.30
Addition of Cause to AL.33
Chapter 11: Changed to only outline dimensional drawing
Section 11.2 (2): Addition
Section 12.2 (1): Review of Note for Table 12.1
Section 12.3: Correction of dynamic brake time constant graph
Chapter 13: Deletion of MR-CPC98CBL3M communication cable
Section 13.1.1 (4)(c): Review of outline drawing
Section 13.1.2 (1): Deletion of MR-PWCNF power supply connector set
Section 13.1.2 (1)1), 6): Change of encoder side connector models
Section 13.1.2 (1)19), 20): Change of terminal models
Section 13.1.2 (2)(a)2): Addition of description for fabrication
Section 13.1.3: Addition of POINT
Section 13.1.3 (4): Addition of cable length
Change in connection diagram
Section 13.2.1 (1): Addition of Note for recommended wires
Section 13.2.8 (1): Addition of leakage current to recommended filter
Section 14.1.2 (2): Deletion of MR-CPC98CBL3M communication cable
Section 14.11.1 (6): Addition
Section 14.11.2 (8): Addition
Section 15.7: Addition of POINT
Section 15.8.1 (1)(b): Change in b) Coordinates when zero address is changed
to other than 0
Section 15.8.2 (1)(b): Review of connection diagram
Section 15.9: Change of display screen
Section 15.10.1 (1): Deletion of Cause 5 of ABS checksum error
Addition of MR-J2S-500A, 700A servo amplifiers
Addition of HC-KFS73, HC-SFS502, HC-SFS702, HC-RFS353, HC-RFS503,
HC-UFS502, HC-UFS353 servo motors
Section 1.2: Function block diagram modification
Section 1.7: Overall reexamination
Section 3.7.1(2): Addition of single-phase 100 to 120VAC
Section 3.7.2: Addition of regenerative brake converter and brake unit
Section 5.1.2(2): No. 0, Item addition to regenerative brake option selection
No. 5, Example addition
No. 27, Setting range change
No. 49, AL.26 addition
Section 5.2.2: Overall reexamination
Section 7.4(1): Reexamination
Chapter 8: Hierarchy reexamination
Section 10.2.2: AL.30, Reexamination
AL.8E, Reexamination of Cause and Action
Section 11.1(4)(5): Addition
Section 11.2(3): Addition
Section 12.1(3): Addition
Chapter 13: Hierarchy reexamination
Section 13.1.4(1): Connection diagram change
Cable addition
Section 13.1.4(3): Reexamination
Section 13.2.1(1): Connection diagram change
Wire table addition
Chapter 15: Addition of Note on AL.25
HEADQUARTERS
EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES
EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES
MIDDLEEASTREPRESENTATIVE
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
EUROPE
EUROPE B.V.
German Branch
Gothaer Straße 8
D-40880 Ratingen
Phone: +49 (0) 21 02 / 486-0
Fax: +49 (0) 21 02 / 4 86-1120
E mail: megfa-mail@meg.mee.com
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
FRANCE
FRANCE
25, Boulevard des Bouvets
F-92741 Nanterre Cedex
Phone: +33 1 55 68 55 68
Fax: +33 1 55 68 56 85
E mail: factory.automation@fra.mee.com
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
ITALY
EUROPE B.V.
Italian Branch
C.D. Colleoni - P. Perseo Ing. 2
Via Paracelso 12
I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MI)
Phone: +39 (0) 39 / 60 53 1
Fax: +39 (0) 39 / 60 53 312
E mail: factory.automation@it.mee.com
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
SPAIN
EUROPE B.V.
Carretera de Rubí 76-80
E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés
Phone: +34 (9) 3 / 565 31 31
Fax: +34 (9) 3 / 589 29 48
E mail: —
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
UK
EUROPE B.V.
UK Branch
Travellers Lane
GB-Hatfield Herts. AL10 8 XB
Phone: +44 (0) 1707 / 27 61 00
Fax: +44 (0) 1707 / 27 86 95
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
JAPAN
CORPORATION
Mitsubishi Denki Bldg.
2-2-3 Marunouchi Chiyoda-Ku
Tokyo 100-8310
Phone: +81 (0) 3 / 32 18 31 76
Fax: +81 (0) 3 / 32 18 24 22
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
USA
AUTOMATION
500 Corporate Woods Parkway
Vernon Hills, Illinois 60061
Phone: +1 (0) 847 / 478 21 00
Fax: +1 (0) 847 / 478 22 83
GEVA
AUSTRIA
Wiener Straße 89
A-2500 Baden
Phone: +43 (0) 2252 / 85 55 20
Fax: +43 (0) 2252 / 488 60
E mail: office@geva.at
Getronics
BELGIUM
Industrial Automation B.V.
Pontbeeklaan 43
B-1731 Asse-Zellik
Phone: +32 (0) 2 / 467 17 51
Fax: +32 (0) 2 / 467 17 45
E mail: infoautomation@getronics.com
TELECON CO.
BULGARIA
4, A. Ljapchev Blvd.
BG-1756 Sofia
Phone: +359 2 / 97 44 05 8
Fax: +359 2 / 97 44 06 1
E mail: —
AutoCont
CZECHIA
Control Systems s.r.o.
Nemocnicni 12
CZ-702 00 Ostrava 2
Phone: +420 (0) 69 / 615 21 11
Fax: +420 (0) 69 / 615 21 12
E mail: —
louis poulsen
DANMARK
industri & automation
Geminivej 32
DK-2670 Greve
Phone: +45 (0) 43 / 95 95 95
Fax: +45 (0) 43 / 95 95 91
E mail: lpia@lpmail.com
URHO TUOMINEN OY
FINLAND
Hevoshaankatu 3
FIN-28600 Pori
Telefon: +358 (0) 2 / 550 800
Telefax: +358 (0) 2 / 550 8841
E mail: —
UTECO A.B.E.E.
GREECE
5, Mavrogenous Str.
GR-18542 Piraeus
Phone: +30 (0) 1 / 42 10 050
Fax: +30 (0) 1 / 42 12 033
E mail: uteco@uteco.gr
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
IRELAND
EUROPE B.V. – Irish Branch
Westgate Business Park
IRL-Dublin 24
Phone: +353 (0) 1 / 419 88 00
Fax: +353 (0) 1 / 419 88 90
E mail: sales.info@meuk.mee.com
Getronics
NETHERLANDS
Industrial Automation B.V.
Control Systems
Donauweg 10
NL-1043 AJ-Amsterdam
Phone: +31 (0) 20 / 586 15 92
Fax: +31 (0) 20 / 586 19 27
E mail: infoautomation@getronics.com
MPL Technology SP. z.o.o
POLAND
ul. Wroclawska 53
PL-30011 Kraków
Phone: +48 (0) 12 / 632 28 85
Fax: +48 (0) 12 / 632 47 82
E mail: krakow@mpl.com.pl
INEA d.o.o.
SLOWENIA
Ljubljanska 80
SI-61230 Domžale
Phone: +386 (0) 17 21 80 00
Fax: +386 (0) 17 24 16 72
E mail: inea@inea.si
ECONOTEC AG
SWITZERLAND
Postfach 282
CH-8309 Nürensdorf
Phone: +41 (0) 1 / 838 48 11
Fax: +41 (0) 1 / 838 48 12
E mail: info@econotec.ch
GTS
TURKEY
Darülaceze Cad. No. 43A KAT: 2
TR-80270 Okmeydani-Istanbul
Phone: +90 (0) 212 / 320 1640
Fax: +90 (0) 212 / 320 1649
E mail: —
SHERF Motion Techn. LTD
ISRAEL
Rehov Hamerkava 19
IL-58851 Holon
Phone: +972 (0) 3 / 559 54 62
Fax: +972 (0) 3 / 556 01 82
EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES
SRV - Printed in Germany
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC
RUSSIA
EUROPE B.V.
12/1 Goncharnaya St, suite 3C
RUS-109240 Moskow
Phone: +7 (0) 95 / 915-8624/02
Fax: +7 (0) 95 / 915-8603
STC Drive Technique
RUSSIA
Poslannikov per., 9, str.1
RUS-107005 Moskow
Phone: +7 (0) 95 / 786 21 00
Fax: +7 (0) 95 / 786 21 01
INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
Gothaer Strasse 8 Phone: +49 2102 486-0
Fax:
+49 2102 486-717 www.mitsubishi-automation.de
D-40880 Ratingen Hotline: +49 2102 1805 000-765 megfa-mail@meg.mee.com www.mitsubishi-automation.com
Download PDF

advertising